Baldor Universal Remote mn792 User Manual

Series 29

Digital DC Control

Installation & Operating Manual

9/03

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Section 1

Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

1-2

Minimum Connection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power and Motor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reference and Jumpers for Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parameter Settings (for Keypad Operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reference and Jumpers for Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Speed Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Serial Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 2

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

2-2

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CE Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enclosure Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Product Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 3

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1

3-2

3-3

3-4

Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control and Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Local and Remote Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Source / Destination Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programming Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 4

Receiving and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1

4-2

4-3

4-4

4-5

4-6

4-8

4-9

4-11

Receiving & Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Location Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

External Vent Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optional Remote Keypad Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Line Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Protection Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Isolation Transformer Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Single Phase Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Logic Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

M-Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MN792

Table of Contents i

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Blower Motor Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Thermal Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Encoder Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tachometer Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control I/O Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RS232 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Port (P3) Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-12

4-13

4-14

4-15

4-16

4-17

4-18

Section 5

Switch Setting and Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pre–Operation Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power up in Local Mode with Armature Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power up in Remote Mode with Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Speed Loop Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Starting and Stopping Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Upload/Download Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DUMP Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1

5-5

5-12

5-13

5-17

5-18

Section 6

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AUX I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configure Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Current Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Current Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Field Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Jog/Slack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OP Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

6-4

6-6

6-8

6-11

6-12

6-14

6-15

6-17

6-18

6-21

6-25

6-26

6-28

6-29

6-30

6-31

ii Table of Contents

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Raise/Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setpoint Sum 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Speed Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standstill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Stop Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Port P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5703 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TEC Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-31

6-32

6-34

6-35

6-38

6-39

6-41

6-42

6-43

6-48

6-51

6-52

Section 7

Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Keypad LED Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Local Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

L/R Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PROG Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Menu Shortcuts and Special Key Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quick Tag Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Restore Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 button reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operation Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select a Menu View Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Language Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Deactivate a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1

7-2

7-3

7-4

7-6

7-7

7-8

7-9

7-10

7-11

Section 8

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1

8-2

8-3

Reset a Trip Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fault Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Serial (P3) Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Last Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Health Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Health Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Board LED Trip Information (Frame 4 and 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MN792

Table of Contents iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manage Trips from the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trip Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Symbolic Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Self Test Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Trip Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Viewing Trip Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inhibiting Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-4

8-5

8-6

8-7

Section 9

Specifications & Product Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Keypad Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Terminal Tightening Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EMC Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-1

9-2

9-3

9-4

9-5

Appendix A

CE Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-1

A-3

CE Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EMC – Conformity and CE – Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EMC Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix B

Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-1

Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parameters Listed by Tag Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parameters Listed by Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parameters Listed by WB Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-1

B-10

B-19

B-28

Appendix C

Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-1

iv Table of Contents

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 1

Quick Start

The basic steps for connection and setup are provided in this section. Detailed descriptions of each step and

parameter settings are provided later in this manual. Be sure to comply with all applicable codes when installing

this control. The Series 29 DC control is a one way control. That is, it is non–regen and cannot reverse

direction. It operates in the forward direction only. All references to reverse operation or regen operation apply

to the Series 30 DC Control only.

Minimum Connection Requirements Refer to Section 4 for cover removal procedure.

Power and Motor Connections

Figure 1-1 shows the minimum connections required at the power connector.

Figure 1-1 Power Connections

For Size 1 & 2 controls, be sure the

logic power jumper is in the correct

position. Refer to Figure 4-9.

To 1 Phase 115VAC Control Power

(except units with internal

control transformer,

3 Phase

Power

100hp and less)

GND

or jumper TH1 to TH2 if

motor thermistor is not connected.

Thermistor

Motor Blower connections when using optional

Motor Starter on Size 1 & 2 controls.

Field

Armature

Reference and Jumpers for Keypad Operation

For keypad operation, the speed reference connections are not required. Speed is set at the keypad. Figure

1-2 shows the minimum connections required A, B and C signal connectors for Keypad operation.

Figure 1-2 Reference and Jumper Connections

If Optional Speed Feedback Board is used, refer

to Speed Feedback at the end of this section.

Signal Connections

Minimum jumper connections:

A1 to A2 – 500 ohm jumper for 20mA input

A6 to B3 – Analog Input 5 = +10VDC

B8 to C9 – PROG Stop = +24VDC

B9 to C9 – Coast Stop = +24VDC

C4 to C9 – Enable = +24VDC

500 ohm

Jumper for

0-20mA

C1 to C2 – No External Trip

Parameter Settings (for Keypad Operation)

The factory settings should be sufficient to operate the control using the “Local” mode with the keypad. Only a

few changes to the motor data parameters must be made. Before any parameters can be changed, set

System::Configure I/O::Configure Enable to enable. All LEDs will blink during configuration.

Note: To separate the various menu level designation, a double colon is used (System::Configure I/O).

MN792

Quick Start 1-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reference and Jumpers for Remote Operation

For remote operation, the speed reference and other connections are made at the terminal strip connector. Not

all of these connections are shown in Figure 1-3.

Figure 1-3 Reference and Jumper Connections

Optional Speed

Feedback Board

Speed Reference connections:

– one end of Pot

– wiper of Pot

Signal

Connections

C1 to C2 – No External Trip

Minimum jumper connections:

A1 to A2 – 500 ohm jumper for 20mA input

A6 to B3 – Analog Input 5 = +10VDC

C4 to C9 – Enable = +24VDC

500 ohm

Jumper for

0-20mA

C1 to C2 – No External Trip

Jumper if contacts are not used:

B8 to C9 – PROG Stop = +24VDC

B9 to C9 – Coast Stop = +24VDC

The Health relay (24VDC coil) may be installed between B6 and C1

to provide fault indication to an external device or circuit.

Speed Feedback The factory setting for speed feedback is Armature Voltage which does not require an optional feedback

board. If an optional board must be used, refer to its manual to install and set the board configuration.

Serial Link

A PC COM port may be connected to the control at the System Port (P3). At Menu Level : Serial Links, all of

the parameters can be set for your application.

1-2 Quick Start

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ꢀ

and ꢁ scroll the menu choices, and “M” goes to next level menu and “E” comes back up one menu level.

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Apply Power

Keypad Display shows this opening

message.

Local control display.

FORWARD

REF:

0.00%

Press “PROG” key

Press “M” key

This message may be different for

each control size.

BALDOR DC DRIVE

DC 4Q 15A

MENU LEVEL

Press “M” key

Access the menus.

MENU LEVEL

DIAGNOSTICS

Press

ꢀ

Scroll to “Configure Drive” menu.

Access the Configure Drive Menu

Access Configure Enable.

MENU LEVEL

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Press “M” key

Press M twice to go down 2 menu

levels

CONFIGURE DRIVE

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Configure enable is disabled and

no parameter value can be

changed.

CONFIGURE ENABLE

DISABLED

Press ꢀ key

Press “E” key

Change Disabled to Enabled.

Configure enable must be enabled

to allow a change to any parameter

value. All LED’s on keypad are

blinking to show it is enabled.

CONFIGURE ENABLE

ENABLED

Return to the Configure Drive Menu

Set the motor volts.

CONFIGURE DRIVE

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Press

ꢁ

Use up and down arrows to set the

motor voltage.

NOM MOTOR VOLTS

ARMATURE CURRENT

FIELD CURRENT

FLD. CTRL MODE

FLD. VOLTS RATIO

MAIN CURR. LIMIT

AUTOTUNE

Set the armature current.

Use up and down arrows to set.

Press “E” when done.

Set the field current (skip if field is

in voltage mode.

Use up and down arrows to set.

Press “E” when done.

Set the field control mode (voltage

or current).

Use up and down arrows to set.

Press “E” when done.

Field Volts Ratio=

(field volts/AC supply)*100

Use up and down arrows to set.

Press “E” when done.

Set the current limit

(normally 100%).

Use up and down arrows to set.

Press “E” when done.

Leave autotune off.

Autotune after calibration is

complete.

Select Armature Volts, Analog

TACH or Encoder.

Use up and down arrows to set.

Press “E” when done.

SPEED FBK SELECT

ENCODER LINES

ENCODER RPM

Set the pulses per REV of the

encoder.

Use up and down arrows to set.

Press “E” when done.

Set the encoder max speed (100%

speed).

Use up and down arrows to set.

Press “E” when done.

Change the polarity of the encoder

signal if needed.

Use up and down arrows to set.

Press “E” when done.

ENCODER SIGN

SPD INT TIME

The Speed Loop Integral Gain.

Use up and down arrows to set.

Press “E” when done.

The Speed Loop Proportional Gain.

Use up and down arrows to set.

Press “E” when done.

SPEED PROP GAIN

MN792

Quick Start 1-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configure the drive parameters and block diagram connections.

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Press “M” key

Press ꢀ or

DC 4Q 15A

MENU LEVEL

Access the menus.

Scroll to “Configure Drive” menu.

MENU LEVEL

DIAGNOSTICS

ꢁ

Press “E” when done.

MENU LEVEL

SETUP PARAMETERS

Setup Parameters

At Menu Level : Setup Parameters, several sub menus set values for your application:

Ramps, AUX I/O, Op Station, Jog/Slack, Raise/Lower, Special Blocks, Field Control, Current Profile, Inverse

Time, Stop Rates, Calibration, Inhibit Alarms, Current Loop, Speed Loop, Standstill and Setpoint Sum 1.

Password

At Menu Level : Password, a password can be set to prevent unauthorized access to the setup and other

parameters.

Configure I/O

At Menu Level : System : Configure I/O, make the connections using the Tags to configure the block diagram to

your application.

Autotune

At Menu Level : Configure Drive, set Autotune to On, press “E” to exit configure menu. At the keypad, press L/R

for local mode. Press Run, the drive will autotune. When the drive stops and no error messages are displayed,

autotune was successful. Repeat the Save Parameters procedure to ensure the new values are saved.

When completed, change the Configure Enable parameter from Enabled to Disabled.

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Press ꢀ or

ꢁ

Press “M” key

Scroll to “Configure Drive” menu.

MENU LEVEL

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Access the Configure Drive Menu

Access Configure Enable.

Press M twice to go down 2 menu

levels

CONFIGURE DRIVE

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Configure enable is disabled and

no parameter value can be

changed.

CONFIGURE ENABLE

ENABLED

Press ꢀ key

Change Disabled to Enabled.

Return to the Menu Level.

Configure enable must be enabled

to allow a change to any parameter

value. All LED’s on keypad are

blinking to show it is enabled.

CONFIGURE ENABLE

DISABLED

Press “E” key 2 times

MENU LEVEL

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Save Parameters

At Menu Level : Save Parameters, save the settings you have programmed into the control. This will be the

parameters that are restored for use after power up. If you do not save the parameters, the factory settings (or

the last saved) will be used after a power up.

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Start at Menu

Level 1

MENU LEVEL

DIAGNOSTICS

Press

Press “M” key

Press

ꢁ

Scroll to “PARAMETER SAVE” menu.

MENU LEVEL

PARAMETER SAVE

UP TO ACTION

ꢀ

Press ꢀ to save parameters.

Parameters are saved. Except the

“Local Setpoint”.

PARAMETER SAVE

REQUESTED

Press “E” key

Exit one level

Press “E” several times to return to

the top level.

MENU LEVEL

PARAMETER SAVE

1-4 Quick Start

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 2

General Information

This manual is copyrighted and all rights are reserved. This document may not, in whole or in part, be copied or

reproduced in any form without the prior written consent of Baldor.

Baldor makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any

implied warranties of fitness for any particular purpose. The information in this document is subject to change

without notice. Baldor assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.

Microsoft and MS–DOS are registered trademarks, and Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. UL

and cUL are registered trademarks of Underwriters Laboratories.

Overview

The Series 29 DC control is a one way control. That is, it is non–regen and cannot reverse direction. It

operates in the forward direction only. All references to reverse operation or regen operation apply to the Series

30 DC Control only. The Baldor Digital DC control is a three phase, full wave, DC motor armature and field

control. The SCR bridge converts three phase AC power to controlled DC to operate the DC motor armature.

The AC input is also used for the reference transformer input to operate power supplies and synchronize to the

AC input line. This control is of the NEMA Type C designation.

The control may also be used with permanent magnet field motors and DC spindle drive motors. In addition,

standard feedback from armature may be used. An optional Encoder, Tachometer or resolver feedback is

available with optional expansion boards. The control can be configured to operate in a number of modes

depending upon the application requirements and user preference.

It is the responsibility of the user to determine the correct operating mode to use for the application. These

choices are made using the keypad as explained in this manual.

CE Compliance A custom unit may be required, contact Baldor. Compliance to Directive 89/336/EEC is the responsibility of the

system integrator. A control, motor and all system components must have proper shielding, grounding, and

filtering as described in MN1383. Please refer to MN1383 for installation techniques for CE compliance. For

additional information, refer to Section 4 and Appendix A of this manual.

Enclosure Sizes Five enclosure sizes are available:

Size 1

Size 2

Size 3

Size 4

Size 5

15A to 35A

40A to 165A

180A to 270A

380A to 830A

850A and larger

Limited Warranty

For a period of one (1) year from the date of original purchase, BALDOR will repair or replace

without charge controls and accessories which our examination proves to be defective in

material or workmanship. This warranty is valid if the unit has not been tampered with by

unauthorized persons, misused, abused, or improperly installed and has been used in

accordance with the instructions and/or ratings supplied. This warranty is in lieu of any other

warranty or guarantee expressed or implied. BALDOR shall not be held responsible for any

expense (including installation and removal), inconvenience, or consequential damage,

including injury to any person or property caused by items of our manufacture or sale. (Some

states do not allow exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above

exclusion may not apply.) In any event, BALDOR’s total liability, under all circumstances, shall

not exceed the full purchase price of the control. Claims for purchase price refunds, repairs, or

replacements must be referred to BALDOR with all pertinent data as to the defect, the date

purchased, the task performed by the control, and the problem encountered. No liability is

assumed for expendable items such as fuses.

Goods may be returned only with written notification including a BALDOR Return Authorization

Number and any return shipments must be prepaid.

MN792

General Information 2-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Product Notice Intended use:

These drives are intended for use in stationary ground based applications in industrial power installations

according to the standards EN60204 and VDE0160. They are designed for machine applications that require

variable speed controlled three phase brushless AC motors.

These drives are not intended for use in applications such as:

–

Home appliances

Mobile vehicles

Ships

Airplanes

Unless otherwise specified, this drive is intended for installation in a suitable enclosure. The enclosure must

protect the control from exposure to excessive or corrosive moisture, dust and dirt or abnormal ambient

temperatures.

In the event that a control fails to operate correctly, contact Baldor for return instructions.

Safety Notice:

This equipment contains high voltages. Electrical shock can cause serious or fatal injury. Only qualified

personnel should attempt the start–up procedure or troubleshoot this equipment.

This equipment may be connected to other machines that have rotating parts or parts that are driven by this

equipment. Improper use can cause serious or fatal injury. Only qualified personnel should attempt the start–up

procedure or troubleshoot this equipment.

–

System documentation must be available at all times.

Keep non-qualified personnel at a safe distance from this equipment.

Only qualified personnel familiar with the safe installation, operation and maintenance of this device

should attempt start-up or operating procedures.

–

Always remove power before making or removing any connections to this control.

PRECAUTIONS: Classifications of cautionary statements.

WARNING:

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

injury or death.

Caution:

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

damage to property.

Continued on next page.

2-2 General Information

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PRECAUTIONS:

WARNING:

Do not touch any circuit board, power device or electrical connection before you

first ensure that power has been disconnected and there is no high voltage

present from this equipment or other equipment to which it is connected.

Electrical shock can cause serious or fatal injury.

WARNING:

Be sure that you are completely familiar with the safe operation of this equipment.

This equipment may be connected to other machines that have rotating parts or

parts that are controlled by this equipment. Improper use can cause serious or

fatal injury.

WARNING:

Be sure all wiring complies with the National Electrical Code and all regional and

local codes or CE Compliance. Improper wiring may cause a hazardous

condition.

Be sure the system is properly grounded before applying power. Do not apply AC

power before you ensure that grounds are connected. Electrical shock can cause

serious or fatal injury.

Do not remove cover for at least five (5) minutes after AC power is disconnected

to allow capacitors to discharge. Electrical shock can cause serious or fatal

injury.

Improper operation may cause violent motion of the motor and driven equipment.

Be certain that unexpected movement will not cause injury to personnel or

damage to equipment.

WARNING:

Motor circuit may have high voltage present whenever AC power is applied, even

when motor is not moving. Electrical shock can cause serious or fatal injury.

If a motor is driven mechanically, it may generate hazardous voltages that are

conducted to its power input terminals. The enclosure must be grounded to

prevent a possible shock hazard.

WARNING:

The user must provide an external hard-wired emergency stop circuit to disable

the control in the event of an emergency.

Continued on next page.

MN792

General Information 2-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Caution:

To prevent equipment damage, be certain that the input power has correctly sized protective

devices installed as well as a power disconnect.

Avoid locating the control immediately above or beside heat generating equipment, or

directly below water or steam pipes.

Avoid locating the control in the vicinity of corrosive substances or vapors, metal particles

and dust.

Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than the RMS symmetrical short

circuit amperes listed here at rated voltage.

Horsepower RMS Symmetrical Amperes

1.5–50

5,000

51–200

201–400

401–600

601–900

10,000

18,000

30,000

42,000

Caution:

Baldor recommends not using “Grounded Leg Delta” transformer power leads that may

create ground loops and degrade system performance. Instead, we recommend using a

four wire Wye.

Caution:

Logic signals are interruptible signals; these signals are removed when power is removed

from the drive.

The safe integration of the drive into a machine system is the responsibility of the machine

designer. Be sure to comply with the local safety requirements at the place where the

machine is to be used. In Europe this is the Machinery Directive, the ElectroMagnetic

Compatibility Directive and the Low Voltage Directive. In the United States this is the

National Electrical code and local codes.

Caution:

Controls must be installed inside an electrical cabinet that provides environmental control

and protection. Installation information for the drive is provided in this manual. Motors and

controlling devices that connect to the driver should have specifications compatible to the

drive.

Caution:

Do not tin (solder) exposed wires. Solder contracts over time and may cause loose

connections.

Electrical components can be damaged by static electricity. Use ESD (electro-static

discharge) procedures when handling this control.

This control is not designed for regenerative use with stabilized shunt or compound wound

motors. If stabilized shunt or compound wound are to be used, the series field must be

isolated and not connected. Contact the motor manufacturer for motor derating

specifications under these conditions.

2-4 General Information

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 3

Getting Started

Control Overview

Control Loops

In very simple terms, control of the DC motor is maintained by Control Loops. An inner Current Loop and an

outer Speed Loop are used. These control loops are shown in the Block Diagram of Appendix C. From the

keypad, you can select the control loops to be used by the Control to provide either:

•

Current Control

Speed Control (factory setting)

Normally a current or speed feedback signal is applied to the appropriate loop to control the process. While

current feedback sensors are built–in, speed feedback is normally provided directly from the armature sensing

circuit (default), or by “Tachogenerator” or encoder connection to an option board.

Figure 3-1 Speed Control

speed increase due to field weakening

Armature Voltage 200V

Field Current 5.7A

armature voltage remains constant

field current reduced

Speed

base

speed

During speed control the speed of the motor can be increased by adjusting the motor field. Weakening the field

current allows an increase in motor speed beyond that normally achieved for the motor rated armature voltage.

Control and Communications

Some of the internal blocks of this control must be connected for your application. This means that you must

understand the application and how the software blocks should be connected to implement your design. The

block diagram in Appendix C shows the factory set connections. These diagrams assist in understanding this

concept and will be described next.

The Keypad (Operator Station) provides access to parameters, diagnostic messages, trip settings and full

application programming. The heart of the control is a microprocessor that provides advanced features such as:

•

Complex control algorithms not achievable by simple analog techniques.

Software configured control circuitry that uses standard software blocks.

Serial link communications with other drives or a PC for advanced process systems.

To customize drive performance for optimum use, you may need to configure, or reroute software connections to

and from the drive’s inputs and outputs and to and from the drive’s software blocks. You can configure the drive

and change software block parameter values either using the keypad or with a personal computer (PC) running

the software package Workbench D (see MN794).

MN792

Getting Started 3-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Local and Remote Modes

Determine what operating mode is best for your application. Four modes are possible, see Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Local and Remote Modes

Local:

For local operation, use the keypad to change parameters or control operation.

Keypad Setting

(Factory Setting)

Remote:

Terminal Strip Setting

Process control and other applications may require the control to be used in remote mode with

analog and digital input/output signals performing all control operations. The control is

configured in this mode from the factory.

Preset

Analog & Digital

Inputs and Outputs

Remote:

Serial Setting

Remote Serial mode is used to initially setup and configure the parameters of the control.

For applications that are controlled by a PC that is running suitable software. Workbench D is

recommended.

Remote:

COMMS Setting

For Baldor RS485/Modbus, Profibus DP and DeviceNet.

Two forms of control are in operation at all times: Start/Stop Control and Speed Control. These are operate by

local or remote control.

Local

The keypad is used to set motor speed and other parameters. The Start, Stop and Jog keys then control motor

rotation.

Remote

A speed reference signal (pot) and the various analog and digital inputs and outputs are used for speed control

and rotation of the motor shaft.

3-2 Getting Started

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Source / Destination Tags

The control is very flexible because of the programming capability. The software block diagram of the control is

shown in Appendix C. Each logic block has inputs and outputs. These I/O points are called “Tags” because

they have a tag number associated with it and shown in brackets “[tag]” . Some tags are read only values and

some are read/write. Besides setting the value of each parameter, its source or destination connections can be

programmed. This means you can connect inputs and outputs of logic blocks as you desire to implement your

application.

Destination Tag example

Consider Digital Input 1. The external connection (input) is made at the C connector pin 6. The block diagram of

this input is shown in Figure 3-3. Tag [102] is the destination tag for the output signal. The destination is

presently set to 90. This connects the output of Digital Input 1 to the Bipolar Clamps [90] input of the Current

Loop Logic Block. The value of [102] Digital output is determined by the switch position, either the value of [103]

or [104] will be applied to the output as the input changes from false to true.

Figure 3-3 Digital Inputs

Digital Input 1 – DIGIN 1 (C6)

Current Loop

[88] NEG I Clamp

Tag Parameter

Setting

0.00%

0.01%

[102] Destination Tag

[104] Value for False

[103] Value for True

Digital

Input 1

[102]

[71]

[90] Bipolar Clamps

[48] NEG I Clamp

Digital IN 1

Analog IN 4

Diagnostic

connection

[87] POS I Clamp

Source Tag example

Consider Digital Output 1. The external connection (output) is made at the B connector pin 5. The block

diagram of this input is shown in Figure 3-4. Tag [97] is the source tag for the input signal. The source is

presently set to 77. This means that Digital output 1 receives its input signal from [77] At Zero Speed parameter

from the Standstill Logic Block. To connect Digital Output 1 to the At Zero Setpoint parameter, simply change

[97] Source Tag value from 77 to 78.

Figure 3-4 Digital Outputs

Digital Output 1 – DIOUT 1 (B5)

Tag Parameter

[359] Inverted

[195] Threshold (>)

Setting

False

0.00%

Standstill

Digital

Output 1

[306] Source Tag

[11] Standstill Logic

[12] Zero Threshold

At Zero Setpoint [78]

At Zero Speed [77]

At Standstill [79]

[97] Source Tag

[43] Modulus

ABS

True

From these examples, it is easy to see that several things are required to program the control.

First, you must understand the application and know how to implement it in the control parameters.

Second, layout all of the connections for your application using the block diagrams in Appendix C.

Third, program the connections and parameter preset values. To do this you will need to refer to the

Parameter Values in Appendix B. This will tell you where in the keypad menu system you can locate

each parameter value or [tag].

For example, find [97] in Appendix B, (see Figure 3-5). To locate [97] using the keypad, begin at the System

menu, select Configure I/O menu, then select Digital Outputs menu, finally select Digital Output 1 (B5)

parameter. Change the value of that parameter to the desired value.

Note: Tag number “[97]” is not shown at the keypad for the Digital Output 1 (B5) parameter value. To display

the [TAG] number of the parameter, display the parameter value then press the “M” key to show the

parameters tag number. Appendix B and C are the key to programming your application.

Figure 3-5

Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL

OUTPUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)

Digout 1 (B5)

0 to 549

cp 2, 3

Select the next parameter and repeat step 3.

MN792

Getting Started 3-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programming Block A very important step to installing this control is to determine the configuration that will best implement your

application. Each input and output of each block has an assigned tag number. Tags are connected in software

much like jumper wires are used in hardware. The control is shipped with a factory set software connection.

This may be changed at any time. The method of changing these connections (source or destination tags) is

described later in the programming Section 6 of this manual.

Note: It is important to correctly set the software to implement your application in the most efficient way. Some

parameters are Tags (connections) and others are programmed values. Be careful when programming

to be sure the correct input or output is being set.

Example (View Analog Input 1 parameter settings)

As an example, a portion of the block diagram is shown in Figure 3-6. The output of Analog Input 1 [246] is

connected to [100] “Input 1” of Setpoint Sum 1 block. Each input and output shown on these diagrams is

programmable.

Figure 3-6 Analog Input Example

Setpoint Sum 1

Tag Parameter

[292] Sign 0

[208] Ratio 0

[309] Input 0

[420] Divider 0

[423] Input 2

[6] Ratio 1

[100] Input 1

[131] Deadband Width

[419] Divider 1

Factory Setting

Positive

1.0000

0.00%

1.0000

0.00%

1.0000

0.00%

Analog Input 1 – ANIN 1 (A2)

A/B

Tag Parameter

[231] Max Value

[230] Calibration

Factory Setting

+100.00%

1.0000

Analog

Input 1

[246]

[232] Min Value

[246] Destination Tag

-100.00%

100

1.0000

Positive

105.00%

[8] Sign 1

[375] Limit

The parameter values for Analog Input 1 can be changed at the keypad. Figure 3-7 shows a partial map of the

menu levels. The Analog Input 1 parameters are at Level 4 under the Level 3 Analog Inputs. The keypad

operation is shown in Table 3-1. Figure 3-7 can be used to visualize the menu structure that is being navigated

in Table 3-1.

Figure 3-7

Menu Levels

Diagnostics

Configure Enable

Analog Inputs

Software

Configure I/O

ANIN1 (A2)

System

Calibration

MAX Value

MIN Value

Destination Tag

Table 3-1 Set Analog Input 1 for 4–20mA

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Apply Power

Press “PROG” key

Press M

Keypad Display shows this opening

message.

FORWARD

REF:

0.00%

This message may be different for

each control.

BALDOR DC DRIVE

DC 4Q 35A

Access the menus.

This is menu level 1. Refer to Figure

3-7 for a description of the menu

levels.

MENU LEVEL

DIAGNOSTICS

Press

Press M

Press

ꢁ

Scroll to System menu. Press

several times.

ꢁ

This is menu level 1, System

parameters.

MENU LEVEL

SYSTEM

Access the System menus.

Scroll to Configure I/O menu.

Access Configure I/O menu.

SYSTEM

SOFTWARE

ꢁ

SYSTEM

CONFIGURE I/O

Press M

This is menu level 2.

CONFIGURE I/O

CONFIGURE ENABLE

3-4 Getting Started

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-1 Set Analog Input 1 for 4–20mA Continued

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Press M

Access Configure I/O menu.

This is menu level 3. Before any

parameter values can be changed,

Configure Enable must be “Enabled”

(it is normally disabled”).

CONFIGURE ENABLE

DISABLE

Press

ꢀ

Change Configure Enable to Enabled.

Access Configure I/O menu.

Note that the LED’s on Keypad are

CONFIGURE ENABLE

ENABLED

flashing until changed back to Disable.

Press E

Move back one menu level using the

E key.

CONFIGURE I/O

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Press

ꢁ

Scroll to analog inputs menu.

Access analog inputs 1 menu.

Access Calibration menu.

CONFIGURE I/O

ANALOG INPUTS

Press M

Press E

ANALOG INPUTS

ANIN1 (A2)

This is menu level 4.

ANIN1 (A2)

CALIBRATION

View or change the Calibration value.

Use the ꢀ and ꢁ keys to change the

value. Press E when finished.

CALIBRATION

1.0000

ANIN1 (A2)

CALIBRATION

Press

ꢁ

Scroll to next menu.

ANIN1 (A2)

MAX VALUE

Press M

Press E

View or change the MAX Value menu.

Use the ꢀ and ꢁ keys to change the

value. Press E when finished.

MAX VALUE

100.00%

ANIN1 (A2)

MAX VALUE

Press

ꢁ

Scroll to next menu.

ANIN1 (A2)

MIN VALUE

Press M

Press E

View or change the MIN Value menu.

Use the ꢀ and ꢁ keys to change the

value. Press E when finished.

MIN VALUE

–100.00%

ANIN1 (A2)

MIN VALUE

Press

ꢁ

Scroll to next menu.

ANIN1 (A2)

DESTINATION TAG

Press M

Press E

Press M

View or change the Destination tag

Value menu.

Use the ꢀ and ꢁ keys to change the

DESTINATION TAG

100

value. Press E when finished.

Press “E” several times to return to

the Configure Enable menu.

ANIN1 (A2)

DESTINATION TAG

Access Configure I/O menu.

This is menu level 2.

CONFIGURE I/O

CONFIGURE ENABLE

This is menu level 3. Before the

control can be used again, Configure

Enable must be “Disabled”.

CONFIGURE ENABLE

ENABLED

Press

ꢁ

Change Configure Enable to Disabled.

Note when ꢁ is pressed, the keypad

will briefly display “calibrating”

followed by Disabled and all Keypad

LED’s stop blinking.

CONFIGURE ENABLE

DISABLED

Press E

CONFIGURE I/O

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Press the “E” key several times to move back through the menu items or press “PROG” to return to control operation.

Note: When changing a numeric value, pressing the “M” key will change the cursor position one digit to the left.

MN792

Getting Started 3-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3-6 Getting Started

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 4

Receiving and Installation

Receiving & Inspection

Baldor Controls are thoroughly tested at the factory and carefully packaged for shipment. When you receive

your control, there are several things you should do immediately.

Observe the condition of the shipping container and report any damage immediately to the

commercial carrier that delivered your control.

Remove the control from the shipping container and remove all packing materials. The container and

packing materials may be retained for future shipment.

Verify that the part number of the control you received is the same as the part number listed on your

purchase order.

Inspect the control for external physical damage that may have been sustained during shipment and

report any damage immediately to the commercial carrier that delivered your control.

If the control is to be stored before use, be sure that it is stored in a location that conforms to

published storage humidity and temperature specifications stated in this manual.

Location Considerations The location of the control is important. Installation should be in an area that is protected from direct

sunlight, corrosives, harmful gases or liquids, dust, metallic particles, and vibration. Exposure to these can

reduce the operating life and degrade performance of the control.

Several other factors should be carefully evaluated when selecting a location for installation:

For effective cooling and maintenance, the control should be mounted vertically on a smooth

non-flammable surface.

At least 1.0 inches (25mm) top and bottom clearance must be provided for air flow. At least 0.4

inches (10mm) clearance is required between controls (each side).

Operating Altitude derating. Up to 1640 feet (500 meters) no derating required. Derate the

continuous and peak output current by 1% for each 660 feet (200 meters) above 1640 feet.

Maximum operating altitude 16,500 feet (5,000 meters).

Operating Temperature derating. 0°C to 45°C (Sizes 1, 2); 0°C to 40°C (Sizes 3,4,5) ambient.

Above rated temperature, derate the continuous and peak output current by 2% per °C above rating.

Maximum ambient is 55°C.

Table 4-1 Watts Loss Ratings

Catalog No.

Output

Current (A)

Watts Loss

(W)

Catalog No.

Output

Current (A)

Watts Loss

(W)

BC29D7A35–CO7

BC29D7A70–CO7

117

234

354

519

840

BC29D7A380–CO1/CO2

BC29D7A500–CO1/CO2

BC29D7A725–CO1/CO2

BC29D7A830–CO1/CO2

BC29D7A1580–CO1/CO2

380

500

1230

1590

2265

2580

4890

BC29D7A110–CO7

BC29D7A165–CO7

BC29D7A243–CO1/CO2

110

165

243

725

830

1580

MN792

Receiving & Installation 4-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cover Removal To connect power and signal wires, the cover must be removed. This procedure describes how to access all

terminal connections inside the control.

Loosen the two cover screws shown in Figure 4-8, then lift and remove the cover as shown.

Figure 4-1 Top Cover Removal

Lift and

remove cover

Cover

Screws

(2)

Locate the two 1/4 turn screws shown in Figure 4-2. Rotate each screw 1/4 turn CCW. This releases

the control from the base.

Figure 4-2 Signal Connections

Feedback Expansion

Board location

Communications Expansion

Board location

Signal Connections

1/4 Turn Screw

1/4 Turn Screw (1/4 turn to release,

press screw into hole to close).

Power Connections (Control and base must

be opened to view, see Figure 4-9)

Power Ground

Motor Ground

See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.

4-2 Receiving & Installation

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cover Removal Continued

The control and base are hinged and are opened as shown in Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-3 Hinged Assembly

Raise the control to

expose the base

Rubber

Grommet

Metal

360 Degree

Coupling Coupling

Hinge

Knock–out

panel

Control

The knock–out panel is part of the base

assembly to allow connections to be made.

Use the correct size rubber grommet,

conduit coupling or 360 degree coupling.

Base

360 Degree Coupling

Mechanical Installation

Mount the control to the mounting surface. The control must be securely fastened to the mounting surface by

the control mounting holes. The location of the mounting holes is shown in Section 9 of this manual.

External Vent Kit (Size 4 & 5 controls only)

Upper Housing

Foam gasket stretches over duct prior to

attaching upper housing.

Duct slides down between duct clip and mounting

panel and fits within the sides of the control housing.

Fit duct clip under fasteners at top of drive.

Be sure it is tight against the mounting panel.

MN792

Receiving & Installation 4-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Optional Remote Keypad Installation (Enclosure rating of IP54 when correctly mounted). The keypad may be

remotely mounted using optional Baldor keypad extension cable.

Tools Required:

•

Center punch, file and screwdrivers (Phillips and straight) and crescent wrench.

#19 drill and drill motor .

Figure 4-4 Remote Keypad Installation

Keypad ACBD01A01

CBLD030KP

Bezel ACBD02A01

Mounting Instruction:

Locate a flat mounting surface. Place the template on the mounting surface (step 1).

Accurately center punch the mounting holes.

Drill holes for the two mounting screws.

Use the drill to remove metal for the 27 x 29 mm rectangular hole (step 2).

Debur the rectangular hole making sure the panel stays clean and flat.

Remove the protective film from the keypad gasket (step 3).

Assemble the keypad to the panel. Use two screws provided (step 4).

Connect the 10 ft. cable at the keypad and P3 of the control (step 5).

Figure 4-5 Template

4-4 Receiving & Installation

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Electrical InstallationAll interconnection wires between the control, AC power source, motor, host control and any operator

interface stations should be in metal conduits. Use listed closed loop connectors that are of appropriate size for

wire gauge being used. Connectors are to be installed using crimp tool specified by the manufacturer of the

connector. Only class 1 wiring should be used.

System Grounding Baldor controls are designed to be powered from standard single and three phase lines that are electrically

symmetrical with respect to ground. System grounding is an important step in the overall installation. The

recommended grounding method is shown in Figure 4-6.

Figure 4-6 Recommended System Grounding (3 phase) for UL

Note: Wiring shown for clarity of grounding method only. Not representative of actual terminal block location.

Supply

(Mains)

A+

Armature

A–

Disconnect

and Fuses

F+

F–

Control

Field

TH1

TH2

Thermistor

Four Wire “Wye”

GND

Earth

Motor

Driven Earth Ground

(Facility Ground)

Route all power wires L1, L2, L3 and Earth

(Ground) together in conduit or cable.

See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.

Ungrounded Distribution System

With an ungrounded power distribution system it is possible to have a continuous current path to ground through

the MOV devices. To avoid equipment damage, an isolation transformer with a grounded secondary is

recommended. This provides three phase AC power that is symmetrical with respect to ground.

Input Power Conditioning

Baldor controls are designed for direct connection to standard single and three phase lines that are electrically

symmetrical with respect to ground. Certain power line conditions must be avoided. An AC line reactor or an

isolation transformer may be required for some power conditions.

•

If the feeder or branch circuit that provides power to the control has permanently connected power

factor correction capacitors, an input AC line reactor or an isolation transformer must be connected

between the power factor correction capacitors and the control.

•

If the feeder or branch circuit that provides power to the control has power factor correction

capacitors that are switched on line and off line, the capacitors must not be switched while the control

is connected to the AC power line. If the capacitors are switched on line while the control is still

connected to the AC power line, additional protection is required. TVSS (Transient Voltage Surge

Suppressor) of the proper rating must be installed between the AC line reactor or an isolation

transformer and the AC input to the control.

Line Impedance The control requires a 5% maximum line impedance (voltage drop across the reactor is 5% when the control

draws rated input current). If the impedance of the incoming power does not meet the requirement for the

control, a 3 phase line reactor can be used to provide the needed impedance in most cases. Line reactors are

optional and are available from Baldor.

The input impedance of the power lines can be determined as follows:

Measure the line to line voltage at no load and at full rated load.

Use these measured values to calculate impedance as follows:

(Volts_{No Load Speed}* Volts_{Full Load Speed}

)

%Impedance +

100

(Volts_{No Load Speed}

)

Power Disconnect A power disconnect should be installed between each input power source and the control for a fail–safe

method to disconnect power. The control will remain in a powered-up condition until all input power is removed

from the control and the internal voltage is depleted.

Protection Devices The control must have a suitable input power protection device installed. Input and output wire size is

based on the use of copper conductor wire rated at 75 °C. Table 4-3 describes the wire size to be used for

power connections and Table 4-4 describes the ratings of the protection devices.

Recommended fuse sizes are based on the following:

UL 508C suggests a fuse size of four times the continuous output current of the control.

Dual element, time delay fuses should be used to avoid nuisance trips due to inrush current when

power is first applied.

MN792

Receiving & Installation 4-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Electrical Installation Continued

Isolation Transformer Sizing

Use the information in Table 4-2 to select the KVA rating of the transformer based on the HP rating of the

control. The secondary voltage will be the input voltage to the control and the impedance should be 2% or less.

One exception to Table 4-2 is when the DC armature voltage is less than the AC input voltage. If this is the

case, use the following formula:

KVA + 0.00163 VAC_Secondary IDC_Secondary

Table 4-2 Isolation Transformer KVA Selection

KVA 7.5

7.5

100 125 150 200 250 300

118 145 175 220 275 330

Single Phase Power Since the control rectifies all three input power phases, operation from a single phase power source is

not possible.

Table 4-3 Wire Size

Armature

Current

Wire Size

Field Power Logic Power

Maximum

Output **

Catalog

Number

ꢀ

Armature

AWG MM

8.37

BL1,BL2,BL3

Cont. Peak

(Amps) (Amps)

Supply

AWG MM

Supply

AWG MM

AWG

12-22 3.31-0.326

BC29D7A35-CO7

BC29D7A70-CO7

8.37

21.2

42.4

85.0

152

355

634

2.08

105

165

248

365

570

750

1088

1245

2370

26.7

53.5

107.0

177

2.08

6-18

13.3-0.823

BC29D7A110-CO7

110

165

243

380

500

725

830

1580

1/0

2.08

8.37

BC29D7A165-CO7

100

150

200

300

400

500

900

3/0

4/0

BC29D7A243-CO1/CO2

BC29D7A380-CO1/CO2

BC29D7A500-CO1/CO2

BC29D7A725-CO1/CO2

BC29D7A830-CO1/CO2

BC29D7A1580-CO1/CO2

120

150

225

327

335

650

300kcmil

700kcmil

1250kcmil

1″x3″ BB*

2″x4″ BB*

350kcmil

750kcmil

1500kcmil

1″x3″ BB*

1″x4″ BB*

2″x4″ BB*

380

760

* BB is copper Bus Bar.

** Hp and kW are approximate at 500VDC Armature voltage.

Note: All wire sizes based on 75°C copper wire, 40°C ambient temperature, 4-6 conductors per conduit or raceway.

Table 4-4 Protection Devices

Fuse Rating

Catalog

Number

ꢀ

Armature

Field Supply (A)

Logic Supply (A)

(Ferraz–Shawmut) (Ferraz–Shawmut)

BC29D7A35-CO7

BC29D7A70-CO7

A60Q40

A70QS50-14F

A70QS80

A50QS80-4R

BC29D7A110-CO7

A50QS125-4R

A70QS150

BC29D7A165-CO7

A50QS175-4R

A70QS200

BC29D7A243-CO1/CO2

BC29D7A380-CO1/CO2

BC29D7A500-CO1/CO2

BC29D7A725-CO1/CO2

BC29D7A830-CO1/CO2

BC29D7A1580-CO1/CO2

A50QS300-4R

A70P350

A070URD32KI0400

A070URD32KI0630

A070URD32KI0800

A070URD32KI0900

A070URD32KI0900 *

A130URD73LI0450

A130URD73LI0700

A130URD73LI0900

14URD93TTF1250

12.5URD94TDF2300M

* 6 fuses per drive.

4-6 Receiving & Installation

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Electrical Installation Continued

Figure 4-7 Size 1–5 Power Terminal Locations

Size 1 and 2

Size 3

Power Connections

Earth from

D3, D4

D1, D2

D7, D8

D5, D6

AC Main Supply

Motor Ground

A+

D1 = FL1

D2 = FL2

D3 = F–

D4 = F+

D5 = 3

Size 4

Size 5

D6 = 4

A–

D7 = N

D8 = L

Logic Supply,

Contactor &

Thermistor

Logic Supply,

Contactor &

Thermistor

Connections

Field

Connections

Field

Connections

L2 L3

THERM+ and

THERM– are

on separate bd.

in door assembly

A-

A+

See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.

Table 4-5 Power Connector Signals

Terminal

Description

L1, L2, L3

Main AC input power. A 3–phase AC contactor should be connected in the main AC power supply connections.

(AC Contactor is internal for Size 1 and 2 controls. For other sizes, use terminals 3 and 4).

A+, A–

F+, F–

The motor armature is connected to busbar terminals A+ and A–. If a DC contactor is used the contactor poles

should be interposed between the control terminals and the motor terminals.

Connect the motor field (–) to terminal F– and field (+) to terminal F+. If the motor has no field connections, is a

permanent magnet motor, or if the field is derived externally, you must disable the Field Enable [170] parameter.

FL1, FL2

An external field supply may be used for Size 2–5 controls. Connect this supply to terminals FL1 and FL2. The

voltage is determined by the desired field voltage. The supply must be protected externally with suitable fuses.

Always derive the supply from the Red and Yellow phases of the main power supply, with the Red phase

connected to terminal FL1 and the Yellow phase connected to FL2.

3, 4

Size 3–5, the AC Contactor coil can be connected between TB3–3 (line) and TB3–4 (neutral) and its purpose is to

provide AC power disconnection. Maximum coil inrush current must not exceed 3A.

L, N

Single phase AC power for logic circuits. The auxiliary supply must be connected directly to the incoming supply,

(disconnect only). (Logic Supply is internal for Size 1 and 2 controls).

TH1, TH2

Connection for motor thermal protection. Thermistors must have a combined working resistance of 750 ohms or

less, increasing to at least 4k ohms at over–temperature. The alarm is latched and the contol must be restarted.

MN792

Receiving & Installation 4-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Electrical Installation Continued

Power Connections Single phase operation of this control is not possible.

Power connections are shown in Figure 4-8. (The location of these terminals is shown in Figure 4-9).

Figure 4-8 3 Phase Power Connections

Notes:

Earth

See Protection Device description in this section.

Metal conduit or shielded cable should be used. Connect conduits so

the use of a Reactor or RC Device does not interrupt EMI/RFI shielding.

Fuse

Connection

Note 1

Note 2

Note 3 & 4

Note 6

Use the same gauge wire for Earth as used for L1, L2, L3 connections.

Use same gauge wire for Earth ground as is used for L and N,

or L1, L2 L3. (VDE (Germany) requires 10mm²minimum,

6AWG).

Start

Contactor

Reference EMC wiring in Appendix A for CE compliance.

AC Contactor is internal for size 1 and 2 controls. Size 3–5, the

contactor can be connected between TB3–3 (line) and TB3–4

(neutral) and its purpose is to provide AC power disconnection.

Maximum inrush current must not exceed 3A.

TB3

TB1

This figure shows optional components not furnished with control.

See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.

Baldor Control

Figure 4-9 Size 1 & 2 Internal Logic Transformer Jumper Locations

Size 1 control

Move the jumper to the

correct voltage of the

L1,L2,L3 supply input.

Logic

Transformer

Note: When the internal logic

transformer is installed, FS7

on the main board is

Logic Trans.

Location

Size 1

removed. FS1 on the logic

supply board is used.

FS1

Conn1

Setting

480

400

230

208

Voltage Range

460–500

380–415

220–240

208

FS7

Size 2 control

208

230

400

Logic Trans.

Location

Size 2

480

Logic

Transformer

Move the jumper to the

correct voltage of the

L1,L2,L3 supply input.

(480V position shown.)

Power

Connections

Earth from

AC Main Supply

Motor Ground

See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.

Logic Power For size 1 and 2 controls, the logic transformer is internal. The location is shown in Figure 4-9. Because the

logic transformer is powered from the L1,L2,L3 input AC power, the jumper must be placed in the location that

corresponds to the AC line voltage.

For size 3, 4 and 5 controls the single phase logic power must be supplied by an external source. Normally

115VAC is applied at TB3 terminals L and N, see Figure 4-7 for the location. (Your control may have been

ordered with 230VAC logic power. In that case, 230VAC is applied at TB3 terminals L and N.)

4-8 Receiving & Installation

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Electrical Installation Continued

Motor Connections Motor connections are shown in Figure 4-10. (The location of these terminals is shown in Figure 4-9).

Note: If your motor requires more than 85% of the line voltage as its DC input voltage, a step up transformer is

required. This is added between the incoming line terminals and the L1 and L2 terminals of the field

supply module. This connection is phase sensitive with main input L1 and L2.

Figure 4-10 Motor Connections

Notes:

A+

1. Shield wires inside a metal conduit.

Armature

A–

2. Metal conduit should be used to shield output

wires (between control and motor). Connect

conduits for continuous EMI/RFI shielding.

F+

F–

Control

Field

TH1

TH2

Thermistor

GND

See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.

Motor

Note: The control may be connected to a permanent magnet field DC motor. In this case, the field supply is not

connected and the “Field Enable” [170] parameter must be set to “Disable”.

Shunt Wound

Typical shunt wound motor field connection 120/240V or

F1 F2 F3

150/300V. Consult manufacturers specific motor data for details.

240V or 300V

See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.

120V or 150V

External AC Field (Not available for size 1 controls)

The internal motor field is more widely used, it provides up to 90% of rated AC main voltage to the field

windings. However if an external field supply is required (an application that requires more field voltage than

90% of AC main), terminals FL1 and FL2 can be used. The magnitude of this voltage is determined by the

desired field voltage. The external supply must be protected with suitable fuses and disconnect. Always derive

the supply from the Red and Yellow phases of the main power supply, with the Red phase connected to FL1

and the Yellow phase to FL2 (see jumpers in the External Field Connections diagrams).

Figure 4-11 External Field Connections

Notes:

See Protection Device description in this section.

Metal conduit or shielded cable should be used. Connect conduits so

the use of a Reactor or RC Device does not interrupt EMI/RFI shielding.

Note 3 & 4

Earth

Fuse

Connection

Note 1

Note 2

External

Field Supply

Use the same gauge wire for Earth as used for L1, L2, L3 connections.

Use same gauge wire for Earth ground as is used for L and N.

(VDE (Germany) requires 10mm²minimum, 6AWG).

Reference EMC wiring in Appendix A for CE compliance.

AC Contactor is internal for size 1 and 2 controls. Size 3–5, the

contactor can be connected between TB3–3 (line) and TB3–4

(neutral) and its purpose is to provide AC power disconnection.

Maximum inrush current must not exceed 3A.

Start

Contactor

Note 6

This figure shows optional components not furnished with control.

See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.

FL1 FL2

TB3

TB1

Baldor Control

MN792

Receiving & Installation 4-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Electrical Installation Continued

External Field Terminal and Jumper Locations – Size 2

The position of the jumper selects the board to use either an internal or external motor field.

Figure 4-12 External Field Sensor Plug Jumper Settings

PLG1 to Power Board

PLG2 to Power Board

PLG3 to Power Board

Motor Vent Fan Circuit Breaker

External Field Selector Plug

L N 3 4 TH1 TH2

FL1 FL2 F+

F– M1 M2 M3

Terminal Board

Field Bridge

FL1 FL2

Field Bridge

FL1 FL2

L1 L2

Connection

No Connection

Jumper selecting external field supply

Jumper selecting internal field supply

See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.

External Field Terminal and Jumper Locations – Size 3

Relocating the Red and Yellow phase wires (as shown in Figure 4-13) allows terminals D1 and D2 on the Power

Board to be used as the external field AC supply connections. External fuse must not exceed 10A.

Figure 4-13 External Field Connections

Yellow

Power Board

F8 & F16 = Internal Field Supply.

F18 & F19 = External Field Supply.

Red

F19

F18

Red = FL1

Yellow = FL2

F16

Procedure:

Remove the control board (2 screws secure it) to allow access to the power board.

Remove the red phase lead from connector “F16” on the left–hand side of the board.

Connect the red phase lead to connector “F19” located below D1.

Remove the yellow phase lead to connector “F8” on the left–hand side of the board.

Connect the yellow phase lead to connector “F18” located below D2.

Connect L1 to D1, and L2 to D2. When using an external AC input it is important to have the correct

phase relationship on the terminals. The supply must be derived from L1 (Red) and L2 (Yellow)

phases directly or indirectly through a single phase transformer. L1 must be connected to D1, and L2

connected to D2.

4-10 Receiving & Installation

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Electrical Installation Continued

External Field Terminal and Jumper Locations – Size 4 and 5

Relocating the Red and Yellow phase wires (as shown in Figure 4-14) allows terminals FL1 and FL2 to be used

as the external field AC supply connections. External fuse must not exceed 30A.

Figure 4-14 External Field Connections

Yellow

Red

r ed

ye llo

F2 & F5 = Internal Field Supply.

F3 & F6 = External Field Supply.

EX L2

Red = FL1

Yellow = FL2

F14

F13

EX L1

EX A– EX A+

FL1 _FF_LL₂2

F+ F–

F–

FL1

F+

Procedure:

Remove the control board (2 screws secure it) to allow access to the power board.

Remove the red phase lead from connector “F2” on the left–hand side of the board.

Connect the red phase lead to connector “F3” located near the EX L1 terminal.

Remove the yellow phase lead to connector “F5” on the left–hand side of the board.

Connect the yellow phase lead to connector “F6” located near the EX L2 terminal.

Connect L1 to FL1, and L2 to FL2. When using an external AC input it is important to have the

correct phase relationship on the terminals. The supply must be derived from L1 (Red) and L2

(Yellow) phases directly or indirectly through a single phase transformer. L1 must be connected to

FL1, and L2 connected to FL2.

M-Contactor If required by local codes or for safety reasons, an M-Contactor (motor circuit contactor) may be installed.

However, incorrect installation or failure of the M-contactor or wiring may damage the control. If an M-Contactor

is installed, the control must be disabled for at least 20msec before the M-Contactor is opened or the control

may be damaged. M-Contactor connections are shown in Figure 4-15.

Figure 4-15 Optional M–Contactor Connections

A+

F+

F–

A–

* Optional

RC Device

Electrocube

RG1781-3

To Customer Provided

Power Source

(Rated Coil Voltage)

* M

* M-Contactor

F+

F–

M Enable

Note: Close “Enable”

after “M” contact closure.

M=Contacts of optional M-Contactor

See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.

Control faults may occur if the control is enabled before the M Contactor is closed. The timing diagram shown in

Figure 4-16 defines the correct operating sequence.

At Turn ON

Allow 20 milli seconds for the coil of the M contactor to energize and close the contactor before the Enable input

at C–4 is issued.

At Turn OFF

Do not allow the M Contactor to open until motor shaft rotation has stopped and the Enable at C–4 has been

removed. If this sequence does not occur, a TACH LOSS fault may be issued by the control.

Note: This example shows a “Drive ON” output to a PLC that is used to command the DC control and the

holding brake.

MN792

Receiving & Installation 4-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Electrical Installation Continued

Figure 4-16 M Contactor Operation Sequence

Turn-ON

Run Time

Turn-OFF

M Contact

Enable

20 msec.

Motor Flux

“Drive ON”

Output

Mech. Brake Release

(If user installed)

50 msec.

Brake Set Time

Speed/Torque

Command

Blower Motor Starter Optional Size 1 and 2 controls only.

Size 1 and 2 controls can be equipped with an optional blower motor starter that uses a manual motor circuit

controller to provide motor overload and branch circuit protection for a single or three phase AC blower motor.

The starter assembly is fully wired and ready for site installation. This option offers

ꢂ

Branch circuit protection

Instantaneous magnetic short circuit protection

Thermal overload protection, Class 10, with adjustable trip current settings

Start/Stop/Reset switching with “tripped“ pushbutton indication

Normally open auxiliary contact wired into the drive logic to indicate “Motor Overtemperature“ trip

Installation

Open the cover to view the fuse board (Figure 4-3).

Position the starter assembly horizontally across the top of the drive so that the harness points

downward toward the power terminals.

Align the bracket with its mounting slots on the inside walls of the drive. Snap into place with a firm

push until the tabs engage.

Locate the 14 pin header for the blower motor starter connections.

For size 1, this connector is CONN 2, located at the top left corner of the fuse board.

For size 2, this connector is CONN 44 located at the right edge of the terminal board.

This connector has a jumper installed at the right most two pins. Remove and save this jumper.

Plug the 14 pin connector from the blower motor starter onto this connector.

Use a small screwdriver to set the full load current of the blower motor on the dial of the blower motor

starter.

Connect the blower motor leads to terminals BL1, BL2, BL3 (Figure 4-7).

Press the Start button on the blower motor starter. Installation is now complete.

4-12 Receiving & Installation

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Electrical Installation Continued

Thermal Protection Terminals TB3 TH1 and TH2 are available for connection to a normally closed thermostat or overload

relay in all operating modes as shown in Figure 4-17. The thermostat or overload relay should be a dry contact

type with no power available from the contact. If the motor thermostat or overload relay activates (opens), the

control will automatically shut down and give an Thermistor fault. The optional relay (CR1) shown provides the

isolation required and the N.O. contact is closed when power is applied to the relay and the motor is cold. If the

motor thermostat is tripped, CR1 is de-energized and the N.O. contact opens.

Connect the motor thermal wires (N.O. relay contact) to TH1 and TH2. Do not place these wires in the same

conduit as the motor power leads.

Figure 4-17 Motor Temperature Relay

Customer Provided

Source Voltage

Note: Add appropriately rated protective

If the motor thermostat is not used,

TH1 and TH2 must be jumpered

together to allow operation.

device for AC relay (snubber)

or DC relay (diode).

TB3

* Optional hardware. Must be ordered separately.

Thermostat

CR1

TH1

TH2

See recommended terminal

tightening torques in Section 9.

Do not run these wires in same conduit

as motor leads or AC power wiring.

Motor Thermostat Leads

* Motor

See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.

Encoder Installation Electrical isolation of the encoder shaft and housing from the motor is required. Electrical isolation

prevents capacitive coupling of motor noise that will corrupt the encoder signals. Baldor provides shielded wire

for encoder connection. Table 4-6 defines the encoder connections to the encoder receiver expansion board.

Figure 4-18 shows the electrical connections of the encoder. The expansion board is installed in the feedback

EXB location shown in Figure 4-2.

Open the top cover (Figure 4-1).

Align the 10 pin connector on the board with the connector on the left side of the control.

Carefully push the encoder board into position being careful not to bend any pins. All four stand–offs

should contact the control.

Connect the encoder wires to the expansion board, see Table 4-6 and Figure 4-18.

Table 4-6 Encoder Connection Descriptions

Description

Encoder Connector

No.

Encoder Receiver

Board Pin.

+VCC Supply

Not used (VCC Sensor) Not used (VCC Sensor)

0VDC

+VCC Supply

0VDC

Not used (0VDC Sensor)

Cable Shield

Figure 4-18 Differential Encoder Connections

Align the 10 pin connector to the 10 pin connector

of the control (see Figure 4-2 for location). Carefully

seat the board onto the pins until all four standoffs

contact the control surface.

Encoder

Expansion

Board

0VDC (Isolated)

+VCC (Isolated)

Channel A

Channel B

Potentiometer (VCC Adjust)

To Encoder

Torque to 3.5 lb-in (0.4Nm)

16-22AWG

Encoder Case

MN792

Receiving & Installation 4-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Electrical Installation Continued

Tachometer Installation The tachometer expansion board can be used to connect either an AC Tach or a DC Tach to the

control (only one may be used). Shielded wire must be used for tachometer connection. Table 4-7 defines the

tachometer connections to the tachometer expansion board. Figure 4-19 shows the electrical connections of

the tachometer. Figure 4-20 shows the settings for this board.

Note: DC Tachometers provide speed and direction feedback. AC tachometers provide only speed feedback.

Table 4-7 Tachometer Connection Descriptions

Description

Tachometer Receiver

Board Pin.

AC Tach Input

DC Tach Input +

DC Tach Input – (0VDC)

Figure 4-19 Tachometer Connections

Align the 10 pin connector to the 10 pin connector of the

control (see Figure 4Ć2 for location). Carefully seat the board

onto the pins until all four standoffs contact the control surface.

Tachometer

Expansion

Board

To AC Tach

G G G G

To DC Tach

Torque to 5.3 lb-in (0.6Nm)

Figure 4-20 Switch Settings

SW1 = Ones calibration switches.

SW2 = Tens calibration switches.

SW3 = Down adds 100 VDC in the down position (100's position).

Calibration

Switches

SW4

SW1

SW2

SW4 = Up for AC Tach; Down for DC Tach.

SW4

10"

As shown, switches are set for 188VDC for a DC tach:

(SW3 + SW2 + SW1 = 100 + 80 + 8 = 188)

Jumper

SW3

The jumper is always used. It plugs onto the control PCB in just about the

position shown. This jumper is where the actual scaled signal connects from

the Tach board to the controller PCB.

SW4

100"

For full speed tach voltages greater than 200V, an external resistor of value

RE must be used in series with the DC Tach connection at G3. The value

RE is calculated as follows:

(Max Tach Volts * 200)

RE ohms =

Torque to 5.3 lb-in (0.6Nm)

RE Watts = (Max Tach Volts * 200) 5 milliwatts

In general, the voltage output of an analog AC or DC tachometer generator is a function of speed and is rated in

volts per 1000 RPM so that:

Speed Feedback Voltage_Max(volts) + Motor Speed_Max(RPM) x Tach Rating

The Tach Rating should be on the nameplate of the tachometer generator. Fine tuning is performed within the

software (refer to the Speed Feedback Calibration). If the full speed feedback voltage exceeds 200 VDC, use an

external resistive scaling network to drop the feedback voltage to within this range.

For AC tachometer generators, the switch settings will be about 1.3 times greater than the voltage measured at

the input terminals G1 and G2 due to the rectifier offset. For example, for 90V feedback, the switch setting is:

2 Required Voltage Feedback + 2 90 + 127V

4-14 Receiving & Installation

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Control I/O Signal Connections

All connections made to terminal blocks A, B and C must be isolated signal voltages. If in doubt a connection,

contact Baldor. Only shielded, twisted pair cables should be use. Minimum wire size is 18AWG (0.75mm²). All

cables should be installed using the appropriate coupling in the knock out panel, shown in Figure 4-3.

Analog Inputs Five analog inputs are available, AnIn1 – AnIn5 (AnIn4 and AnIn5 are factory set for current limits).

Connector

Terminal

Signal Description

0V common reference point for all analog signals.

Analog Input 1. 0–20 or 4–20mA analog input speed input. Used as a unipolar 0–20mA ramped speed command

channel. 4–20mA requires manually setting Min value to 25%, Max Value to 125% and setting Setpoint Sum1, Input

2 to (–)25%. These settings will provide the proper scaling and offset to set 4mA to zero command. Any input less

than 4mA will result in a Min Value of 25% being added to (–)25% at the Setpoint Sum 1 summing junction.

Analog Input 2. ±10V analog input speed or torque reference without Accel/Decel ramps. +10V = maximum forward

speed demand. –10V = maximum reverse speed demand.

Closing C8 (Digital Input 3) selects Torque Command Mode by enabling the IDMD Isolate input (Current Loop Block).

Opening C8 selects Speed Command Mode by disabling the IDMD Isolate input.

In all cases this analog command channel bypasses the Ramps Block.

Analog Input 3. ±10V analog input speed or torque reference with Accel/Decel ramps.

By closing the Reverse input at C5, the direction of the unipolar command can changed. Output of Ramps block is

connected to Setpoint 1 of the Speed Loop block. Various voltage range, and bipolar or unipolar commands can be

accepted by adjusting Calibration, Max Value, and Min Value parameters of Analog Input 3.

Analog Input 4. Optional Negative Current Clamp. Inactive until Bipolar Clamps parameter is set to Enable. When

enabled, this input is the value of the negative current limit.

Analog Input 5. External Current Limit / Optional Positive Current Clamp. A jumper is supplied from B3 (+10V Ref) to

A5 to allow full rated 150% current. When Bipolar Clamps parameter is set to Disabled, this input is the main current

limit value. When Bipolar Clamps parameter is set to Enable, this input value is the positive or

forward current limit.

Note: The settings for AnIn1 – AnIn5 are factory set but can be changed to suit your application.

Speed Setpoint

The speed demand signal can be generated using an external 10K potentiometer as shown in Figure 4-21. The wiper is the

speed reference.

Figure 4-21 Analog Inputs

Control I/O

Connectors

Setpoint Ramp Input

Analog GND

Analog Input

Pot Reference

500

0-20 mA or

4-20 mA Input

Command Pot

AnIn3

10KW

AnIn1

+10VDC

Multiple Speed Setpoints

Control

0–10VDC or ±10VDC Input

AnIn2

Speed Setpoint 1 (Non-Ramped)

Speed Setpoint 2 (Ramped)

AnIn3

Control

See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.

MN792

Receiving & Installation 4-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Control I/O Signal Connections Continued

Analog Outputs

Connector

Terminal

Signal Description

A7, A8, A9 Three analog outputs are available, AnOut1 – AnOut3. A1 is the 0V common reference point.

Figure 4-22 Analog Outputs

Analog Outputs

Analog Output 1 (±10VDC)

Analog Output 2 (±10VDC)

Analog Output 3 (±10VDC)

AnOut1

AnOut2

Arm I Fbk

Control

See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.

Digital Inputs C4 (Enable) must be connected to C9 (+24V) to allow the drive to run when start command is given.

Connector

Terminal

Signal Description (factory settings)

Program Stop. When opened runs a decel rate set by Stop Rates, Prog Stop Time.

Coast Stop. When opened disables the drive output.

External Trip. When opened disables the drive output and creates an External Trip Fault.

Start/Stop. Closed initiates a Start/Run forward sequence. When opened commands Stop and decels at Stop Rates,

Stop Time setting.

Enable. Closed enables the drive and allows output to the motor.

Reverse. Closed changes the slope of the speed command signal from Analog Input 1 and Analog Input 2.

Accomplished by activating the “Ramp Invert” input of the Ramps block.

Jog / Slack.

If terminal C4 is closed and Start/Stop terminal C3 is open, motor will be commanded to run forward at Jog Speed 1.

If terminal C4 is closed and Start/Stop terminal C3 is closed, motor will be commanded to run forward at active speed

setpoint plus Jog/Slack Take Up 1 speed. Various Jog or Slack take–up functions Various Jog or Slack take–up

functions are commanded depending on the various settings of terminals C3, C4 and Jog/Slack Mode C7.

Jog/Slack Mode. See Jog/Slack description in Section 6 for description of modes.

Speed/Torque Select. Open selects speed (velocity) mode. Closed selects current (torque) mode.

Accel/Decel ramps are not used in Torque mode.

Start (C3), Enable (C4), Reverse (C5), Program Stop (B8) and Coast Stop (C9).

The basic Run/Start sequence is initiated by C3 (Start/Run). Other safeguards are provided by B8 (Program

Stop) and B9 (Coast Stop). Assuming that the Program Stop and Coast Stop terminals are held TRUE, then a

single contact connected between C9 (+24V) and C3 (Start/Run) when closed will cause the control to

energize the Main Contactor and when C5 (Enable) is also TRUE the motor will rotate.

When the single contact to C3 (Start/Run) is opened, the controller will decelerate the motor to zero speed at a

rate determined by the STOP TIME parameter value and the MAIN CURR. LIMIT value. If the load is to be

serviced, the control must be securely disabled and isolated, do not rely on this mode.

4-16 Receiving & Installation

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Control I/O Signal Connections Continued

Figure 4-23 Run/Stop Connections

Program Stop

Coast Stop

Start

Enable

Reverse

Jog/Slack

Jog/Slack Mode

Speed/Torque Select

+24VDC

Control

Emergency Stop Relay (Optional)

(Shown in energized - Run position)

See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.

A regenerative drive can be stopped using a Normal Stop, a Program Stop, or an Emergency Stop.

Normal Stop

If the +24V is removed from C3 during operation, the control will cause the motor to stop at a rate determined by

Stop Limit, Stop Time and Curr. Limit.

Program Stop

If the +24V is removed from B8 during operation, the control will cause the motor to stop at a rate determined by

Prog Stop I Lim, Prog Stop Limit and Prog Stop Time. If +24V is re–applied to B8, the motor remains stationary

until a new Start command is applied to C3 (Start/Run).

Coast Stop

If the +24V is removed from B9 during operation, the control will remove power to the motor and the motor and

load will coast to a stop.

Emergency Stop (Optional)

When the “Emergency Stop Relay” is de–energized its contacts disconnect +24VDC from the inputs shown in

Figure 4-23. The control will remove power to the motor and the motor and load will coast to a stop. The

emergency stop relay should not be part of the normal sequencing of the system, but is an emergency operation

when safety is the main concern. If the load is to be serviced, the control must be securely disabled and

isolated, do not rely on this mode.

Digital Outputs

Connector

Terminal

Signal Description

B5, B6, B7 Three digital outputs are available, DigOut1 – DigOut3. B1 is the 0V common reference point.

These digital output terminals provide a +24VDC output signal under certain conditions. An LED, Lamp, Relay

or other device can be connected at these outputs to indicate the condition of control operation. These are

configurable outputs and can be used as required in the control system design, i.e. panel lamps, connection to a

suitable PLC. Simply connect a 24VDC relay between the output and B1 (0VDC). Be sure to use a reverse

biased diode or other noise elimination device across the relay coil, see Figure 4-24.

Figure 4-24 Optional Digital Output Relay Connection

Note: Add appropriately rated protective

device for AC relay (snubber)

or DC relay (diode).

CR1

MN792

Receiving & Installation 4-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RS232 Connections The keypad connector shown in Figure 4-25 is used for RS232 communications. Workbench D is the

block programming software for Windows PCs. It has a graphical user interface and drawing tools to allow you

SERIAL LINKS

to create block programming diagrams quickly and easily.

SYSTEM PORT P3

Figure 4-25 System Port (P3) Keypad Connector

P3 SETUP

MODE

P3 BAUD RATE

View into the connector.

3 4

A null modem cable (also called a modem eliminator cable) must be used to connect the control and the

computer COM port. This will ensure that the transmit and receive lines are properly connected. Either a 9 pin

or a 25 pin connector can be used at the computer, Figure 4-26. Maximum recommended length for RS232

cable is 10 ft. (3 meter).

Figure 4-26 9 & 25 Pin RS-232 Cable Connections

9 Pin Connector

Null Modem Cable Connections

Signal

RXD

TXD

RXD

TXD

RXD

TXD

Computer

COM

Control

Port

GND

25 Pin Connector

(DCE)

GND

(DTE)

Chassis

Signal

RXD

TXD

GND

Table 4-8 Cable Connections

P3 Connector

DB Connector Type and Pin Number

Signal Name

GND/0VDC

24VDC

DB9

DB25

RXD

TXD

System Port (P3) Configuration

The factory port settings are normally fine. These settings are:

9600 Baud

8 Bits

1 Stop Bit

No Parity

XON/XOFF Handshaking (fixed)

If the port settings must be changed, attach a keypad to the control and change the settings under the P3

SETUP menu. Refer to Keypad Operation for additional information to make these parameter value changes.

4-18 Receiving & Installation

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 5

Switch Setting and Start-Up

Pre–Operation Checks

When the installation is complete, several things should be verified before power is applied.

Be sure AC power is off at the main disconnect or circuit breakers.

Measure the main AC supply voltage (to the disconnect or breaker) and verify that it matches the

nameplate rating of the control.

If the catalog number on the nameplate ends with “CO1”, an external 115VAC logic control supply is

required (C02= 230VAC Logic). Verify Auxiliary power supply voltage is correct.

Verify the armature voltage and current ratings of the motor are correct.

Inspect all power connections (line and motor) for accuracy, workmanship tightness and compliance

to codes.

Verify that the control and motor are grounded to each other and that the control is connected to

earth ground.

Verify all signal wiring for accuracy and tightness.

Be certain that all contactor, brake or relay coils have noise suppression. This should be an RC filter

for AC coils or a reverse biased diode for DC coils. MOV type transient suppression is not adequate.

Disconnect the load from the motor shaft if possible.

10. If possible, verify the motor shaft rotates freely.

11. Verify the cooling fan (blower) is free from obstruction.

12. Verify that the external run contacts are open.

13. Verify that external speed setpoints are all zero.

Size 4 and 5 Only – Power Board Calibration

Power Board

IA CAL – Armature Current Calibration Switch (SW1)

This switch is always set to LO on Frame 4 & 5 drives of less than 500A, and HI for drives greater

than 500A.

F CAL – Field Current Calibration Switch (SW2)

This switch should always be set to HI for Frame 4 & 5 drives. The maximum field current calibration

is 30A.

IF CAL

SW2

IA CAL

SW1

Power up in Local Mode with Armature Feedback

When pre–operation checks are complete, logic power can be applied to terminals L and N to setup the

software parameters (catalog number C01=115VAC, C02=230VAC). For other catalog numbers (100hp and

less), the logic power is provided internally so 3 phase power must be applied at this time.

(The start up mode is defined by Parameter [517] =True for keypad operation which is the same as “SETUP

PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START UP VALUES::LOCAL = TRUE”.)

Note: To separate the various menu level designation, a double colon is used (SETUP PARAMETERS::OP

STATION).

Apply logic power.

Verify that the keypad and LED’s display correctly. If not, verify that the logic wiring is correct.

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Apply Logic Power

Keypad Display shows this opening

LED’s are all ON.

INITIALIZING

at terminals L and N message.

LED’s are flashing. After several

seconds the next screen is displayed.

BALDOR DC DRIVE

CALIBRATING

If [517] is True, local mode will be

displayed (factory setting)

The OK, SEQ, REF, FWD and STOP

LED’s are on.

FORWARD

REF:

0.00%

MN792

Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power up in Local Mode with Armature Feedback Continued

Set the parameter Configure Enable to “Enabled”.

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Apply Logic Power

Keypad Display shows this opening

message.

LED’s are flashing. After several

seconds the next screen is displayed.

FORWARD

REF:

0.00%

Press “PROG” key

Press “M” key

BALDOR DC DRIVE

DC 4Q 35A

MENU LEVEL

Press “M” key

Access the menus.

MENU LEVEL

DIAGNOSTICS

Press

ꢀ

Scroll to “Configure Drive” menu.

Access Configure Drive menu.

MENU LEVEL

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Press “M” key

CONFIGURE DRIVE

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Access the Configure Enable

parameter.

CONFIGURE ENABLE

DISABLED

Press

ꢀ

Enable Configure Enable.

All LED’s are now flashing.

Press “E” when done.

CONFIGURE ENABLE

ENABLED

Press “E” key

Returns to previous menu level.

CONFIGURE DRIVE

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Set the Nominal Motor Volts (Armature Voltage) in the Configure Drive menu.

Action

ꢁ

Description

Scroll to the NOM Motor volts

parameter.

Display

Comments

Press

CONFIGURE DRIVE

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Press “M” key

Access the NOM Motor Volts

parameter

CONFIGURE DRIVE

NOM MOTOR VOLTS

Press “PROG” key

Press ꢀ to change to current control if

desired. Press “E” when done.

NOM MOTOR VOLTS

180 VOLTS

Set the Armature Current. Note the maximum armature current from the motor name plate and set

this value in the Armature Current parameter.

Action

ꢁ

Description

Scroll to the Armature Current

parameter.

Display

Comments

Press

CONFIGURE DRIVE

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Press “M” key

Access the Armature Current

parameter

CONFIGURE DRIVE

ARMATURE CURRENT

Press “PROG” key

Press ꢀ to change to current control if

desired. Press “E” when done. Max

value is hardware limited.

ARMATURE CURRENT

11.5 AMPS

Note: Holding the M key scrolls the

cursor the left most digit so it can be

changed more quickly.

5-2 Switch Setting & Start-Up

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power up in Local Mode with Armature Feedback Continued

Set the Field Current. Note the nominal field current from the motor rating plate and set this value in

the Field Current parameter.

Action

ꢁ

Description

Scroll to the Field Current parameter.

Display

Comments

Press

CONFIGURE DRIVE

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Press “M” key

Access the Field Current parameter

CONFIGURE DRIVE

FIELD CURRENT

Press “PROG” key

Press ꢀ to change to current control if

desired. Press “E” when done. Max

value is hardware limited.

FIELD CURRENT

0.2 AMPS

Set the Field Control Mode to Field Voltage or Field Current control. Refer to section 6 for more

information. The factory setting is Voltage Control mode.

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Press ꢁ several

times

Scroll to the field control mode

parameter.

CONFIGURE DRIVE

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Press “M” key

Access the field control mode

CONFIGURE DRIVE

FLD CTRL MODE

Press “PROG” key

Press ꢀ to change to current control if

desired. Press “E” when done.

FLD CTRL MODE

VOLTAGE CONTROL

Set the Field Volts Ratio. Enter the calculated ratio into the parameter given by the equation: A

setting of 90% is the maximum value obtainable, i.e. field output = 0.9 x VAC

FieldVolts (Nameplate)

100

Input Volts AC_RMS

Action

ꢁ

Description

Scroll to the field volts ratio parameter.

Display

Comments

Press

CONFIGURE DRIVE

FLD CTRL MODE

Press “M” key

CONFIGURE DRIVE

FLD VOLTS RATIO

Access the menus.

Press ꢀ to increase the value if

desired. Press “E” when done.

FLD VOLTS RATIO

0.00%

Press

ꢀ

Scroll to “Configure Drive” menu.

CONFIGURE DRIVE

FLD VOLTS RATIO

Set the Configure Dive::Configure Enable parameter to disable (see step 3).

10. Save the settings.

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Start at Menu

Level 1

MENU LEVEL

DIAGNOSTICS

Press

Press “M” key

Press

ꢁ

Scroll to “PARAMETER SAVE” menu.

MENU LEVEL

PARAMETER SAVE

UP TO ACTION

ꢀ

Press ꢀ to save parameters.

Parameters are saved. Except the

“Local Setpoint”.

PARAMETER SAVE

REQUESTED

Press “E” key

Exit one level

Press “E” several times to return to

the top level.

MENU LEVEL

PARAMETER SAVE

MN792

Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power up in Local Mode with Armature Feedback Continued

The control is now ready to run from the keypad using armature feedback.

The logic power is still applied, the keypad display is normal, the motor is connected but the load is

removed.

Apply 3 phase power.

Verify that the keypad and LED displays are still normal, with no error messages.

Set the Speed Setpoint parameter to zero.

Verify that the Main CURR. Limit is set to 0.00%. View ANIN 5 (A6) parameter in the level 1

Diagnostics menu and verify it displays 0.00V.

Press JOG at the keypad. Verify that 3–phase mains is applied to Power Terminals L1, L2 and L3

and immediately check that the correct field voltage appears between the control supply terminals F+

and F–. If the field voltage is not correct, check one of the following:

Internally Supplied Field:

Check that 3–phase is applied to terminals L1, L2 and L3 when the main contactor is closed.

Check that the fuses on the power board or supression board are healthy.

Verify the Field Enable parameter is set to Enable.

Is the FLD CTRL Mode parameter set to Voltage Control or Current Control?

If set to VOLTAGE CONTROL, check the value of the FLD. VOLTS RATIO parameter. Set this

to 65% to obtain 300V fields from 460V lines.

If set to CURRENT CONTROL, check the field current calibration.

If the field volts are at maximum, check the field continuity. (The field current may initially be

less than the rated value due to a cold field.)

Externally Supplied Field: (not available for size 1and 2 controls)

Refer to Chapter 4 Installation, Motor Field Connections for conversion details.

Check the voltage applied (externally fused) to terminals FL1 and FL2.

Check the phasing of voltage applied to FL1 and FL2:

FL1 must be connected directly or indirectly to the Red phase on main power terminal L1.

FL2 must be connected directly or indirectly to the Yellow phase on main power terminal L2.

Verify the Field Enable parameter is set to Enable.

Is the FLD CTRL Mode parameter set to Voltage Control or Current Control?

If set to Voltage Control, check the value of the FLD. Volts Ratio parameter. Set this to 65% to

obtain 300V fields from 460V lines.

If set to Current Control, check the field current calibration set–up, refer to “Calibration”.

Verify that the OK and STOP LEDs are On, also either the FWD or REV LED.

This verifies keypad operation of the control and motor. The control may be used in this mode after the load is

connected or additional wiring changes can be made for operation from the terminal strip.

5-4 Switch Setting & Start-Up

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power up in Remote Mode with Feedback This procedure assumes that the terminal strip (connectors A, B C) are wired

according to the instructions provided in Section 4 and the feedback device is properly installed. (The start up

mode is defined by Parameter [517] =False for remote operation which is the same as “SETUP

PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START UP VALUES::LOCAL = FALSE”.)

When pre–operation checks are complete, logic power can be applied to setup the software parameters. At this

point, 3 phase power should remain off, if possible.

Apply Logic power.

Verify the keypad and LED’s display correctly. If not, verify that the logic wiring is correct.

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Apply Logic Power

Keypad Display shows this opening

message.

LED’s are flashing. After several

seconds the next screen is displayed.

BALDOR DC DRIVE

CALIBRATING

The local mode (keypad mode) is

displayed

The OK, SEQ, REF, FWD and STOP

LED’s are on.

FORWARD

REF:

0.00%

Set the parameter Configure Enable to “Enabled”.

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Apply Logic Power

Keypad Display shows this opening

message.

LED’s are flashing. After several

seconds the next screen is displayed.

FORWARD

REF:

0.00%

Press “PROG” key

Press “M” key

BALDOR DC DRIVE

DC 4Q 35A

MENU LEVEL

Press “M” key

Access the menus.

MENU LEVEL

DIAGNOSTICS

Press

ꢀ

Scroll to “Configure Drive” menu.

Access Configure Drive menu.

MENU LEVEL

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Press “M” key

CONFIGURE DRIVE

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Access the Configure Enable

parameter.

CONFIGURE ENABLE

DISABLED

Press

ꢀ

Enable Configure Enable.

All LED’s are now flashing.

Press “E” when done.

CONFIGURE ENABLE

ENABLED

Press “E” key

Returns to previous menu level.

CONFIGURE DRIVE

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Set the Nominal Motor Volts (Armature Voltage).

Action

ꢁ

Description

Scroll to the NOM Motor volts

parameter.

Display

Comments

Press

CONFIGURE DRIVE

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Press “M” key

Access the NOM Motor Volts

parameter

CONFIGURE DRIVE

NOM MOTOR VOLTS

Press “PROG” key

Press ꢀ to change to current control if

desired. Press “E” when done.

NOM MOTOR VOLTS

180 VOLTS

MN792

Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power up in Remote Mode with Feedback Continued

Set the Armature Current. Note the maximum armature current from the motor name plate and set

this value in the Armature Current parameter.

Action

ꢁ

Description

Scroll to the Armature Current

parameter.

Display

Comments

Press

CONFIGURE DRIVE

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Press “M” key

Access the Armature Current

parameter

CONFIGURE DRIVE

ARMATURE CURRENT

Press “PROG” key

Press ꢀ to change to current control if

desired. Press “E” when done.

ARMATURE CURRENT

11.5 AMPS

Set the Field Current. Note the nominal field current from the motor rating plate and set this value in

the Field Current parameter.

Action

ꢁ

Description

Scroll to the Field Current parameter.

Display

Comments

Press

CONFIGURE DRIVE

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Press “M” key

Access the Field Current parameter

CONFIGURE DRIVE

FIELD CURRENT

Press “PROG” key

Press ꢀ to change to current control if

desired. Press “E” when done.

FIELD CURRENT

0.2 AMPS

Set the Field Control Mode to Field Voltage or Field Current control. Refer to section 6 for more

information. The factory setting is Voltage Control mode.

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Press ꢁ several

times

Scroll to the field control mode

parameter.

CONFIGURE DRIVE

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Press “M” key

Access the field control mode

CONFIGURE DRIVE

FLD CTRL MODE

Press “PROG” key

Press ꢀ to change to current control if

desired. Press “E” when done.

FLD CTRL MODE

VOLTAGE CONTROL

Set the Field Volts Ratio. Enter the calculated ratio into the parameter given by the equation: A

setting of 90% is the maximum value obtainable, i.e. field output = 0.9 x VAC

FieldVolts (Nameplate)

100

Input Volts AC_RMS

Action

ꢁ

Description

Scroll to the field volts ratio parameter.

Display

Comments

Press

CONFIGURE DRIVE

FLD CTRL MODE

Press “M” key

CONFIGURE DRIVE

FLD VOLTS RATIO

Access the menus.

Press ꢀ to increase the value if

desired. Press “E” when done.

FLD VOLTS RATIO

0.00%

Press

ꢀ

Scroll to “Configure Drive” menu.

CONFIGURE DRIVE

FLD VOLTS RATIO

5-6 Switch Setting & Start-Up

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power up in Remote Mode with Feedback Continued

Set the Configure Dive::Configure Enable parameter to disable (see step 3).

10. Save the settings.

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Start at Menu

Level 1

MENU LEVEL

DIAGNOSTICS

Press

Press “M” key

Press

ꢁ

Scroll to “PARAMETER SAVE” menu.

MENU LEVEL

PARAMETER SAVE

UP TO ACTION

ꢀ

Press ꢀ to save parameters.

Parameters are saved. Except the

“Local Setpoint”.

PARAMETER SAVE

REQUESTED

Press “E” key

Exit one level

Press “E” several times to return to

the top level.

MENU LEVEL

PARAMETER SAVE

The control is now ready to run the motor.

The logic power is still applied, the keypad display is normal, the motor is connected but the load is

removed.

Apply 3 phase power.

Verify that the keypad and LED displays are still normal, no error messages.

Set the Speed Setpoint parameter to zero.

Verify that the Main CURR. Limit is set to 0.00%. View ANIN 5 (A6) parameter in the level 1

Diagnostics menu and verify it displays 0.00V.

Apply the Start/Run command and check that 3–phase mains is applied to Power Terminals L1, L2

and L3. Initiate “Enable” (C4) and immediately check that the correct field voltage appears between

the control supply terminals F+ and F–. If the field voltage is not correct, check one of the following:

Internally Supplied Field:

Check that 3–phase is applied to terminals L1, L2 and L3 when the main contactor is closed.

Check that the fuses on the power board or supression board are healthy.

Verify the Field Enable parameter is set to Enable.

Is the FLD CTRL Mode parameter set to Voltage Control or Current Control?

If set to VOLTAGE CONTROL, check the value of the FLD. VOLTS RATIO parameter. Set this

to 65% to obtain 300V fields from 460V lines.

If set to CURRENT CONTROL, check the field current calibration.

If the field volts are at maximum, check the field continuity. (The field current may initially be

lower than the rated value due to a cold field.)

Externally Supplied Field: (not available for size 1 and 2)

Refer to Chapter 4 Installation, Motor Field Connections for conversion details.

Check the voltage applied (externally fused) to terminals FL1 and FL2.

Check the phasing of voltage applied to FL1 and FL2:

FL1 must be connected directly or indirectly to the Red phase on main power terminal L1.

FL2 must be connected directly or indirectly to the Yellow phase on main power terminal L2.

Verify the Field Enable parameter is set to Enable.

Is the FLD CTRL Mode parameter set to Voltage Control or Current Control?

If set to Voltage Control, check the value of the FLD. Volts Ratio parameter. Set this to 65% to

obtain 300V fields from 460V lines.

If set to Current Control, check the field current calibration set–up, refer back to “Calibration”.

Verify that the OK and STOP LEDs are On, also either the FWD or REV LED.

MN792

Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power up in Remote Mode with Feedback Continued

Verify that C9 is +24VDC (reference to B1), and that B3 is –10VDC (reference to B1).

Select the Speed Feedback type.

Action

ꢁ

Description

Scroll to “Configure Drive” menu.

Display

Comments

Press

MENU LEVEL

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Press “M” key

Access Configure Drive menu.

CONFIGURE DRIVE

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Access the Configure Enable

parameter.

CONFIGURE ENABLE

DISABLED

Press

Press “E” key

Press

ꢀ

Enable Configure Enable.

Returns to previous menu level.

Scroll to Speed FBK Select

Access FBK select

All LED’s are now flashing.

Press “E” when done.

CONFIGURE ENABLE

ENABLED

CONFIGURE DRIVE

CONFIGURE ENABLE

ꢁ

CONFIGURE DRIVE

SPEED FBK SELECT

Press “M” key

Press ꢀ to change to Analog Tach,

Encoder or Encoder/Analog.

Press “E” when done.

SPEED FBK SELECT

ARM VOLTS FBK

10. If using a potentiometer for a setpoint, verify its operation as follows:

Use the keypad to display the value of the Diagnostics::ANIN 3 (A4).

Vary the setpoint potentiometer and observe the input voltage change on the keypad display.

Additional Setpoint Inputs may also appear at ANIN 1 (A2) and ANIN 2 (A3).

Verify these if they are installed.

The sum of all the setpoints is given by the value of the Speed Setpoint parameter. This can be

verified from the keypad display.

11. Verify External Current Limit settings, if used.

If using a single external clamp, A6 low (0V). Verify ANIN 5 (A6) is +10V or is adjustable up to +10V.

If using dual external clamps, A6 high (+24V). Verify ANIN 5 (A6) is at +10V or is adjustable up to

+10V and that ANIN 4 (A5) is at +10V.

12. Verify speed feedback device, if possible.

Analog Tachometer – The voltage at G3 (DC Tach Input) should go positive when shaft is

rotated in the forward direction.

Encoder – The ENCODER parameter should give a positive reading when shaft is rotated in the

forward direction. Also check the Speed Feedback parameter is reading a positive value.

13. Set Main Current Limit to 0.00% to limit the motor current.

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Press

Press “M” key

Press

ꢁ

Scroll to “Setup Parameters” menu

MENU LEVEL

DIAGNOSTICS

Access the Setup Parameters menus

Scroll to Current Loop

MENU LEVEL

SETUP PARAMETERS

ꢁ

SETUP PARAMETERS

CURRENT LOOP

Press “M” key

Access Current Loop parameters

Access Main Current Limit parameter

CURRENT LOOP

MAIN CUR LIMIT

MAIN CURR LIMIT

90.01%

Press

ꢁ

Change the Main Current Limit to

0.00%. Press “E” when done

MAIN CURR LIMIT

0.00%

5-8 Switch Setting & Start-Up

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power up in Remote Mode with Feedback Continued

14. Set the Configure Dive::Configure Enable parameter to disable (see step 9).

15. Save the settings.

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Start at Menu

Level 1

MENU LEVEL

DIAGNOSTICS

Press

Press “M” key

Press

ꢁ

Scroll to “PARAMETER SAVE” menu.

MENU LEVEL

PARAMETER SAVE

UP TO ACTION

ꢀ

Press ꢀ to save parameters.

Parameters are saved. Except the

“Local Setpoint”.

PARAMETER SAVE

REQUESTED

Press “E” key

Exit one level

Press “E” several times to return to

the top level.

MENU LEVEL

PARAMETER SAVE

16. With +24V present at terminals B8 and B9 (Program Stop and Coast Stop), do the following:

Apply the “Start/Run” command to C3. The main 3–phase contactor should pull–in and remain

energized, (it may de–energize almost immediately due to the 3–phase fail alarm).

Remove the “Start/Run” command from C3. The main 3–phase contactor should drop–out and

remain de–energized.

If the above sequence does not function, remove the Logic power and check start/stop sequencing

and contactor wiring.

If the contactor remains energized for an extended time during this check, the controller will detect

that 3–phase is not connected and switch off the contactor, and the 3–phase alarm is displayed.

The main contactor should never be operated by any means other than the drive internal controls,

nor should any additional circuitry be placed around the contactor coil circuit.

Do not continue unless the Start / Stop circuits are working correctly.

If any problems were found during step 16, correct them or contact Baldor before continuing.

17. Apply 3 phase power.

18. Verify that the keypad and LED displays are still normal with no error messages.

19. Set the Speed Setpoint parameter to zero.

20. Verify that the Main CURR. Limit is set to 0.00%. View ANIN 5 (A6) parameter in the level 1

Diagnostics menu and verify it displays 0.00V.

21. Apply the Start/Run command and check that 3–phase mains is applied to Power Terminals L1, L2

and L3. Initiate “Enable” (C4) and immediately check that the correct field voltage appears between

the control supply terminals F+ and F–. If the field voltage is not correct, check one of the following:

Internally Supplied Field:

Check that 3–phase is applied to terminals L1, L2 and L3 when the main contactor is closed.

Check that the fuses on the power board or supression board are healthy.

Verify the Field Enable parameter is set to Enable.

Is the FLD CTRL Mode parameter set to Voltage Control or Current Control?

If set to VOLTAGE CONTROL, check the value of the FLD. VOLTS RATIO parameter. Set this

to 65% to obtain 300V fields from 460V lines.

If set to CURRENT CONTROL, check the field current calibration.

If the field volts are at maximum, check the field continuity. (The field current may initially be

less than the rated value due to a cold field.)

Externally Supplied Field: (not available for size 1)

Refer to Chapter 4 Installation, Motor Field Connections for conversion details.

Check the voltage applied (externally fused) to terminals FL1 and FL2.

Check the phasing of voltage applied to FL1 and FL2:

FL1 must be connected directly or indirectly to the Red phase on main power terminal L1.

FL2 must be connected directly or indirectly to the Yellow phase on main power terminal L2.

Verify the Field Enable parameter is set to Enable.

MN792

Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Is the FLD CTRL Mode parameter set to Voltage Control or Current Control?

If set to Voltage Control, check the value of the FLD. Volts Ratio parameter. Set this to 65% to

obtain 300V fields from 460V lines.

If set to Current Control, check the field current calibration set–up, refer to “Calibration”.

22. Verify that the OK and STOP LEDs are On, also either the FWD or REV LED. Note that all external

interlocks that affect the Enable input C4 will affect the operation of the drive. Verify their connections

and operation.

23. If the Setup Parameters::Standstill::Standstill Logic parameter is Enabled, temporarily set it to

Disabled.

Be ready to stop the control should the motor try to over speed.

24. Set the Speed Setpoints so that the value of the Speed Setpoint is 5%, 0.5V at setpoint input.

25. Set Configure Dive::Configure Enable parameter to Enable.

26. Set the SPEED FBK SELECT parameter to ARM VOLTS FBK (because it is hard–wired and

therefore the sign will be correct).

27. Slowly increase the MAIN CURR.LIMIT parameter to a maximum of 20%. The motor should begin to

rotate if all connections are made correctly. The motor speed will settle at 5% of full speed if the

motor is unloaded. Check the feedback from the Tach or Encoder using the appropriate Diagnostic

menu.

If the motor does not rotate, check the Current Feedback parameter to verify that current is flowing

into the armature. If no current is flowing, disconnect all power and check the armature connections.

28. Stop the drive. Restore the correct Speed FBK Select parameter (if other than ARM Volts FBK) and

perform the same test again.

29. If the test was successful perform a Parameter Save and continue with step 31.

If just direction of rotation is wrong, perform a or b “Reversed Connections”.

Reversed Connections – Analog Tachometer:

Open the main contactor and switch off all supplies, then correct the connections.

ꢂ If the motor rotates in the correct direction, reverse the tachometer connections only.

ꢂ If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, reverse the field connections only.

If the motor still runs out of control, check the tachometer and the wiring continuity.

Reversed Connections – Encoder

Open the main contactor.

ꢂ If the motor rotates in the correct direction, change the Configure Drive::Encoder Sign

parameter.

ꢂ If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, disconnect all power to the Control then reverse the

field connections only.

Apply power (logic power then 3 phase power) and repeat step 29.

If the drive trips on speed feedback alarm with tachometer feedback of the correct polarity,

check the armature voltage calibration. Check the SPEED FBK SELECT. This could be set

incorrectly allowing the drive to run open loop.

30. If 5% speed is exceeded and the motor continues to accelerate a reversed connection is implied,

decrease the MAIN CURR.LIMIT parameter to zero.

Do not continue unless the control and motor are working correctly.

If any problems were found during these steps, correct them or contact Baldor before continuing.

5-10 Switch Setting & Start-Up

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power up in Remote Mode with Feedback Continued

Note: Reverse Operation is possible with the Series 30 REGEN Drives only.

31. With the MAIN CURR.LIMIT parameter set to 20% or the level required to achieve rotation, set the

value of the Speed Setpoint to 10%, 1.0V at setpoint input. The motor will accelerate to this speed

setting.

32. Adjust the Zero Speed parameter (Ensure Standstill is Disabled).

Non–REGEN, non–reversing applications – Set the Speed Setpoint potentiometer to zero and

adjust the Zero Speed Offset parameter until the shaft is just rotating then reduce level until the

shaft stops.

REGEN, non–reversing applications – Set the Speed Setpoint potentiometer to zero and adjust

the Zero Speed Offset parameter for minimum shaft rotation. (Series 30 REGEN Drives only).

REGEN, reversing applications – Set the Zero Speed Offset parameter to balance maximum

speed in forward and reverse directions. (Series 30 REGEN Drives only).

You can set the Standstill Logic parameter to Enable if a stationary shaft is required.

33. For reversing applications set the value of the Speed Setpoint to –10% and check that motor runs in

the reverse direction.

34. Gradually increase the Speed Setpoints so that the value of the Speed Setpoint (Diagnostic menu) is

at maximum. Verify that shaft speed is correct. If fine adjustment is required, adjust the calibration

as appropriate to the speed feedback selection:

Armature Voltage feedback has a +2/–10% trim, greater changes outside this range require a

change of the calibration switches.

Analog tachometer has a +2/–10% trim, greater changes outside this range require a change of

the calibration switches.

An Encoder should give an absolute rotational speed for which adjustment is unnecessary .

Adjustment for Field Weakening.

If the drive is to run with a top speed greater than the base speed, “field weakening” is used to achieve the top

speed. The field must be operating in Current Control mode. Select Current Control in the

Configure Drive::FLD CTRL Mode parameter.

Note: Field weakening cannot be used if you have Armature Voltage feedback selected. Adjust the maximum

armature volts to the required scaled level by setting the MAX VOLTS parameter.

Operate the control at base speed and verify the motor volts are correct.

In the Level 4 FLD WEAK VARS menu, verify that field weakening is selected (FIELD WEAK

ENABLE) and that the MIN FLD CURRENT parameter is set appropriately.

Increase the speed above the base speed. Verify that the armature volts remain constant while the

field current reduces.

Gradually increase to maximum speed. Monitor the armature volts at maximum speed. If necessary,

trim the speed feedback as previously detailed in Step 34 a, b or c.

Adjust the MIN FLD CURRENT parameter to the appropriate setting to limit maximum motor speed.

PROCEED WITH CARE – Make Small Adjustments.

IR COMPENSATION (CALIBRATION function block) is also used in field weakening applications to

improve dynamic response and speed holding stability. Set the IR Compensation as follows

Set Field Enable to Disabled (Field Control function block).

Start the drive with a 5% speed command and ensure the ACTUAL POS I LIMIT is 100%

(diagnostic). This should stall the drive at zero speed and cause it to pass 100% current.

Monitor the BACK EMF diagnostic parameter and note the value (typically anything up to 17%

is normal).

Stop the drive and enter this value into IR Compensation parameter and repeat the test to

ensure that Back EMF is now zero.

Set Field Enable parameter to Enabled.

For reversing drives, check the maximum reverse speed. Imbalance in reversing applications can

only be corrected by adjusting the ZERO SPD OFFSET parameter, which may be to the detriment of

operation at Zero Setpoint.

MN792

Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power up in Remote Mode with Feedback Continued

Reset the MAIN CURR. LIMIT to 100% to correspond to 100% full load current (FLC).

Note: The controller cannot achieve 200% current unless the CUR LIMIT/SCALER parameter is increased to

200% (from its factory setting of 100%). Until this is done, the External Current Clamp will limit the

current to 100%.

If the current limit is set higher (maximum 200%) and the motor runs into an overload condition,

the current is automatically reduced from the current limit level down to 103% FLC (continual

rating).

If the motor is overloaded, the controller will reduce the current to 103% of the current

calibration. (If the motor continues to rotate it may overheat and thermal protection should be

provided).

If the motor is overloaded and the current provided by the controller is not enough to maintain

rotation, i.e. it stalls, the controller will trip out showing Stall Trip alarm, if enabled.

Autotune

Performance adjustment of the following Current Loop parameters: PROP. Gain, INT. Gain, and Discontinuous.

Initial Conditions

Main contactor open, i.e. no Start/Run signal at terminal C3.

Set the AUTOTUNE parameter to OFF.

Program Stop (terminal B8) and Coast Stop (terminal B9) should be high, i.e. 24V.

If the motor field is supplied by an external supply, remove the field manually. (If the field is internally

regulated, Autotune automatically quenches the field).

Note: The shaft may require clamping for certain motors to prevent rotation >20% during the Autotune

sequence. If using a permanent magnet motor, the shaft MUST be clamped.

Set the AUTOTUNE parameter to ON.

Close the main contactor, i.e. Start/Run signal to terminal C3.

Enable the control, terminal (C4).

The Autotune sequence is initiated. When complete (after approximately 10 seconds), the main

contactor is opened automatically signalling the end of the sequence and the AUTOTUNE parameter

is reset to OFF.

Save parameter settings.

10. If necessary, restore field connections and/or remove the mechanical clamp.

If autotune failed – Refer to the Manual Tuning appendix of this manual.

The keypad displays the message AUTOTUNE ABORTED.

The Autotune sequence is aborted causing the main contactor to drop out if any of the Initial

Conditions are not present, or if the Autotune sequence times out (after 2 minutes).

The Operator Station displays the message AUTOTUNE ERROR.

The Autotune sequence is suspended causing the main contactor to drop out if the motor speed

feedback is greater than 20% of rated speed, or the field current exceeds 6% of rated field current.

5-12 Switch Setting & Start-Up

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Speed Loop Adjustment You will need to adjust the Speed Loop for your application although in most cases the factory

settings are acceptable. The optimum Speed Loop performance is achieved by adjusting the

PROP. Gain and INT. Time CONST. parameters.

Produce a small step–change to the speed setpoint and observe the response on the tachometer

feedback or analog output set to speed feedback.

Adjust PROP. Gain and INT. Time CONST. parameters until you have rapid change of speed

feedback between the setpoint values with minimum overshoot.

Incorrect Speed Response

Correct Response

Speed

Time

Underdamped response

causing overshoot or ringing

Overdamped response

Critically damped response with no

more than 4% of max speed from 1st

overshoot to first undersoot.

Starting and Stopping Methods

A Series 29 “non–regenerative” (2–quadrant) control coasts to a stop when the current demand reverses. A

Series 30 “regenerative” (4–quadrant) control can stop faster because it uses energy from the load, i.e. reverse

current is allowed to flow. The normal Stop and Program Stop are only relevant for a “regenerative” controller.

The parameters Stop Time and PROG Stop Time have associated timers which initiate a Coast Stop after the

timed period. The Coast Stop has direct control of the Run relay with no intervening electronics. All associated

parameters can be found in the Setup Parameters::Stop Rates menu.

Terminal

Description

Function

Parameter

Priority

Program Stop

Motor decelerates at

Program Stop rate

PROG STOP TIME

Overrides Normal Stop

Coast Stop

Motor coasts to rest

Overrides Program Stop

and Normal Stop

Start/Run

(Normal Stop)

Motor decelerates at

Normal Stop rate

STOP TIME

MN792

Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and Stopping Methods Continued

Normal Stop

Action – Remove 24V from Terminal C3 to stop. The motor speed is brought to zero in a time defined by the

Stop Time parameter.

Normal Stop

Speed Setpoint (100%)

Control Signals

Speed Demand

Start/Run (C3)

Speed Demand

100% = Speed Setpoint

Stop Time (10 Seconds)

Actual stopping rate depends

on load inertia, motor hp, and

overload capability of the drive.

Speed Feedback

Actual Speed

=Speed Setpoint

Drive is disabled below stop

zero speed if set > 0.25%

Stop Zero

Speed (2%)

Enable

Drive remains enabled for contactor

delay if stop zero speed < 0.25%

Drive Enable = Enabled

(Display Diagnostic)

Drive Enable = Disabled

Time Out in Normal Stop

Speed Setpoint

Start/Run (C3)

Control Signals

Speed Demand

Actual Speed

Speed Setpoint

Speed Demand

=Speed Setpoint

Contactor will not drop out if

Speed Feedback > Stop Zero Speed

when stop limit timed out

Stop Zero Speed (2%)

Stop Limit (60.0 Seconds)

5-14 Switch Setting & Start-Up

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and Stopping Methods Continued

Program Stop (terminal B8)

Action – Remove 24V from Terminal B8 to stop. The motor speed is brought to zero by conditions defined in

PROG. Stop Time (ramp rate) and PROG. Stop I Limit parameters.

Program Stop Timing

Speed Setpoint (100%)

Control Signals

Program Stop

LED On (Program Stop False)

LED

Off

(Program Stop is a latched funtion)

Speed Demand

100% = Speed Setpoint

Prog Stop Time

(0.1 Seconds)

Current Limit set by

PROG Stop I Limit (100%)

Speed Feedback

=Speed Setpoint

Actual Speed

Actual stopping rate depends

on load inertia, motor hp, and

overload capability of the drive.

Stop Zero

Speed (2%)

Drive is disabled and contactor

turns off below Stop Zero Speed

Time Out in Program Stop

Speed Setpoint

Program Stop

Control Signals

Speed Demand

LED On (Program Stop False)

LED

Off

Speed Demand

Speed Feedback

Speed Setpoint

Actual Speed

Contactor will not drop out if Speed

Feedback > Stop Zero Speed when

stop limit timed out

Stop Zero

Speed (2%)

Prog Stop Limit

(60.0 Seconds)

Enable

Drive Run LED

and Start Contactor

Drive Enable = Enabled

Drive Run LED and Start Contactor

Drive Enable = Disabled

MN792

Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and Stopping Methods Continued

Coast to Stop (terminal B9)

Action – Remove 24V from Terminal B8 to stop. The motor speed is brought to zero by conditions defined in the

PROG. Stop Time (ramp rate) and PROG. Stop I Limit parameters.

The control output is automatically quenched and the contactor is opened. The motor coasts to a stop. The

motor coast stop rate is dictated by the motor and load inertia – the drive does not control the motion.

Standstill

Standstill logic inhibits rotation during Zero Speed demand. If the drive speed is less than the zero speed

threshold [12] and Standstill Logic [11] is enabled, the speed and current loops are disabled to prevent shaft

oscillation around zero speed.

Trip Condition

When a trip condition is detected, the motor coasts to a stop. The motor coast stop rate is dictated by the motor

and load inertia. The control cannot be enabled until the trip condition has been cleared and successfully reset.

Normal Starting Method

To achieve a normal start, two actions must occur:

1. Apply 24V to Terminal C4 (Enable).

2. Apply 24V to Terminal C3 (Start).

The Control will not start if there are alarms present, or if Terminals B8 (Program Stop) or B9 (Coast Stop) are

low, 0V. Ensure that Program Stop and Coast Stop are valid before Start/Run is applied.

Advanced Starting Methods

Jog

1. Apply 24V to Terminal C4 (Enable).

2. Apply 24V to Terminal C6 (Jog Mode)

The Control will not start if there are alarms present. The control can be started using JOG SPEED 1, JOG

SPEED 2. Also refer to the STOP RATES function block: CONTACTOR DELAY parameter is used to prevent

multiple operations of the main contactor from rapid use of the Jog switch. Refer to Section 6 JOG/SLACK for

more information.

Crawl

1. Apply 24V to Terminal C3 (Start).

2. Apply 24V to Terminal C6 (Jog Mode)

The Control will not start if there are alarms present. Start the control using a crawl speed, in Forward. Refer to

Section 6 JOG/SLACK for more information.

5-16 Switch Setting & Start-Up

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Upload/Download Procedure (UDP)

Upload

This procedure will transfer the parameters from a file at the host computer to the non–volatile memory of the

Control. This information is written directly to EEPROM, so all the drive’s settings are overwritten. The

procedure is as follows:

Verify the Control is properly connected to the PC.

Use a standard communications software package installed at the PC. Set the COM port for 9600, 8,

1, None. Prepare the PC communications software to send a standard ASCII text file.

Set the Serial Links::System Port (P3)::P3 Setup::Mode parameter to DISABLE.

Start the upload. Use the keypad and select Serial Links::System Port (P3)::UDP XFER (RX) and

press the UP (ꢀ) key, when instructed to start the upload.

When the keypad display shows RECEIVING, begin the file transfer.

The file ends in a :00000001FF which the Control uses to close the file.

As indicated, reset the Control by pressing the E key.

Download

SERIAL LINKS

This procedure will transfer the parameters from the Control to a file at the host computer. The procedure is as

follows:

SYSTEM PORT P3

Verify the Control is properly connected to the PC.

DUMP MMI (TX)

UDP XFER (RX)

UDP XFER (TX)

Use a standard communications software package installed at the PC. Set the COM port for 9600, 8,

1, None. Prepare the software to receive a standard ASCII text file (Capture mode); use the file

extension .UDP to differentiate it from .MMI format files.

Perform a PARAMETER SAVE of the Control’s settings. This ensures the Dump matches the

Control’s settings, (the listing is of the Control’s currently saved settings, i.e. held in EEPROM).

Set the Serial Links::System Port (P3)::P3 Setup::Mode parameter to DISABLE.

Start the download at the Control by selecting Serial Links::System Port (P3)::UDP XFER ((TX) on

the keypad and pressing the UP (ꢀ) key, when instructed.

The file ends in a Ctrl–z. With some software packages this automatically closes the downloaded file.

If this is not the case, when the Control indicates it has finished and the host has stopped scrolling

text, close the file at your PC. The last line should read :00000001FF

The ASCII file can now be stored like any other file on your disk drive.

MN792

Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DUMP ProcedureThis procedure will transfer the control’s settings in a text format that is clear and easy to read.

Verify the Control is properly connected to the PC.

Use a standard communications software package installed at the PC. Set the COM port for 9600, 8,

1, None. Prepare the PC communications software to receive a standard ASCII text file (Capture

mode); use the file extension .UDP to differentiate it from .MMI format files.

Perform a PARAMETER SAVE of the Control’s settings. This ensures the Dump matches the

Control’s settings, (the listing is of the saved settings held in EEPROM).

Set the Serial Links::System Port (P3)::P3 Setup::Mode parameter to DISABLE.

Start downloading on the Control by selecting Serial Links::System Port (P3)::Dump MMI (TX) on the

keypad and pressing the UP (ꢀ) key, when instructed.

The file ends in a Ctrl–z. With some packages this automatically closes the file but if this is not the

case, when the Control says it has finished and the host has stopped scrolling text, close the file.

The ASCII file can now be stored like any other file on your disk drive.

The following partial file was produced by performing a MMI DUMP (TX) to a PC, as described above. The file

shows the Control default settings.

When printing this file, it is useful to select a Mono spaced font, such as Courier, so the text columns line–up.

Note that in the list shown, ‘menus’ have been highlighted (bold) to make the list easier to use.

DIGITAL DC DRIVE

ISSUE:X.X

..MENU LEVEL

....DIAGNOSTICS

......SPEED DEMAND

......SPEED FEEDBACK

......SPEED ERROR

......CURRENT DEMAND

......CURRENT FEEDBACK [298 ] =

[89 ] =

[207 ] =

[297 ] =

[299 ] =

0.00 %

0.0 %

......POS. I CLAMP

......NEG. I CLAMP

[87 ] =

[88 ] =

0.0 %

......ACTUAL POS I LIM [67 ] =

......ACTUAL NEG I LIM [61 ] =

......INVERSE TIME O/P [203 ] =

0.0 %

200.00 %

......AT CURRENT LIMIT [42 ] = FALSE

......AT ZERO SPEED [77 ] = TRUE

......AT ZERO SETPOINT [78 ] = TRUE

......AT STANDSTILL

......STALL TRIP

......RAMPING

......PROGRAM STOP

......DRIVE START

......DRIVE ENABLE

......OPERATING MODE

......FIELD ENABLE

......FIELD DEMAND

[79 ] = TRUE

[112 ] = OK

[113 ] = FALSE

[80 ] = TRUE

[82 ] = OFF

[84 ] = DISABLED

[212 ] = STOP

[169 ] = DISABLED

[183 ] =

0.00 %

Example only

5-18 Switch Setting & Start-Up

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 6

Programming

Overview

The shipping configuration allows the user to start up and run a DC motor in simple speed control. The flexibility

is having the ability to change configuration and to tune the control for optimum performance. The parameters

most frequently adjusted for tuning and performance are in the Setup Parameters menu. They are categorized

by submenus within the overall software block diagram.

This chapter describes each of these parameters.

You can set the parameter values within the Setup Parameters submenu (keypad) or by using a Workbench D

(see Manual MN794). You can also configure the drive or connect and reconnect signals between drive function

blocks and I/O terminals from the keypad or Workbench D. Parameters in this section are in the order of the

keypad submenu.

The drive’s parameters and function block inputs and outputs are defined as either a percentage if they are

continuous, or as boolean value (1 or 0) if they are discrete. Depending on how the drive is configured, these

parameters can represent physical entities such as motor speed or current. Connecting inputs or outputs to

software function blocks or to real world signals defines what the function block inputs or outputs represent. For

example, the output (Destination Tag) from Raise/Lower can represent current demand if sent to the current

loop or a speed setpoint if sent to the speed loop.

Menu System

The menu system is divided into nine major selections, shown in Table 6-1. Each selection has a structure of

menus (Figure 6-1). At the keypad, press “M” to access the menus. Then press the ꢀ or ꢁ key to scroll

through the menus. Refer to section 7 for more information on the keypad and menus.

Table 6-1 Keypad Display of the Main Menus

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Apply Power

Keypad Display shows this opening

message.

FORWARD

REF:

0.00%

Press “PROG” key

Press “M”

BALDOR DC DRIVE

DC 4Q 15A

MENU LEVEL

Press “M”

Access the menus.

Scroll to next menu.

Press “M” key to access Diagnostic

MENU LEVEL

DIAGNOSTICS

menus.

Press

ꢁ

Press “M” key to access Setup

Parameters menus.

MENU LEVEL

SETUP PARAMETERS

Press “M” key to access Password

menus.

MENU LEVEL

PASSWORD

Press “M” key to access Alarm Status

menus.

MENU LEVEL

ALARM STATUS

Press “M” key to access Menus.

MENU LEVEL

MENUS

MENU LEVEL

PARAMETER SAVE

Press “M” key to access Serial Links

menus.

MENU LEVEL

SERIAL LINKS

Press “M” key to access System

menus.

MENU LEVEL

SYSTEM

Press “M” key to access Configure

Drive menus.

MENU LEVEL

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Menu Navigation

Remember, press “E” to return to the previous level of menus. Press “M” to enter the next level of menus.

Press the ꢀ or ꢁ key to go to the previous or next menu item at the same level.

MN792

Programming 6-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Parameter Types

Each drive parameter is associated with a unique address, or “tag.” When “connecting” any parameter to drive

inputs, outputs, or links, this tag is designated as the source or destination address. These drive parameters are

listed by tag number, parameter name and menu group name in the appendix of this manual. There are only

two types of parameters: logic or value.

Logic

Logic parameters are boolean – or either On (1) or Off (0). The keypad displays logic signals in a variety ways,

each associated with the On and Off state like Enabled/ Disabled, True/False, Positive/Negative, or Even/Odd.

Value

Value parameters have a range of values depending on its function. The display is formatted appropriately (for

example in percent). In all cases these values will not exceed five digits. For example, 100.00% is handled by

the controller as 10000 and 30.00 as 3000. Other value parameters can be HEX numbers, ordinals, and lists.

The ranges of these values depend on the parameter type.

Configuration Procedure

Before making any configuration changes with the keypad, you must set Configure Enable to Enabled. After

completing the changes, set Configure Enable to Disabled to accept the changes then select “Parameter Save”

to save to memory the changes you have made.

Note: Configuration changes are not allowed while running and will trip out on the alarm failure Configuration

Enabled if the drive is started while Configure Enable is Enabled.

Make configuration changes from the keypad as follows:

Set parameter System::Configure I/O::Configure Enable to Enabled.

Find the input or output you want to change.

Change the source and/or destination tag as required.

Set the or analog or digital I/O parameter calibrations as needed.

Set parameter Configure Enable to Disabled.

Save Parameters.

6-2 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figure 6-1

Menu Levels

Ramps

Setup

Diagnostics

AUX I/O

Local Ramp

OP Station

Jog / Slack

Raise / Lower

Special Blocks

Startup Values

Setup Parameters

PID

Password

Alarm Status

Menus

Field Control

Current Profile

Stop Rates

FLD Voltage VARS

FLS Current VARS

FLD Weak VARS

Calibration

Inhibit Alarms

Current Loop

Speed Loop

Standstill

Advanced

Setpoints

Adaption

Zero SPD Quench

Setpoint Sum 1

5703 Support

TEC Option

Serial Links

P3 Setup

Bisynch Support

System Port (P3)

ANIN1 (A2)

ANIN2 (A3)

ANIN3 (A4)

ANIN4 (A5)

ANIN5 (A6)

Configure Enable

Analog Inputs

System

Software

Configure I/O

Peek

Parameter Save

Analog Outputs

Digital Inputs

ANOUT1 (A7)

ANOUT2 (A8)

ANOUT3 (A9)

Armature Current is

not displayed in menu

Configure Drive

Digital Input (C4)

Digital Input (C5)

DIGIN1 (C6)

DIGIN2 (C7)

DIGIN3 (C8)

Digital Outputs

Configure 5703

Block Diagram

DIGOUT1 (B5)

DIGOUT2 (B6)

DIGOUT3 (B7)

Full & Reduced Views

Full View Only

Internal Links

Link 1

Link 10

MN792

Programming 6-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Parameter Descriptions

Analog Inputs Five analog input blocks are used to scale and clamp the inputs for terminals A2 through A6.

Analog input 1 is the 0–20mA or 4–20mA input. Analog input 2 is the main speed loop input (without

Accel/Decel ramps). Analog input 3 is Speed setpoint no. 3. Analog input 4 is the negative current clamp; this is

only active if bipolar clamps are enabled; ANIN 5 – Main current limit (or positive current clamp if bipolar clamps

are enabled. ANIN 4 is then the Negative current clamp input).

Analog Input 1 – ANIN 1 (A2)

SYSTEM

Tag Parameter

[231] Max Value

[230] Calibration

Factory Setting

+100.00%

1.0000

Factory Setting

Analog

Input 1

CONFIGURE I/O

Setpoint Sum 1

[100] Input 1

[246]

ANALOG INPUTS

ANIN 1 (A2)

ANIN 2 (A3)

ANIN 3 (A4)

ANIN 4 (A5)

ANIN 5 (A6)

[232] Min Value

[246] Destination Tag

-100.00%

100

Diagnostic

connection

500

[50]

Analog Input 2 – ANIN 2 (A3)

Fixed Outputs *

Speed Loop

[290] Setpoint 2 (A3)

Tag Parameter

[234] Max Value

[233] Calibration

Factory Setting

+100.00%

1.0000

Analog

Input 2

Calibration

MAX Value

MIN Value

Destination Tag *

Current Loop

[119] I DMD Isolate

[493]

[235] Min Value

-100.00%

Diagnostic

connection

[51]

Analog Input 3 – ANIN 3 (A4)

Tag Parameter

[237] Max Value

[236] Calibration

Factory Setting

+100.00%

1.0000

* ANIN 2 (A3) Notes:

1. ANIN 2 output [493] has two permanent connections:

Analog

Input 3

a. SETUP PARAMETERS:: SPEED LOOP::

SETPOINTS:: RATIO 2 (A3) input and

Setpoint Sum 1

[309] Input 0

[249]

[250]

[247]

b. SETUP PARAMETER:: CURRENT LOOP:: I DMD.

[238] Min Value

[249] Destination Tag

-100.00%

ISOLATE switch.

If you do not want ANIN 2 output [493] to be in the

Speed or Current Loops, set RATIO 2 (A3) [7] to zero,

and set I DMD. ISOLATE [119] to DISABLED.

Diagnostic

connection

[52]

Analog Input 4 – ANIN 4 (A5)

2. ANIN 2 (A3) is a direct input into the speed loop/current

loop and is scanned synchronously with the current

loop (typically every 3.33ms rather than every 7ms).

Therefore ANIN 2 should be used for any signal whose

response is critical.

3. Other tags can be connected to ANIN 2 output [493] for

access to the calibrated final value of ANIN 2.

Tag Parameter

[240] Max Value

[239] Calibration

Factory Setting

+100.00%

1.0000

Analog

Input 4

Current Loop

[48] Neg I Clamp

[241] Min Value

[250] Destination Tag

-100.00%

Diagnostic

connection

[53]

Analog Input 5 – ANIN 5 (A6)

Tag Parameter

[243] Max Value

[242] Calibration

Factory Setting

+100.00%

1.0000

Analog

Input 5

Current Loop

[301] POS I Clamp

Diagnostic connection (tag accessible from the Diagnostic

Menu) allows monitoring of the raw analog input signals

from. within the Diagnostics parameter block.

[244] Min Value

[247] Destination Tag

-100.00%

301

Diagnostic

connection

[54]

Keypad Menu: System::Configure I/O::Analog Inputs::Block Title

Block Title

Parameter

Description

ANIN1 (A2)

ANIN2 (A3)

ANIN3 (A4)

ANIN4 (A5)

ANIN5 (A6)

Calibration

CALIBRATION

The analog input scaling ratio (gain factor).

MAX Value

MAX VALUE

The maximum value of the scaled analog input (max voltage clamp).

MIN Value

MIN VALUE

The minimum value of the scaled analog input (min voltage clamp).

Destination Tag

DESTINATION TAG [Output], (except ANIN 2)

The destination Tag No. to which the scaled analog input value is connected.

The destination of Output [493] ANIN2 is fixed. It is a calibrated scaled value.

6-4 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Analog Inputs Continued

Input

Description

Analog input 1

Terminal (A2)

Used as a unipolar 0–20mA ramped speed command channel. Output [246] is connected to Setpoint Sum 1,

Input 1. To use 4–20mA requires setting the Min value to 25%, the Max Value to 125% and the Setpoint Sum1,

Input 2 to (–)25%. These settings provide the proper scaling and offset to set 4mA to zero command. An input

value less than 4mA results in a Min Value of 25% being summed with the (–)25% at the Setpoint Sum 1

summing junction.

Output of Setpoint Sum 1 block is connected to the ramp input [5] of the Ramps block. Ramp invert [620] is

controlled by C5, the reverse input. When C5 is closed, the ramp is inverted and the rotation direction is

changed. This allows an Accel and Decel Rate limited command signal in either direction. Output of Ramps

block is connected to Setpoint 1 of the Speed Loop block.

Analog input 2

Terminal (A3)

No Accel / Decel Ramp is provided for this input.

Used as a non–ramped speed or torque command channel. Output [493] is connected to Speed Loop Setpoint 2

and Current Loop Input. Closing terminal C8 (Digital Input 3) selects Torque Command Mode (enables IDMD

Isolate input of the Current Loop). Opening terminal C8 (Digital Input 3) selects Speed Command Mode by

(disables the IDMD Isolate input of the Current Loop). In all cases this analog command channel bypasses the

Ramps Block.

Analog input 3

Terminal (A4)

Used as a ramped ±10V speed command channel. Output [249] is connected to Setpoint Sum 1, Input 0.

Output of Setpoint Sum 1 block is connected to the ramp input [5] of the Ramps block. Ramp invert [620] is

controlled by C5, the reverse input. When C5 is closed, the ramp is inverted and the rotation direction is

changed. This allows an Accel and Decel Rate limited command signal in either direction. Output of Ramps

block is connected to Setpoint 1 of the Speed Loop block. Various voltage range, and bipolar or unipolar

commands can be accepted by adjusting Calibration, Max Value , and Min Value parameters of Analog Input 3.

Analog input 4

Terminal (A5)

Not active if Bipolar Clamps parameter [90] is false.

Used as an External Reverse (Negative) Current Limit if Bipolar Clamps parameter [90] is true.

Analog input 5

Terminal (A6)

Used as an External (Forward and Reverse) Current Limit. A hardwire jumper is supplied from terminal B3

(+10V Ref) to A5 to allow full rated 150% current. Used as an External Forward Current Limit if Bipolar Clamps

parameter is set to Enabled.

When [90]=False, Analog IN 5 provides a bipolar current limit.

When [90]=True, Analog IN 5 is the positive current limit (Analog IN 4 is the negative current limit).

Analog Inputs – Inputs can be connected to any writable parameter. The read/write status of each parameter is listed in

Appendix B. (RO is read only and RW is read/write.)

Example – Using analog input 1 as a 4–20mA input.

The parameter values for Analog Input 1 can be changed at the keypad. The 4–20mA source is connected to

A2. Apply AC power to the control and observe the keypad display. The 500 ohm resistor at the A2 input

converts a 0–20mA input current to 0 to 10 volt signal. So a 4–20mA input must be scaled so 4mA = 0VDC and

20mA = 10VDC. Analog Input 1 output terminal [246] is connected to Setpoint Sum 1, Input 1. 4–20mA

requires the Min value = 25%, Max Value = 125% and setting Setpoint Sum1, Input 2 to (–)25%. These settings

provide the proper scaling and offset to set 4mA to zero command. Any input less than 4mA will result in a Min

Value of 25% being added to (–)25% at the Setpoint Sum 1 summing junction.

Setup Parameters::Setpoint Sum 1::

Tag Parameter

[292] Sign 0

[208] Ratio 0

[309] Input 0

[420] Divider 0

[423] Input 2

Setting

Positive

1.0000

0.00%

1.0000

-25.00%

1.0000

Analog Input 1 – ANIN 1 (A2)

Tag Parameter

[231] Max Value

[230] Calibration

Setting

125.00%

1.0000

[86]

Analog

Input 1

[6]

Ratio 1

[246]

[100] Input 1

0.00%

[232] Min Value

[246] Destination Tag

25.00%

100

[131] Deadband Width 0.0%

[419] Divider 1

1.0000

[8] Sign 1

[375] Limit

[86] Destination Tag

Positive

105.00%

4–20mA Direction Change

Output of Setpoint Sum 1 block is connected to the ramp input [5] of the Ramps block. Ramp invert [620] is

controlled by C5, the reverse input. When C5 is closed, the ramp is inverted and the rotation direction is

changed. This allows an Accel and Decel Rate limited command signal in either direction. Output of Ramps

block is connected to Setpoint 1 of the Speed Loop block.

MN792

Programming 6-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Analog Outputs Three Analog Outputs are available, A7, A8 and A9. A7 and A8 can be configured and the source of an

analog output signal can be read from any parameter. It is important to remember that other parameters do not

“send” signals to the output terminal. An output terminal “retrieves” the signal from the parameter described by

its Source Tag parameter. A9 is the armature current output and cannot be changed.

SYSTEM

CONFIGURE I/O

ANALOG OUTPUTS

ANOUT 1 (A7)

% TO GET 10V

MODULUS

OFFSET

SOURCE TAG

ANOUT 1 (A7)

Tag Parameter

[464] Offset

[245] % to get to 10V

Factory Setting

0.00%

+100.00%

Description

+10V= Full speed setpoint forward.

-10V = Full speed setpoint reverse.

Speed Loop

[62] Speed Feedback

Analog

Output 1

[251] Source Tag

[362] Modulus

ABS

False

[55]

Diagnostic

connection

ANOUT 2 (A8)

Tag Parameter

[465] Offset

[248] % to get to 10V

Factory Setting

0.00%

+100.00%

Setpoints

[63] Speed Setpoint

Analog

Output 2

+10V= Full speed setpoint forward.

-10V = Full speed setpoint reverse.

[252] Source Tag

[363] Modulus

ABS

False

[56]

Diagnostic

connection

Calibration

Power

Board

ANOUT 3 (A9)

Bipolar Mode

+10V= 200% output current forward.

-10V = 200% output current reverse.

Board

Analog

Output 3

I_Arm

UNI

Unipolar Mode

+10V= 200% output current.

Arm I Fbk

[25] Armature I (A9)

Bipolar

Parameter Descriptions

INPUT

Range: 0 to 549

(SOURCE TAG)

The source Tag No. of the output value.

% TO GET 10V (10V CAL)

Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %

Range: –100.00 to 100.00 %

This value is based on the range of the source. It can be set positive or negative to set the sign of

the output and scale the input to give a 10V output.

OFFSET

Offset value added to the input value after the scaler and before the modulus.

MODULUS

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Modulus determines whether the output is bipolar or unipolar.

False allows the input to pass through to the output (bipolar).

When TRUE, the output is unipolar (will not go negative). Negative input values are made positive

(absolute value).

ANOUT 1 & 2 (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

ANOUT 1 (A7)=scaled speed feedback. ANOUT 2 (A8)= Total speed setpoint.

Range: xxx.xx Volts (h)

Armature I (A9) (Armature Current only at Analog Output 3)

Bipolar provides ±10V signal that represents armature current.

Unipolar provides 0 to 10V signal that represents armature current.

Range: 0 : Bipolar

1 : Uniploar

6-6 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Analog Outputs Continued

Example 1 – Read the field current feedback using Analog Output 1.

The tag number for the field current feedback parameter is 300.

Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to Enable.

Set ANALOG OUTPUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7):: SOURCE TAG to 300.

Set ANALOG OUTPUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7):: % TO GET 10 VDC to 100% (factory setting).

Set SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION::ARMATURE I (A9) to Bipolar (factory setting).

Reset CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to Disable.

ANOUT 1 (A7)

Tag Parameter

[464] Offset

[245] % to get to 10V

Setting

0.00%

+100.00%

Setup Parameters::Calibration::

Tag Parameter

[182] Field I CAL

Setting

1.0000

Analog

Output 1

[300]

[181]

[251] Source Tag

[362] Modulus

300

ABS

False

To Field

Control

I_Field

I_Arm

Analog

Output 3

UNI

[25] Armature I (A9)

Bipolar

Example 2 – Connect the serial link to Analog Output 1.

Allows analog output 1 to read values written by an external device to PNO 58 (ASCII 3A) which is AUX I/O

Analog Out 1. The tag number for the AUX I/O::ANOUT 1 parameter is 128.

Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to Enable.

Set ANALOG OUTPUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7):: SOURCE TAG to 128.

Set ANALOG OUTPUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7):: % TO GET 10V to 100% (factory setting).

Reset CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to Disable.

Setup Parameters::AUX I/O::

ANOUT 1 (A7)

Tag Parameter

Setting

OFF

Tag Parameter

[464] Offset

[245] % to get to 10V

Setting

0.00%

+100.00%

[94] AUX Digout 1

[95] AUX Digout 2

[96] AUX Digout 3

[128] AUX Anout 1

[129] AUX Anout 2

OFF

0.00%

Analog

Output 1

[251] Source Tag

[362] Modulus

128

ABS

False

Example 3 – Connect the current demand to Analog Output 2.

The tag number for the current demand parameter is 66.

Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to Enable.

Set ANALOG OUTPUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8):: SOURCE TAG to 66.

Set ANALOG OUTPUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8):: % TO GET 10V to 200%.

Reset CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to Disable.

Setting % TO GET 10V at 200% results in 5 volts output when current feedback is at 100%.

ANOUT 2 (A8)

Tag Parameter

[465] Offset

[248] % to get to 10V

Setting

0.00%

+200.00%

Setup Parameters::Current Loop::

Tag Parameter Setting

[66] Current Demand N/A

Analog

Output 2

[252] Source Tag

[363] Modulus

ABS

False

MN792

Programming 6-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AUX I/O

The auxiliary I/O parameters allow an external computer (or PLC) to control the Start, Jog and Enable terminals.

Start, Enable and Jog digital input terminals C3, C4, C6 and C7 respectively connect directly to the AUX I/O

block. Output signals are then sent to the drive start and drive enable logic and the Jog/Slack function block.

SETUP PARAMETERS

AUX I/O

Tag Parameter

[161] AUX Start

Setting

Start (To Jog/Slack)

Start

AUX Start

AUX Jog

Diagnostic

[68]

Connection

AUX Enable

AUX Digout 1

AUX Digout 2

AUX Digout 3

ANOUT 1

ANOUT 2

Jog/Slack

REM. SEQ. Enable

REM Sequence

SEQ Status

Enable

[227] AUX Jog

[496] Jog/Slack

Jog (To Jog/Slack)

Dig In 1

[102]

Diagnostic

[71]

Connection

[535] REM SEQ Enable

[536] REM Sequence

[537] SEQ Status

OFF

[94]

[95]

[96]

AUX DIGOUT 1

AUX DIGOUT 2

AUX DIGOUT 3

OFF

[94]

[95]

OFF

[96]

[128] AUX ANOUT 1

[129] AUX ANOUT 2

0.00%

[128]

[129]

Parameter Descriptions

Start (C3) (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Start/Run terminal. ON initiates a start/run forward sequence.

Off commands Stop and decels at Stop Rates, Stop Time setting.

Range: 0 : OFF

1 : ON

Jog (C6 is set in Digital Input Parameters)

Range: 0 : OFF

1 : ON

Jog/Takeup slack terminal. If C6 = On and C7 is Off, motor is commanded to run forward at Jog

Speed 1. If C6 is On and C7 is On, motor is commanded to run forward at active speed setpoint

plus Jog/Slack, Take Up 1 speed. Various Jog or Slack takeup functions are commanded

depending on the various settings of terminals C6, C7 and parameter Jog/Slack, Mode.

SEQ Status

Range: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF

A status word that groups important system flags together for use by remote device over a network.

(Refer to “Remote Sequence”).

AUX Start

Software Start/Run command.

Range: 0 : OFF

1 : ON

AUX Jog

Software Jog command.

Range: 0 : OFF

1 : ON

AUX Enable

Software Enable command.

Range: 0 : OFF

1 : ON

AUX DIGOUT 1

Software digital output 1.

Range: 0 : OFF

1 : ON

AUX DIGOUT 2

Software digital output 2.

Range: 0 : OFF

1 : ON

AUX DIGOUT 3

Software digital output 3.

Range: 0 : OFF

1 : ON

ANOUT 1

Range: –100.00 to 100.00 %

Range: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF

Software analog output 1.

ANOUT 2

Software analog output 2.

REM. Sequence (REM.SEQUENCE)

A control word that allows the device to be operated remotely. REM. SEQ. ENABLE must be True

to enable this function. (Refer to “Remote Sequence”).

REM. SEQ. Enable (REM.SEQ.ENABLE)

False disables REM.SEQUENCE, On enables REM.SEQUENCE.

Range: 0 : OFF

1 : ON

6-8 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AUX I/O Continued

Functional Description

The external device sends its signal directly to the required tag (PNO). In the case of auxiliary digital inputs AUX

Start, AUX Jog and AUX Enable, the overall input will be the result of the “AND” gating of the normal terminal

signal with the auxiliary signal from an external computer or PLC.

The remaining auxiliary outputs allow external computers to directly control the output terminals. These

connections are set in SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O.

ANOUT 1 & 2 can also be used as a “jumper” for connecting inputs to outputs. Example: Use ANOUT1 [128] to

connect Analog Input 1 (A2) [246] directly to Analog Output 1 (A7) [251].

Analog

Input 1

Analog

Output 1

Set Analog Input 1

Destination [246] = 128

Set Analog Output 1

Source [251] = 128

Remote Sequence Tag 536, Mnemonic “ow”, Factory setting = 0x0000

Reserved bits are undefined when read and should be set Zero when written.

Bit Number

Mask

Name

Comment

0 (lsb)

0x0001

0x0002

0x0004

0x0008

0x0010

0x0020

0x0040

0x0080

0x0100

0x0200

0x0400

0x0800

0x1000

0x2000

0x4000

0x8000

Remote Enable

Remote Start

Remote Jog

Remote Jog Mode

Reserved

Selects Jog Speed

Reserved

Remote Alarm Ack

Remote/Remote Trip

Reserved

Alarm Acknowledge

Remote Trip (High for OK)

Reserved

SEQ Status Tag 537, Mnemonic “ox” (Read Only), Factory setting = OFF (Reserved bits are undefined when read.)

Bit Number

Mask

Name

Comment

0 (lsb)

0x0001

0x0002

0x0004

0x0008

0x0010

0x0020

0x0040

0x0080

0x0100

0x0200

0x0400

0x0800

0x1000

0x2000

0x4000

0x8000

Coast Stop

Program Stop

Disable

Run

Jog

Coast Stop demanded

Program (Fast) Stop demanded

Enable demanded

Drive Start demanded

Drive Jog demanded

Undefined

Unacknowledged alarm (Health Store != 0)

Undefined

Contactor in and drive ready to be enabled

Drive is enabled.

Zero speed Output TAG 17

Healthy Output TAG 12

Ready Output TAG 559

Undefined

Reserved

Alarm

Reserved

Running

Enabled

Zero Speed

Healthy Output

Ready

Reserved

MN792

Programming 6-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AUX I/O Continued

Example Bit Patterns

Sequence Status

Comment

0001 1011 0000 1011

0000 0100 0100 1011

0000 0100 0100 0111

0000 1100 0100 0111

Running

Tripped, Run High

Tripped, Run Low, Enable Low

Trip Acknowledged, Healthy o/p TRUE Alarm stays high until drive is restarted.

Example Serial commands using EI–ASCII – REM. SEQUENCE

Tag 536, Mnemonic “ow”, Factory setting = 0x0C07

Remote

Trip

Alarm

Ack

Jog

Mode

Jog Start

Enable Command

Start Drive

Stop Drive

ow>0203

ow>0201

ow>0200

ow>0205

ow>020C

ow>0000

ow>0300

Healthy Output Bit 11

ow>0200

Disable Drive

Jog Setpoint 1

Jog Setpoint 2

Remote Trip

Reset Alarm a)

Reset Alarm b)

Reset Alarm c)

Drive Enable

Drive Start

Drive Jog

To Enable the drive in remote mode the following parameters must be

TRUE: REM.SEQ.ENABLE[535] and REM SEQUENCE [536] BIT 1.

To Start the drive in remote mode the following parameters must be

TRUE: REM.SEQ.ENABLE[535] and REM SEQUENCE [536] BIT 0.

To Jog the drive in remote mode the following parameters must be

TRUE: REM.SEQ.ENABLE[535] and REM SEQUENCE [536] BIT 3.

To select the jog setpoint in remote mode the following parameters must be TRUE:REM.SEQ.ENABLE[535] and

REM SEQUENCE [536] BIT 4.

Jog Mode

ACK Alarm

To Acknowledge an alarm the following parameter must be TRUE:REM SEQUENCE [536] BIT 8.

Note: If remote sequencing is not enabled then REM SEQUENCE [536] BIT 8 is forced TRUE.

Remote Trip Alarm The Remote trip alarm is designed to signal a network fault to the drive. When using the Profibus interface,

all outputs are set to zero on link fail. If one of the outputs is REM SEQUENCE [536 ] the drive will trip after a

delay specified by REM TRIP DELAY (541). The Drive will then need a low – > high transition on ACK Alarm

and Start before the drive may run again.

REM TRIP INHIBIT [540]

REM TRIP DELAY [541]

REMOTE TRIP [542]

Disable remote trip.

Delay before trip becomes active after bit

being cleared.

Status of the Remote trip alarm, OK, Warning (Remote

Seq Bit 9 FALSE and delay not expired), Active (Trip

active, timer expired and remote not inhibited).

6-10 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram The Block Diagram parameters make the connections of input and output tags for the blocks identified on the

block diagrams of Appendix C. These connections are only executed when the destinations are connected to a

non–zero tag. If a function is not required, set its destination tag to zero. A tag=0 causes the processor to ignore

the function and reduces processor loading.

Note: Only the connections are described here. For information about an input or output, refer to the

description of that block described in this section.

SYSTEM

CONFIGURE I/O

BLOCK DIAGRAM

[Block Name} I/O Signal Name

Factory

[Tag] Value Description

[Raise/Lower] Output Destination

[Ramps] Ramp Output Destination

[Setpoint Sum 1] SPT Sum Destination

[PID] PID Output Destination

[Current Loop] POS I Clamp Source

[Current Loop] NEG I Clamp Source

[260]

Raise/Lower] Output Destination

[293] 291 [Ramps] Ramp Output to Setpoint 3 of Speed Loop block.

[294] 289 [Setpoint Sum 1] SPT Sum to Setpoint 1 of Speed Loop block.

[400]

[435]

[436]

[PID] PID Output Destination

[Current Loop] POS I Clamp Source

[Current Loop] NEG I Clamp Source

Parameter Descriptions

[Raise/Lower] Output Destination

Range: 0 to 549

Connects the output of the Raise/Lower bock to its destination tag.

[Ramps] Ramp Output Destination

Connects the Ramp Output of the Ramps bock to its destination tag.

[Setpoint Sum 1] SPT Sum Destination

Connects the SPT Sum Output of the Setpoint Sum 1 bock to its destination tag.

[PID] PID Output Destination

Connects the PID Output of the PID bock to its destination tag.

[Current Loop] POS I Clamp Source

Connects the POS 1 Clamp input of the Current Loop bock to its source tag.

[Current Loop] NEG I Clamp Source

Connects the NEG 1 Clamp input of the Current Loop bock to its source tag.

MN792

Programming 6-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Calibration

This block contains parameters specific to the motor.

Note: Control operation is suspended and all Keypad LEDs will flash while the Configure Enable = Enabled.

SETUP PARAMETERS

CALIBRATION

Calibration – Functional Diagram

Tag Parameter

Factory Setting

0.00%

1000

[10] Zero SPD Offset

[24] Encoder Lines

[22] Encoder RPM

To Speed Loop

Speed Feedback

Selection

Configure Enable

NOM Motor Volts

Armature Current

Field Current

Armature V CAL

IR Compensation

Encoder RPM

1000 RPM

Encoder

Expasnion Board

Encoder

Diagnostic

connections

These parameters

can also be set in

the Level 1

Configure Drive"

menu.

[59] [206]

[23] Analog TACH CAL 1.0000

TACH

Tachometer

Expansion Board

Diagnostic

connection

[60]

Encoder Lines

[20] Armature V CAL

Terminal Volts

1.0000

Analog TACH CAL

Zero SPD Offset

Armature I (A9)

SPDFBK Alarm Level

Stall Threshold

Stall Trip Delay

REM Trip Delay

Overspeed Level

Field I CAL

To Field

Regulator

BEMF

[521] NOM Motor Volts

[21] IR Compensation

100 Volts

0.00%

Speed Feedback

From Speed Loop

Armature

ACCT

Speed Feedback Alarm

To Inhibit Alarms

[180] SPDFBK ALM Level 50.0%

[523] Armature Current

[224] Stall Trip Delay

[263] Stall Threshold

2.0 Amps

10.0 Sec

95.00%

From

Power

Board

Stall Trip

[112]

To Inhibit Alarms

At Zero Speed

From Standstill

Armature Current

[25] Armature I (A9)

Bipolar

[A9]

0-10V or ±10V

ABS

[182] Field I CAL

1.0000

Field

ACCT

Field I FBK

Diagnostic

connections

[524] Field Current

4.0 Amps

[59] [206]

Parameter Descriptions

Terminal Volts (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Range: xxx.xx % (h)

Range: xxxxx RPM

Range: xxx.xx % (h)

Range: xxx.xx %

Scaled terminal voltage.

Tach Input (B2) (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Scaled analog tachogenerator feedback.

Encoder (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Encoder speed feedback in RPM

Back EMF (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Calculated motor back EMF including IR compensation.

Field I Feedback (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Scaled field current feedback

Configuration Enable

When enabled, allow configuration changes but suspends control operation.

Range: 0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

NOM Motor Volts

Range: 100 to 875 Volts

Range: 2.0 to 15.0 AMPS

Range: 0.2 to 4.0 AMPS

Range: 0.9800 to 1.1000

Set this value to match the armature volts rating of the motor.

Armature Current

Set this value to match the armature current rating of the motor.

Field Current

Set this value to match the Field Current rating of the motor.

Armature V CAL

Trim adjustment of the motor armature volts to give exactly 100% at the required actual voltage

value (e.g. 460V etc.).

Note: Primary voltage calibration is achieved by adjusting VA calibration values using SW7.

IR Compensation

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

Compensation for motor IR drop to improve regulation when using armature voltage feedback as

the speed feedback. This is also used in field weakening applications to improve dynamic response

and speed holding stability, refer to “initial start–up routine”.

6-12 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Calibration Continued

Parameter Descriptions Continued

Encoder RPM

Range: 0 to 6000 RPM

Range: 10 to 5000

Max motor speed when using encoder feedback.

Encoder Lines

Sets the lines per revolution value of the encoder being used.

Analog TACH CAL

Range: 0.9800 to 1.1000

Trim adjustment of the motor speed to give exactly 100% at the required actual speed value (e.g.

1500 RPM etc). Note: Primary tachometer calibration is achieved by adjusting SW1 – 3 on the

tachometer calibration board.

Zero SPD. Offset

Range: –5.00 to 5.00 %

If the speed feedback is not zero when the drive is stationary (possibly due to hardware offsets etc.),

set this parameter value to result in a zero reading from the speed feedback.

Armature I (A9)

Range: 0 : Unipolar

1 : Bipolar

Selects bipolar or unipolar operation of the current meter output (terminal A9).

SPDFBK ALM LEVEL

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

The speed feedback alarm compares speed feedback to armature voltage. The alarm level is the

maximum difference between the two signals before the alarm is activated.

Stall Threshold

Stall comparator current feedback threshold level.

Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %

Stall Trip Delay

Range: 0.1 to 600.0

Seconds

Stall comparator time–out delay before stall output becomes true.

V/F Mode

Stall Trip Delay

Speed Feedback > 0.25%

Current Feedback

Delay

Stall Trip

Comparator

Stall Threshold

Overspeed Level

Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %

Range: 0.9800 to 1.1000

Speed feedback level for overspeed alarm

FIELD I CAL

Trim adjustment of the motor field current to give exactly 100% at the required actual current value

(e.g. 1.5A etc.).

Note: Primary field calibration is achieved by adjusting IF calibration using SW1 – 3.

MN792

Programming 6-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configure Drive This menu contains many of the parameters required for configuring the drive. The Configure Drive menu is

only available at the keypad.

Note: Control operation is suspended and all Keypad LEDs will flash while the Configure Enable = Enabled.

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Configure Enable

NOM Motor Volts

Armature Current

Field Current

These parameters can also be set in the

Field Control Mode

Field Volts Ratio

Calibration menus.

Main Current Limit

Autotune

Speed Feedback Select

Encoder Lines

Encoder RPM

SETUP PARAMETERS

CALIBRATION

Encoder Sign

Speed INT Time

Speed PROP Gain

Parameter Descriptions

Configuration Enable

When enabled, allow configuration changes but suspends control operation.

Range: 0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

NOM Motor Volts

Range: 100 to 875 Volts

Range: 2.0 to 15.0 AMPS

Range: 0.2 to 4.0 AMPS

Set this value to match the armature volts rating of the motor.

Armature Current

Set this value to match the armature current rating of the motor.

Field Current

Set this value to match the Field Current rating of the motor.

Zero CAL Inputs

Field Control Mode

Field Volts Ratio

Main Current Limit

Autotune

Range: 0 : Up to Action

1 : Requested

Range: 0 : Voltage Control

1 : Current Control

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %

Range: 0 : OFF

1 : ON

Speed Feedback Select

Range: 0 : ARM Volts FDBK

1 : Analog Tach

2 : Encoder

3 : Encoder/Analog

Encoder Lines

Sets the encoder lines per revolution.

Range: 10 to 5000

Encoder RPM

Max motor speed when using encoder feedback.

Range: 0 to 6000 RPM

Encoder Sign

The polarity of the encoder signal.

Range: 0 : Negative

1 : Positive

Speed INT Time

Range: 0.001 to 30.000

Seconds

Speed PROP Gain

Range: 0.00 to 200.00

6-14 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Current Loop Allows parameters to be customized for the conventional current loop (torque loop) of the control.

SETUP PARAMETERS

CALIBRATION

Configure Enable

NOM Motor Volts

Armature Current

Field Current

Armature V CAL

IR Compensation

Encoder RPM

Encoder Lines

Analog TACH CAL

Zero SPD Offset

Armature I (A9)

SPDFBK Alarm Level

Stall Threshold

Stall Trip Delay

REM Trip Delay

Overspeed Level

Field I CAL

Tag Parameter

[18] Autotune

[16] PROP Gain

[17] INT Gain

Setting

Off

45.00

3.50

[137] Discontinuous

[201] REGEN Mode

12.00

Enabled

[30] Additional DEM

0.00%

Analog IN 2

[67] Actual POS I Limit

[66] Current Demand

[61] Actual NEG I Limit

Phase Angle

Control

From

Speed Loop

[356]

From

At Current

Limit

[42]

Current Profile

From Inverse

Time Overload

To Speed Loop

[119] I DMD Isolate

Digital IN 3

[421] Main Current Limit 200.00%

Digital IN 3

PROG Stop I LIM

(from Stop Rates)

-1

Program

Stop

[88] NEG I Clamp

[90] Bipolar Clamps

[48] NEG I Clamp

Disabled

Analog IN 4

[87] POS I Clamp

ANALOG I/P 5

[301] POS I Clamp

Analog IN 5

Armature

Current

Feedback

[65]

Note 1: IDMD isolate removes speed loop demand and selects analog I/P 2 as current regulator demand.

IDMD isolate is overridden by program stop and stop to return drive to speed regulation.

Note 2: Regen mode disable prevents negative current demand. Series 29 Non–regenerative drives should have regen mode

disabled.

MN792

Programming 6-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Current Loop Continued

Parameter Descriptions

At Current Limit (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

True indicates that current demand equals or exceeds maximum current limit.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

IA Demand (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Range: xxx.xx % (h)

Range: xxx.xx AMPS

(IaDmd Unfiltered)

IA Feedback (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

(IaFbk Unfiltered)

Current FBK.AMPS (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Scaled and filtered armature current in Amps.

IF Feedback (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

(Field I FBK.AMPS)

Autotune

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

This is the autotune function trigger input.

ILOOP Suspend

Reserved parameter.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Master Bridge

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

A diagnostic indicating currently active bridge; master = ON, slave = OFF.

Main CURR. Limit

Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %

Main current limit parameter which is independent of current limit scaler and in series with the other

three current limit blocks.

PROP Gain

Range: 0.00 to 200.00

Proportional gain control for armature current pi loop. this parameter is set during the autotune

function.

INT Gain

Range: 0.00 to 200.00

Range: 0.10 to 50.00

Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %

Integral gain control for armature current PI loop. This parameter is set during the autotune function.

Feed Forward

Set by Autotune but not used by the factory set I–Loop mode

Discontinuous

Discontinuous–to–continuous mean armature current boundary level. This parameter is set during

the autotune function and affects the performance of the adaptive algorithm.

Additional DEM

Additional current demand input

Range: –200.00 to 200.00 %

Bipolar Clamps

Range: 0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

Select input for bipolar (asymmetric) or unipolar (symmetric) current clamps for the 4 quadrants of

operation. Factory setting of DISABLED means UNIPOLAR clamps selected.

Regen Mode – Series 30 controls only

Set mode for regenerative (4–quadrant) or non–regenerative (2–quadrant) operation. Do not

changed while the control is in operation.

Range: 0 : 2Q (Non–regen)

1 : 4Q (Regen)

POS. I Clamp

Range: –100.00 to 100.00 %

Positive current clamp in Bipolar Clamp mode.

NEG. I Clamp

Negative current clamp in Bipolar Clamp mode.

Note: Note bipolar current clamps in bipolar mode can cross over onto the same quadrant as

long as the POS. I Clamp is always algebraically greater than the NEG. I Clamp.

CUR. LIMIT/SCALER

Current limit scaler. It scales bipolar/unipolar clamps.

Range: 0 to 200.00 %

I DMD Isolate

Range: 0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

Speed loop bypass: the current demand input is ANIN2 (A3). The following diagram shows that I

DMD Isolate selects the controlling loop.

Current Feedback

I DMD ISOLATE

shown ENABLED

Speed Demand

SPEED LOOP PI

Current Demand

Motor

CURRENT LOOP PI

Speed Feedback

Analog I/P2 (A3)

Digital I/P3 (C8)

6-16 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Current Profile When speed control is obtained by field weakening, the ability of the motor to commutate armature current is

reduced at low field currents. Also some motors exhibit commutation limitations at higher speeds even with

rated field current.

Current Profile

SETUP PARAMETERS

CURRENT PROFILE

[32] SPD BRK 1 (Low)

100.0% [31] SPD BRK 2 (High)

200.0% [93] IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1)

100.0%

[33] IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2)

Speed Break 1 (Low)

Speed Break 2 (High)

IMAX Break 1 (SPD1)

IMAX Break 2 (SPD2)

200.0%

Parameter Descriptions

SPD BRK 1 (LOW)

The motor speed at which current limit profiling begins.

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

SPD BRK 2 (HIGH)

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

Range: 0.00 to 200.00 % (h)

The upper speed limit at which current limit profiling ends.

IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1)

This sets the current limit value at or below speed break–point 1, provided the other current limits

are greater than this setting.

IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2)

Range: 0.00 to 200.00 % (h)

This sets the current limit value at or above speed break–point 2, provided the other current limits

are greater than this setting.

Functional Description

Current Limit

IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1)

IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2)

Speed Demand

SPD BRK 1 (LOW)

SPD BRK 2 (HIGH)

MN792

Programming 6-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostics

DIAGNOSTICS

This function block is used to monitor the status of the drive, internal variables, and its inputs and outputs.

Diagnostics

Speed Feedback [207] 0.06%

Speed Demand

Speed Feedback

Speed Error

Speed Loop Output

Current Demand

Current Feedback

Current FBK AMPS

IaFBK Unfiltered

IaDemand Unfiltered

POS I Clamp

Operating Mode

Field Enable

Field Demand

Field I FBK

Field I FBK AMPS

UNFIL Field FBK

Field Firing Angle

ANIN1 (A2)

ANIN2 (A3)

ANIN3 (A4)

ANIN4 (A5)

ANIN5 (A6)

ANOUT 1 (A7)

ANOUT 2 (A8)

Start (C3)

Digital Input C4

Digital Input C5

DIGIN 1 (C6)

DIGIN 2 (C7)

DIGIN 3 (C8)

DIGOUT 1 (B5)

DIGOUT 2 (B6)

DIGOUT 3 (B7)

Raise/Lower Output

PID Output

PID Clamped

PID Error

Setpoint Sum Output

Ramp Output

Speed Setpoint

Terminal Volts

Back EMF

TACH Input (B2)

Raw TACH Input

Encoder

Raw Encoder RPM

Raw Speed Feedback

Raw Speed Error

Contactor Closed

Health LED

Ready

Drive Running

System Reset

0.06%

0.00%

100.0%

-100.0%

100.0%

-100.0%

Speed Error [297]

Current Demand [299]

Current Feedback [298]

POS I Clamp [87]

NEG I Clamp [88]

Actual POS I Limit [67]

Actual NEG I Limit [61]

Drive Start [82] OFF

Disabled

0.0%

0.2%

Drive Enable [84]

Field I Feedback [300]

TACH Input (B2) [308]

Encoder [206]

NEG I Clamp

Actual POS I LIM

Actual NEG I LIM

Inverse Time Output

At Current Limit

At Zero Speed

At Zero Setpoint

At Standstill

Ramping

Program Stop

Coast Stop

Drive Start

Drive Enable

0 RPM

Drive Running [376]

Contactor Closed [83]

Parameter Descriptions

Speed Feedback (Also set in Speed Loop Parameters)

Speed loop feedback. The speed feedback value from the source selected by Speed Feedback

Select [47].

Range: xxx.xx %

Speed Error (Diagnostics only)

Range: xxx.xx %

Speed Loop Error.

Current Demand (Diagnostics only)

Current Loop Demand (speed error PI output or external current demand clamped by all the current

limits).

Current Feedback (Diagnostics only)

Scaled and filtered armature current.

Range: xxx.xx %

POS. I Clamp (Diagnostics only)

Range: xxx.xx % (h)

Positive current clamp.

NEG. I Clamp (Diagnostics only)

Negative current clamp.

ACTUAL POS I LIM (Diagnostics only)

Overall positive current limit value.

ACTUAL NEG I LIM (Diagnostics only)

Overall negative current limit value.

DRIVE START (Diagnostics only)

Controller start/run command.

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

Drive Enable (Diagnostics only)

Drive speed and current loop are enabled/quenched.

Range: 0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

FIELD I FBK (Diagnostics only)

Range: xxx.xx %

Range: xxx.xx % (h)

xxxxx RPM

Scaled field current feedback

TACH INPUT (B2) (Diagnostics only)

Scaled analog tachogenerator feedback.

ENCODER (Diagnostics only)

Encoder speed feedback in RPM.

Speed Demand (shown in Stop Rates block)

Range: xxx.xx %

Range: xxx.xx AMPS

Range: xxx.xx %

Speed loop total setpoint after the ramp–to–zero block.

Speed Loop Output (shown in Speed Loop block)

Output from speed loop PI.

Current FBK. AMPS (shown in Current Loop block)

Scaled and filtered armature current in Amps. (IA Feedback)

IaFBK Unfiltered (shown in Current Loop block)

Scaled armature current.

IaDmd Unfiltered (shown in Current Loop block)

Scaled demanded armature current.

6-18 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostics Continued

Parameter Descriptions

Inverse Time Output (shown in Current Loop block)

Inverse time clamp output level.

Range: xxx.xx %

At Current Limit (shown in Current Loop block)

Current demand is being restrained by the overall current limit.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

At Zero Speed (shown in Standstill block)

At zero speed feedback.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

At Zero Setpoint (shown in Standstill block)

At zero speed demand.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

At Standstill (shown in Standstill block)

At zero speed and at zero setpoint.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Ramping (shown in Ramps block)

If the difference between the Ramp Input and The Ramp Output is greater than the Ramp

Threshold, then Ramping is true.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Program Stop (shown in Stop Rates block)

State of Program Stop (Terminal B8). When B8 is at 24V, then Program Stop is false and the

Program Stop front panel LED is also on.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Coast Stop (Diagnostics only)

State of Coast Stop (Terminal B9). When B9 is at 24V, then Coast Stop is False.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Operating Mode (shown in Jog/Slack block)

Range: 0 to 7

Sets the drive mode to Run, Jog 1....stop, etc.

0 : Stop

1 : Stop

2 : Jog Sp. 1

3 : Jog Sp. 2

4 : Run

5 : Take Up Sp. 1

6 : Take Up Sp. 2

7 : Crawl

Field Enabled (shown in Field Control block)

Drive Field Loop Is Enabled/Quenched.

Range: 0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

Field Demand (shown in Field Control block)

Range: xxx.xx %

The meaning of field demand depends upon which mode of field control is in force; in current control

field demand is the current setpoint to the field loop, in voltage mode field demand is the voltage

ratio to the field controller.

FIELD I FBK AMPS (shown in Current Loop block, IF Feedback)

Range: xxx.xx %

Range: xxx.xx DEG

Scaled and filtered field current feedback in Amps.

Raw Field FBK

Scaled field current.

FLD. Firing Angle (shown in Field Control block)

Field firing angle in degrees: 155 degrees is the value for back stop (min field) and 5 degrees is the

value for front stop (max field).

ANIN 1 (A2) (shown in Analog Inputs block)

Range: xxx.xx Volts

Speed setpoint no. 1.

ANIN 2 (A3) (shown in Analog Inputs block)

Speed setpoint no. 2/current demand.

ANIN 3 (A4) (shown in Analog Inputs block)

Speed setpoint no. 3 (ramped).

ANIN 4 (A5) (shown in Analog Inputs block)

Negative current clamp; this is only active if bipolar clamps are enabled

(C6 = ON)

ANIN 5 (A6) (shown in Analog Inputs block)

Range: xxx.xx Volts

Main current limit or positive current clamp if C6 = on.

ANOUT 1 (A7) (shown in Analog Outputs block)

Scaled speed feedback.

ANOUT 2 (A8) (shown in Analog Outputs block)

Total speed setpoint.

Start (C3) (shown in AUX I/O block)

Start/Run terminal.

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

MN792

Programming 6-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostics Continued

Parameter Descriptions

Digital Input C4

Enable terminal.

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

Digital Input C5

Reverse terminal.

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

DIGIN 1 (C6)

Jog/Slack terminal.

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

DIGIN 2 (C7)

Jog/Slack Mode terminal.

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

DIGIN 3 (C8)

Speed or Torque mode select terminal.

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

DIGOUT 1 (B5) (shown in Digital Outputs block)

At zero speed.

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

DIGOUT 2 (B6) (shown in Digital Outputs block)

Drive healthy. Health is also displayed on the front panel LED.

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

DIGOUT 3 (B7) (shown in Digital Outputs block)

Drive ready to run (all alarms healthy and mains synchronization achieved).

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

Raise/Lower Output (shown in Raise/Lower block)

(OUTPUT) Value of the raise/lower ramp function.

Range: xxx.xx %

PID Output (shown in PID block)

PID block output.

Range: xxx.xx %

PID Clamped (shown in PID block)

Logic output indicating whether the PID limits are active.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

PID Error (shown in PID block)

PID error = Input 1 – Input 2

SPT Sum Output (shown in Setpoint Sum 1 block)

Setpoint sum 1 output.

Ramp Output (shown in Ramps block)

Setpoint ramp output.

Speed Setpoint (shown in Speed Loop block)

Speed loop total setpoint including the ramp output before the ramp–to–zero function.

Terminal Volts (shown in Calibration block)

Scaled terminal volts.

Back EMF (shown in Calibration block)

Calculated motor back EMF including IR compensation.

UNFIL TACH Input (shown in Calibration block)

Unfiltered analog tachogenerator feedback.

Encoder (Diagnostics only)

Encoder speed feedback in RPM.

Range: xxx.xx %

Range: xxx.xx % (h)

Range: xxxxx RPM

Range: xxx.xx %

Raw Encoder RPM (shown in Calibration block)

Unfiltered encoder speed feedback in RPM.

UNFIL Speed FBK (shown in Speed Loop block)

Unfiltered speed feedback.

UNFIL Speed Error (shown in Speed Loop block)

Unfiltered speed error.

Contactor Closed (Diagnostics only)

Main contactor control signal.

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

HEALTH LED (shown in Alarms block)

State of Health LED on Operator Station.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

READY (shown in Alarms block)

The drive is ready to accept an enable signal.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

DRIVE RUNNING (Diagnostics only)

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Drive is enabled and may make current when TRUE. A diagnostic for those parameters that can

only be written to when the drive is stopped (parameters marked with Note 2 in the Parameter

Specification Table).

SYSTEM RESET (Diagnostics only)

Set for one cycle as the drive is enabled.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

6-20 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Digital Inputs Allows control of the digital operating parameters of the software. The digital input can be configured to point to

a destination location and to set that destination true or false depending upon programmable values.

Digital Input 1 – DIGIN 1 (C6)

SYSTEM

Tag Parameter

Setting

0.00%

0.01%

CONFIGURE I/O

[102] Destination Tag

[104] Value for False

[103] Value for True

AUX I/O

Digital

Input 1

[102]

[71]

[496] Jog/Slack

DIGITAL INPUTS

DIGIN 1 (C6)

DIGIN 2 (C7)

DIGIN 3 (C8)

DIGITAL INPUTS

Diagnostic

connection

DIGITAL INPUT C4

Digital Input 2 – DIGIN 2 (C7)

DIGITAL INPUT C5

Destination Tag

Tag Parameter

Setting

118

0.00%

0.01%

[105] Destination Tag

[107] Value for False

[106] Value for True

Jog/Slack

Digital

Input 2

[105]

[72]

[228] Mode

Destination Tag

Value for True

Value for False

Diagnostic

connection

Digital Input 3 – DIGIN 3 (C8)

Tag Parameter

Setting

119

0.00%

0.01%

[108] Destination Tag

[110] Value for False

[109] Value for True

Current Loop

Digital

Input 3

[108]

[73]

[119] I DMD Isolate

Diagnostic

connection

Digital Input 4 – DIGIN E (C4)

Tag Parameter

[494] Destination Tag

Setting

497

Digital

Input 4

ꢃ

AUX I/O

Enable

[494]

[69]

[497] Enable

ꢃ

Optional DC contactor

“AM” auxiliary interlock

with drive enable.

Diagnostic

connection

Digital Input 5 – DIGIN R (C5)

Tag Parameter

[495] Destination Tag

Setting

392

Digital

Input 5

Ramps

[495]

[70]

[620] Ramp Invert

Diagnostic

connection

+24V

Parameter Descriptions

Destination Tag (Output)

The destination Tag No. assigned to the digital input.

Range: 0 to 549

Value for True

Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %

The value that output assumes when input is true.

Value for False

The value that output assumes when input is false.

Digital Inputs 1, 2 , and 3 (Also see AUX I/O and Diagnostics blocks)

Refer to the diagnostics function block description.

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

Digital Input C4 (Also see AUX I/O and Diagnostics Parameters).

Range: 0 to 549

Electronic enable/quench terminal (On=Enable). If terminal C4 is used for anything other than

“Drive Enable” ([494] is not set to 497), then the enable parameter [497] must be set to ON or the

drive will not run.

Digital Inputs C4 and C5 have destination tags only.

Note: Value true is fixed at 0.01%, and value false is fixed at 0.00%.

Digital Input C5 (Also see AUX I/O and Diagnostics Parameters).

Reverse is active when C5 is true. This causes [620] Ramp Invert to revese (change polarity) of the

ramped output signal to Setpoint 1 [289] of the Speed Loop.

Range: 0 to 549

Digital Inputs C4 and C5 have destination tags only.

Note: Value true is fixed at 0.01%, and value false is fixed at 0.00%.

MN792

Programming 6-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Digital Inputs Continued

Functional Description

The destination for a digital input can be any valid Tag number. This means that a digital input can be used to

select one of two values for a given parameter. It is also possible to treat the values for true and false as

destination tags from other functions or inputs. 0.00% = a Logic 0 and any other value = a Logic 1. This refers

to the values set in both value for true and value for false parameters. Inverting the digital input is therefore

simple; set value true to 0.00% and value false to 0.01% or any other non–zero number.

Input

Description

Digital input 1

Terminal (C6)

Jog/Slack digital input. (See Jog/Slack description).

Digital input 2

Terminal (C7)

Jog/Slack mode digital input. (See Jog/Slack description).

Digital input 3

Terminal (C8)

Speed/Torque select input. Closed allows a direct current output command from Analog Input 2. The bipolar

signal from Analog 2 is direct acting without any accel or decel ramp rates. Connection from another command

signal source is not possible.

Digital Inputs – Examples Digital inputs can be connected to read/write parameters only. These inputs are useful to control

logical parameters. Logical parameters are those whose ranges are On/Off, True/False, Enabled/Disabled, etc.

They can also send two fixed values to a VALUE parameter as determined by the state of the input terminal.

Example 1 – Using an Analog Input as a Digital Input

It is possible to use an Analog Input as a Digital Input to extend the number of Digital Inputs available. Again,

0.00% is regarded as Logic 0 and any other value is regarded as Logic 1.

Analog Input 1 – ANIN 1 (A2)

Tag Parameter

Analog

Input 1

[231] Max Value

[230] Calibration

+100.00%

1.0000

Current Loop

[246]

[90]

Bipolar Clamps

[232] Min Value

[246] Destination Tag

0.00%

100

Diagnostic

connection

[50]

Example 2 – Using digital inputs with LOGIC parameters

The factory settings allow the digital inputs to switch LOGIC parameters. These are the connections from

terminal C6 to tag 90 (Bipolar Clamps), C7 to tag 118 (Ramp Hold), and C8 to tag 119 (I DMD. Isolate). In each

case, the state of the terminal switches the destination parameter on or off by sending a 1 or 0. Since the format

of the Value For True and Value For False parameters is in percent, 0 is equal to 0.00% and 1 is equal to 0.01%.

Inverting the Input Signal

Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE To Enable.

Set DIGIN 1 (C6)::VALUE FOR TRUE to 0.00%.

Set Value for False to 0.01%.

Reset CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE To Disable.

6-22 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Digital Inputs Continued

Digital input 1 now sends a 0 when the input signal is true and 1 when it is false.

Digital Input 1 – DIGIN 1 (C6)

Tag Parameter

Setting

0.01%

0.00%

[102] Destination Tag

[104] Value for False

[103] Value for True

Digital

Input 1

[102]

Current Loop

From

Speed Loop

[66]

Phase Angle Control

Current Limit

Switch

[90] Bipolar Clamps

[48] NEG I Clamp

Digital IN 1

Analog IN 4

ANALOG I/P 5

[301] POS I Clamp

Analog IN 5

Armature Current

Feedback

[65]

Example 3 – Use Digital Input 1 to set Speed Loop PROP Gain

Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to ENABLE.

Set DIGIN 1 (C6)::DESTINATION TAG to 14 (the speed loop prop gain parameter).

Set VALUE FOR TRUE to 10.00.

Set VALUE FOR FALSE to 30.00.

Reset CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to DISABLE.

Digital input 1 now sets SPEED LOOP::PROP. GAIN to two values depending upon its state. When it is HIGH,

PROP. GAIN is at 10.00 and when LOW, PROP. GAIN is at 30.00.

Digital Input 1 – DIGIN 1 (C6)

Tag Parameter

Setting

30.00%

10.00%

[102] Destination Tag

[104] Value for False

[103] Value for True

Digital

Input 1

[102]

Speed Loop

Tag Parameter

Setting

10.00

[14]

[13]

PROP Gain

INT Time Constant 0.500 Seconds

Off

[202] INT Defeat

To Current Loop I DMD

Isolate switch input

[89] Speed Demand

[207] Speed Feedback

[356]

MN792

Programming 6-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Digital Inputs Continued

Example 4 – Use Digital Input 1 to switch signal sources

Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to ENABLE.

Set DIGIN 1 (C6)::DESTINATION TAG to 364 (Link 1 source tag parameter).

Set DIGIN 1 (C6)::VALUE FOR TRUE to 1.29% (tag number for AUX I/O::ANOUT 2=129).

Set DIGIN 1 (C6)::VALUE FOR FALSE to 1.28% (tag number for AUX I/O::ANOUT 1=128).

Set LINK 1::DESTINATION TAG to 309 (SETPOINT SUM::INPUT 0 parameter).

Set AUX I/O::ANOUT 1 to 10%.

Set AUX I/O::ANOUT 2 to 20%.

Reset CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to Disable.

This example uses an internal link to route two signals to Input 0. The state of digital input 1 determines the

number held by LINK 1 :: SOURCE TAG. When true, it is 129. When false, the tag is 128. LINK 1:: SOURCE

TAG retrieves the value from ANOUT 1 or 2 depending on the tag and routes it to SETPOINT SUM 1:: INPUT 0.

The signal switches between 10 and 20 percent. This is useful for switching between two jog setpoints.

Digital Input 1 – DIGIN 1 (C6)

System::Configure I/O::Link 1::

Tag Parameter

Setting

364

1.28%

1.29%

[102] Destination Tag

[104] Value for False

[103] Value for True

Tag Parameter

[365] Destination Tag

[364] Source Tag

Setting

309

Digital

Input 1

[102]

[365]

Setup Parameters::AUX I/O::

Setup Parameters::Setpoint Sum 1::

Tag Parameter

[128] AUX ANOUT 1

Setting

10.00%

[128]

[129]

Tag Parameter

[292] Sign 0

[208] Ratio 0

[309] Input 0

[420] Divider 0

[423] Input 2

[100] Input 1

Setting

Positive

1.0000

0.00%

1.0000

0.00%

[129] AUX ANOUT 2

20.00%

A/B

+ / -

[86]

6-24 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Digital OutputsDigital outputs can read all parameters (the same as the analog outputs). When used with a VALUE parameter,

MODULUS removes the sign from the value (so –100 becomes 100). The THRESHOLD (>) parameter

determines when the output is HIGH or LOW. The input signal must exceed the Threshold value for the output

to go HIGH. INVERTED, when TRUE, inverts the result of the output from the threshold test.

Digital Output 1 – DIGOUT 1 (B5)

SYSTEM

Tag Parameter

[359] Inverted

[195] Threshold (>)

Setting

False

0.00%

At Zero

Speed

CONFIGURE I/O

DIGITAL OUTPUTS

DIGOUT1 (B5)

Digital

Output 1

[97] Source Tag

[43] Modulus

ABS

True

Digital Output 2 – DIGOUT 2 (B6)

Tag Parameter

[360] Inverted

[196] Threshold (>)

Setting

False

0.00%

DIGOUT2 (B6)

Healthy

122

DIGOUT3 (B7))

Digital

Output 2

[98] Source Tag

[44] Modulus

122

Threshold (>)

Modulus

True

Source Tag

Inverted

Digital Output 3 – DIGOUT 3 (B7)

Tag Parameter

[361] Inverted

[197] Threshold (>)

Setting

False

0.00%

Ready

125

Digital

Output 3

[99] Source Tag

[45] Modulus

125

True

Parameter Descriptions

Threshold (>)

The threshold which the value must exceed to set the output to true.

Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %

Modulus

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Output set TRUE for absolute or modulus of the tag no. value.

Source Tag (Input)

Defines the source variable to control the digital output.

Range: 0 to 549

Inverted

Selects Inverted Output.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

DIGOUT 1, 2 , and 3 (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Refer to the diagnostics function block description.

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

MN792

Programming 6-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Field Control This function block contains all the parameters for the field operating mode. It is viewed at the keypad in three

submenus. In the Field Control menu, you select the field operating mode: open loop voltage control or closed

loop current control.

In certain DC motor applications, high speeds can only be achieved by reducing the field current (torque). This

is the constant horsepower region or field weakening region, and the speed at which it begins is known as the

Base Speed.

SETUP PARAMETERS 1 SETUP PARAMETERS

SETUP PARAMETERS

FIELD CONTROL

Field Control

Volts Ratio

Drive

Run

Firing

Angle

Field Current VARS

Field Weak VARS

FIELD CONTROL

Field

Demand

Field Enable

FLD CURRENT VARS

FLD WEAK VARS

Phase Angle

Control

Max

Volts

PID

Field Control Mode

Field Quench Delay

Field Quench Mode

Setpoint

PROP Gain

INT Gain

Field 1

Feedback

Back EMF Feedback

Field Weak Enable

EMF Lead

EMF Lag

EMF Gain

Min Field Current

MAX Volts

BEMF Feedback Lead

BEMF Feedback Lag

CONFIGURE DRIVE

SETUP PARAMETERS

FIELD CONTROL

Field Control Mode

Field Volts Ratio

FLD VOLTAGE VARS

Field Volts Ratio

Parameter Descriptions

Field Enabled (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Refer to the diagnostics function block description.

Range: 0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

Field Demand (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Refer to the diagnostics function block description.

Range: xxx.xx %

Field Firing Angle (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Refer to the diagnostics function block description.

Range: xxx.xx DEG

Field Enable

Unquenches Field Current Loop.

Range: 0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

Field Control Mode Two modes are avaiable

Range: 0 : Voltage Control

1 : Current Control

(a) Field Voltage Control is an open loop phase angle control to give a certain voltage output.

(b) Field Current Control is a closed loop current control for accurate field control or expansion to field

weakening.

Field Volts Ratio (Ratio Out/In)

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

This parameter controls the output voltage from the open loop voltage control. The ratio is defined

as the dc output voltage over the ac rms input voltage. The factory setting is equivalent to a

single–phase diode rectifier.

Setpoint

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

Field Current Setpoint.

PROP. Gain

This is the proportional gain adjustment of the field current pi loop. The factory setting of 0.10 is

equivalent to a real gain of 10.

INT. Gain

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

This is the integral gain adjustment of the field current PI loop.

Field Weak Enable

Range: 0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

Activates the additional motor back emf PID loop for field weakening (field spillover) control.

EMF LEAD

Range: 0.10 to 50.00

With field weakening control enabled, a PID loop is brought into operation. This is the lead time

constant adjustment of the field weakening PID loop. For a value of 2.00, the real time constant =

200ms.

EMF LAG

Range: 0.00 to 200.00

This is the lag time constant adjustment of the field weakening PID loop. For a value of 4.00, the

real time constant = 4000ms.

EMF GAIN

Range: 0.00 to 100.00

This is the gain adjustment of the field weakening PID loop. For a value of 3.00, the real gain = 30.

MIN FIELD CURRENT

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

The field weakening loop reduces the field current to achieve speed control above base speed. At

top speed the field reaches a minimum value. The Min Fld Current should be set below this

minimum value to allow reasonable margin for transient control near the top speed but not lower

than 6% as this could then cause the “Field Fail” alarm to operate.

6-26 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Field Control Continued

Parameter Descriptions

MAX VOLTS

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

The voltage level at which field weakening begins. It is also known as “Spillover Bias”. The factory

setting value is 100% of the nominal value as set by the armature voltage calibration value. For

start–up this value can be set to a lower desirable level. It is advisable to return it to 100% for

normal operation.

BEMF FBK LEAD

Range: 10 to 5000

The lead time constant of the back EMF feedback filter used for reducing armature voltage

overshoots when during fast acceleration through base speed.

BEMF FBK LAG

The lag time constant of the back EMF feedback filter. If active, the ratio of lead / lag should always

be greater than 1 to give an overall lead action (reduces overshoot) and the ratio should be less

than 3 for stable control. The factory values 100/100 = 1 make the filter inactive.

FLD. QUENCH DELAY

Range: 0.0 to 600.0

Seconds

If dynamic braking is used, the field must be maintained for a period after the drive is disabled. The

field quench delay is the period of time that the field is maintained.

FLD. QUENCH MODE

Range: 0 : Quench

1 : Standby

When the field quench delay has expired, the field can be entirely quenched or put into a standby

mode at 50% of rated current or volts depending whether in current or voltage control mode

respectively. (The factory value of 50% can be modified through the “SYSTEM / Reserved” Menu

which is primarily for factory use only and requires the “super” password.)

Functional Description

Field Control

Field

Enabled

Tag# Parameter

[170] Field Enable

[209] FLD CTRL Mode

Factory Setting

Enabled

Voltage

Supply Alarms OK

[169]

Field Voltage VARS

[210] Ratio Out/In 90.00%

Field Regulator RMS Volts

Phase Angle

Control

Field Current VARS

Standby

Quench

[173] PROP Gain

[172] INT Gain

0.10

1.28

X / 2

[181]

[184]

Tag# Parameter

Factory Setting

[183]

Field Demand

Drive

Enable

[186] Field Quench Mode Quench

[185] Field Quench Delay 0.00 Sec

Field

Firing

Angle

[171] Setpoint

100.00%

Field Weak VARS

[174] FLD Weak Enable Disabled

[175] EMF Lead

[176] EMF Lag

[177] EMF Gain

[191] BEMF FBK Lead

[192] BEMF FBK Lag

2.00

40.00

0.30

100

Output In Voltage Mode

100

Supply Ratio Field Output

Clamp

90%

460V 67%

90%

230V 67%

410V

300V

460V

Motor

BEMF Filter

[60]

230V

200V

150V

[178] MAX Volts

[179] MIN FLD Current

100.00%

MN792

Programming 6-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Alarms

This function block provides a view into the present and past trip conditions, and allows some trips to be

disabled. It is viewed at the keypad in three menus.

SETUP PARAMETERS

INHIBIT ALARMS)

ALARM STATUS

Inhibit Alarms

Last Alarm

Health Word

Health Store

Stall Trip

Alarms

Tag Parameter

[19] Field Fail

Setting

Enabled

Field current less than 6%.

(Field fail threshold is 6% in Current

control, 12% in Voltage control.)

Field Fail

5703 RCV Error

Stall Trip

Trip Reset

Speed FBK Alarm

Encoder Alarm

REM Trip Inhibit

Remote Trip

[111] 5703 RCV Error

[28] Stall Trip

Enabled

Inhibited

5703 RCV Error

Stall Trip

5703 in Slave Mode and COMMS Error

From Calibration Stall Delay and Stall Threshold

From Calibration SPD FBK Alarm Level

[81] Speed FBK Alarm Enabled

Speed FBK Alarm

Encoder Alarm

Health Reset

SETUP PARAMETERS

[92] Encoder Alarm

[305] Trip Reset

Enabled

True

Encoder Feedback Selected and Error Detected

Drive Start

CALIBRATION

REM Trip Delay

Parameter Descriptions

Healthy (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Refer to the diagnostics function block description.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Ready (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Refer to the diagnostics function block description.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Health Word

Range: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF

The hexadecimal sum of any alarms present. Refer to Troubleshooting for more information.

Health Store

Range: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF

The hexadecimal value of the first (or only) alarm. Refer to Troubleshooting for more information.

Remote Trip

The State Of Remote Trip.

Range: 0 : OK

1 : Failed

Stall Trip

Range: 0 : OK

1 : Failed

Armature current is above stall threshold and at zero speed but not at zero setpoint.

Last Alarm

The hexadecimal value of the last (or only) alarm. Refer to Troubleshooting for more information.

Range: 0x0000 to 0xff06

0x0000 : No Active Alarms 0x0080 : Encoder Failed

0x8000 : Accts Failed

0x0001 : Over Speed

0x0002 : Missing Pulse

0x0004 : Field Over I

0x0008 : Heatsink Trip

0x0010 : Thermistor

0x0020 : Over Volts (Va)

0x0040 : Spd Feedback

0x0100 : Field Failed

0x0200 : 3 Phase Failed

0x0400 : Phase Lock

0x0800 : 5703 Rcv Error

0x1000 : Stall Trip

0x2000 : Over I Trip

0xf005 : External Trip

0xf001 : Autotune Error

0xf002 : Autotune Aborted

0xf200 : CONFIG Enabled

0xf400 : No Op–station (No Keypad)

0xf006 : Remote Trip

0xff05 : PCB Version

0xff06 : Product Code

Field Fail

Inhibits the field fail alarm.

Range: 0 : Enabled

1 : Inhibited

5703 RCV Error

Range: 0 : Enabled

1 : Inhibited

Inhibits 5703 serial communications receive error. Only active in slave mode.

Stall Trip

Range: 0 : Enabled

1 : Inhibited

Inhibits the stall trip alarm from tripping the contactor out.

Trip Reset

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

When false, the faults are latched permanently and the healthy output remains inactive after

changing the start input (C3) Off/On. The trip reset must then be set to true for the faults to be reset

and the healthy output to go active (high) when C3 goes low. this feature can be used in

applications where you want to reset the faults under your own control, rather than automatically

with the start/run command.

Speed FBK Alarm

Inhibits the speed feedback alarm.

Range: 0 : Enabled

1 : Inhibited

Encoder Alarm

Inhibits the encoder option board alarm.

Range: 0 : Enabled

1 : Inhibited

REM Trip Inhibit

Inhibits the remote trip.

Range: 0 : Enabled

1 : Inhibited

REM Trip Delay

Range: 0 : Enabled

1 : Inhibited

The delay between the remote trip alarm being activated and the drive tripping.

6-28 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Jog/Slack

SETUP PARAMETERS

These parameters control the Jog function of the control. (Also see “Ramps” description).

DIG IN 1

[C6]

[102]

[105]

Jog / Slack

Jog/Slack

Tag Parameter

[496] Jog/Slack

Factory Setting

Off

Jog Speed 1

Jog Speed 2

Take Up 1

Take Up 2

Crawl Speed

Mode

[228] Mode

False

Stop

[C7]

Operating Mode

Stop

Mode

False

True

False

True

False

True

Jog

Off

Run

Off

O/P

S/P

[212] Operating Mode

Ramp Rate

Run

[253] Take Up 1

[254] Take Up 2

[218] Jog Speed 1

[219] Jog Speed 2

[225] Crawl Speed

[355] Ramp Rate

+5.00%

-5.00%

+5.00%

-5.00%

Take Up Slack 1

Take Up Slack 2

Jog 1

Jog 2

Crawl

S/P + Take Up 1

S/P + Take Up 2

Jog Speed 1

Jog Speed 2

Crawl Speed

10.00%

1.0 Seconds

Jog

Ramp Rate

Parameter Descriptions

OPERATING MODE (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Range: 0 to 7

Refer to the diagnostics function block description.

0 : STOP

1 : STOP

2 : JOG SP. 1

3 : JOG SP. 2

4 : RUN

5 : TAKE UP SP. 1

6 : TAKE UP SP. 2

7 : CRAWL

JOG SPEED 1

Range: –100.00 to 100.00 %

Jog speed 1 setpoint.

JOG SPEED 2

Jog speed 2 setpoint.

TAKE UP 1

Take–up slack speed setpoint 1.

TAKE UP 2

Take–up slack speed setpoint 2.

CRAWL SPEED

Crawl speed setpoint.

MODE

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Jog/Slack operating mode select. MODE should be connected to a digital input.

RAMP RATE

Range: 0.1 to 600.0

Seconds

The ramp rate used during Jog is independent of the main ramp rate during normal running. The

acceleration and deceleration times in jog are always equal.

Functional Description

To fully use all the modes , Mode [228] must be connected to one of the digital inputs. “Setpoint” in the following

table refers to the MIN Speed Input. Any direct setpoints that exist are added to this setpoint to make the total

speed setpoint. If this is not desirable, for example during jog, the direct setpoints should be disconnected

during the appropriate conditions.

MIN Speed Input

Setpoint

Setpoint + Take–Up Slack 1

Setpoint + Take–Up Slack 2

Crawl Speed

Operating Mode

Stop

Run

Take–Up Slack 1

Take–Up Slack 2

Crawl

Inch / Jog 1

Inch / Jog 2

Start (C3) Jog (C6)

Mode (C7) Ramp Time

Contactor

OFF

–

factory setting

False

True

False

True

factory setting

Jog Accel/Decel Ramp

OFF

Jog Speed 1

Jog Speed 2

OFF

MIN Speed

Input

RAMP INPUT + TAKE UP 1

RAMP INPUT

RUN (C3)

JOG (C4)

JOG SPEED 1

RAMP RATE

set in JOG/SLACK

RAMP ACCEL TIME RAMP DECEL TIME

set in RAMPS

MN792

Programming 6-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menus

Allows selection of either the full menu structure, or a reduced menu structure. It also selects the language for

the keypad display.

Menus

MENUS

SETUP PARAMETERS

Enabled [37] Full Menus

0.000 [547] Speed FDBK Filter

English [304] Language

Full Menus

Language

SPEED LOOP

Speed FBK Filter

Parameter Descriptions

FULL MENUS

When enabled, the full menu structure is displayed at the keypad.

Range: 0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

LANGUAGE

Range: 0 : English

1 : Other

Selects the display language. Other languages are available, please contact Baldor.

SPEED FBK FILTER

Range: 0.000 to 1.000

A simple filter function that is applied to Speed Feedback to reduce ripple caused by encoders with

low line count. A value of 0 diables the filter action. 1.00 is the maximum value. A typical value

would be between 0.5 and 0.75.

Increasing the filter value may make the speed loop unstable.

The filter time constant “τ” in milliseconds is calculated as follows:

3.3

tĂ +Ă

ǒ Ǔ

Log_{e a}

Where α is the Speed FBK Filter value. α = 0.5 indicates a filter time constant of 0.48 milliseconds,

0.8 to 14.7ms, and 0.9 to 31.2 ms.

6-30 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OP Station

(Keypad) Local operation parameters are set using three menus.

SETUP PARAMETERS

OP-STATION

SETUP PARAMETERS

OP-STATION

Local Setpoint

Local Ramp

SETUP

START UP VALUES

Stop Ramp

Set Point

JOG Setpoint

Local Key Enable

Setpoint

JOG Setpoint

Forward

Program

Local

Up Key

Down Key

SETUP PARAMETERS

OP-STATION

Accel Time

Decel Time

% S-Ramp

Reset Value

Note:

Local Setpoint (only active when the drive is in Local mode)

LOCAL RAMP

Ramp ACCEL Time

Ramp DECEL Time

Parameter Descriptions

Local Key Enable

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Enables the “L/R” on the keypad. This must be set true to allow the operator to select local and

remote modes.

Setpoint

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

Actual value of local setpoint.

Jog Setpoint

Actual value of local jog setpoint.

RAMP ACCEL TIME

Acceleration time used in Local mode.

Range: 0.1 to 600.0

Seconds

RAMP DECEL TIME

Deceleration time used in Local mode.

Range: 0.1 to 600.0

Seconds

FORWARD (Initial FWD Direction)

Start–up mode of local direction on power–up. True = Forward.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

LOCAL (Initial Local)

Start–up mode of keypad L/R key on power–up. True = Local mode.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Program (Initial Program)

Start–up mode of keypad PROG key on power–up. True = Program mode, to see the local setpoint.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Setpoint (Initial Setpoint)

Value of local setpoint on power–up.

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

JOG Setpoint (Initial Jog Setpoint)

Value of local jog setpoint on power up.

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

Password

PASSWORD

This keypad menu activates or deactivates the password protection feature.

Enter Password

By-Pass Password

Change Password

Parameter Descriptions

Enter Password

Factory Setting = 0x0000 (No Password Is Set).

Range: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF

BY–PASS PASSWORD Reserved parameter.

Factory Setting = FALSE

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

CHANGE PASSWORD

Factory Setting = 0x0000 (no change).

Range: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF

MN792

Programming 6-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PID

This is a general purpose PID block which can be used for many closed loop control applications. PID feedback

can be loadcell tension, dancer position or any other transducer feedback such as pressure, flow etc.

PID

SETUP PARAMETERS

SPECIAL BLOCKS

Tag Parameter

[473] Mode

[404] PROP Gain

Factory Setting

[475] Profile Gain

PID

[474] MIN Profile Gain

[401] Derivative TC

[402] INT Time Constant 5.00 Seconds

20.00%

PID

Clamped

PROP Gain

INT Time CONST

Derivative TC

Positive Limit

Negative Limit

O/P Scaler (Trim)

Input 1

Input 2

Ratio 1

Ratio 2

Divider 1

Divider 2

Enable

INT Defeat

Filter TC

Mode

0.000 Seconds

[416]

[403] Filter TC

[412] Ratio 1

[410] Input 1

0.100 Seconds

1.0000

0.00%

A/B

[418] Divider 1

[413] Ratio 2

[411] Input 2

[414] Divider 2

[409] INT Defeat

[408] Enable

1.0000

0.00%

1.0000

Off

Enabled

-100.00%

100.00%

[415] PID Error

PID

[417]

PID

Output

[406] Negative Limit

[405] Positive Limit

[407] Output Scaler (Trim) 0.2000

MIN Profile Gain

Profiled Gain

Parameter Descriptions

PID Output (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Refer to the diagnostics function block description.

Range: xxx.xx %

PID Clamped (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Refer to the diagnostics function block description.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

PID Error (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Refer to the diagnostics function block description.

Range: xxx.xx %

PROP. Gain

Range: 0.0 to 100.0

This is a pure gain factor which shifts the whole Bode PID transfer function up or down leaving the

time constants unaffected. A value of P = 10.0 means that, for an error of 5%, the proportional part

(initial step) of the PID output will be:

10 x [ 1 + (Td/Ti) ] x 5 % ,

i.e. approx. 50% for Td << Ti.

INT. TIME CONST (SPD.INT.TIME)

The integrator time constant (Ti)

Range: 0.01 to 100.00

Seconds

DERIVATIVE TC

Range: 0.000 to 10.000

Seconds

The differentiator time constant (Td). When Td = 0 the transfer function of the block becomes a P+I.

Positive Limit

Range: 0.00 to 105.00 %

Range: –105.00 to 0.00 %

Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000

The upper limit of the pid algorithm.

Negative Limit

The lower limit of the PID algorithm.

Output Scaler (Trim) (Output Scaler Gain)

The ratio which the limited PID output is multiplied by in order to give the final PID Output. Normally

this ratio would be between 0 and 1.

INPUT 1

Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %

Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000

This can be either a position/tension feedback or a reference/offset.

INPUT 2

This can be either a position/tension feedback or a reference/offset.

RATIO 1

The gain factor for Input 1 (Ratio 1).

RATIO 2

The gain factor for Input 2 (Ratio 2).

DIVIDER 1

This reduces (divides) Input 1 by a factor (Divider 1).

DIVIDER 2

This reduces (divides) Input 2 by a factor (Divider 2).

ENABLE

Range: 0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

A digital input which resets the (total) PID Output as well as the integral term when false.

INT. DEFEAT

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

A digital input which resets the integral term when true. The block transfer function then becomes

P+D only.

6-32 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PID Continued

Parameter Descriptions

FILTER T.C.

Range: 0.000 to 10.000

Seconds

To attenuate high–frequency noise, a first order filter is added in conjunction with the differentiator.

The ratio k of the Derivative Time Constant (Td) over the Filter Time Constant (Tf) (typically 4 or 5)

determines the high–frequency lift of the transfer function. For Tf = 0 this filter is disabled.

MODE

Range: 0 to 4

This determines the law which the profiler follows versus diameter.

For Mode = 0, Profiled Gain = constant = P.

For Mode = 1, Profiled Gain = A * (diameter – min diameter) + B.

For Mode = 2, Profiled Gain = A * (diameter – min diameter)^2 + B.

For Mode = 3, Profiled Gain = A * (diameter – min diameter)^3 + B.

For Mode = 4, Profiled Gain = A * (diameter – min diameter)^4 + B.

MIN PROFILE GAIN

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

Range: xxxx.x

This expresses the minimum gain required at min diameter (core) as a percentage of the (max) P

gain at full diameter (100%).

PROFILED GAIN

The output of a profiler block which varies the gain versus diameter. This is primarily to be used with

Speed Profiled Winders for compensation against varying diameter and therefore inertia. When

MODE is not ZERO (see above) this overrides the P gain above.

Functional Description

The block diagram shows the internal structure of the PID block. PID is used to control the response of any

closed loop system. It is used specifically in system applications involving the control of drives to allow zero

steady state error between reference and feedback, together with good transient performance.

Proportional Gain (PROP. GAIN)

Adjusts the basic response of the closed loop control system. It is defined as the portion of the loop gain that is

fed back to make the complete control loop stable. The PID error is multiplied by the proportional gain to

produce an output.

Integral (INT. TIME CONST.)

The Integral term is used to give zero steady state error between the setpoint and feedback values of the PID. If

the integral is set to a small value, this will cause an underdamped or unstable control system.

Derivative (DERIVATIVE TC)

Corrects certain types of control loop instability and therefore improves response. Helpful when heavy or large

inertia rolls are being controlled. The derivative term has an associated filter to suppress high frequency signals.

Parameter values should be selected to achieve a critically damped response, which allows the mechanics to

track as precisely as possible a step change on the setpoint.

Underdamped

Critically Damped Response

Setpoint

Value

Overdamped

Critically damped

Time

Setpoint

Time

MN792

Programming 6-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Raise/Lower Provides a motor operated potentiometer (MOP) feature. Raise input [261], when true, increases the output at

the rate determined by increase rate [256]. Lower input [262] decreases the output as determined by decrease

rate [257]. MIN value and MAX value limits the total change by the amounts set. The output is not preserved

during power–down.

SETUP PARAMETERS

RAISE/LOWER

Raise / Lower

Raise/Lower

Output

Tag Parameter

[256] Increase Rate

[257] Decrease Rate

[261] Raise Input

[262] Lower Input

[307] External Reset

[255] Reset Value

[258] MIN Value

Factory Setting

10.0 Seconds

False

Digital

MOP

Reset Value

Increase Rate

Decrease Rate

Raise Input

Lower Input

MIN Value

MAX Value

[260]

Diagnostic

Connection

[264]

0.00%

-100.00%

100.00%

[259] MAX Value

[260] Destination Tag

External Reset

Parameter Descriptions

Raise/Lower Output (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Refer to the diagnostics function block description.

Range: xxx.xx %

Reset Value

Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %

This reset value is preloaded directly into the output when External Reset is True, or at power–up. It

Is clamped by min and max values.

Increase Rate

Range: 0.1 to 600.0 Seconds

Rate of change of increasing output value.

Decrease Rate

Rate of change of decreasing output value.

Raise Input

Command to raise output.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Lower Input

Command to lower output.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

MIN Value

Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %

Minimum ramp output clamp. This is a plain clamp, not a ramped “min speed” setting.

MAX Value

Maximum ramp output clamp.

Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %

External Reset

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

If External Reset = true, the output of the raise/lower block = the reset value.

Functional Description

These waveforms illustrate the raise/lower function. When External Reset is set true, the raise/lower output

resets to reset value (default = 0.00%). When Raise Input is true, the output increases at increase rate. The

output cannot exceed MAX Value. When Lower Input is true, the output is reduced at the decrease rate. The

output cannot go below the MIN Value. Removing the raise or lower signal before the output reaches its

maximum or minimum value leaves the output at its last value. Setting both raise input and lower input to true at

the same time creates a ramp hold condition.

LOWER INPUT

RAISE INPUT

EXTERNAL RESET

100%

RAISE/LOWER OUTPUT

RESET VALUE

DEFAULT=0%

INCREASE RATE

DEFAULT 10.0 SEC

DECREASE RATE

DEFAULT 10.0 SEC

6-34 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ramps

This function block provides the facility to control the rate at which the control will respond to a changing

setpoint.

RAMPS

DIG IN R

SETUP PARAMETERS

RAMPS

Tag Parameter

Factory Setting

[620] Ramp Invert

False

[C5]

S/P

[5]

[126] Min Speed

Ramp Input

0.00%

[286] Ramping Threshold 0.50%

Ramp ACCEL Time

Ramp DECEL Time

Constant ACCEL

Ramp Hold

% S-Ramp

Ramping Thresh

Auto Reset

External Reset

Reset Value

MIN Speed

Ramping

[113]

[293]

O/P

Ramp Output

To Speed Loop

S/Linear

Ramp

[118] Ramp Hold

[422] Reset Value

Off

0.00%

[85]

[288] External Reset

[287] Auto Reset

Disabled

Enabled

Diagnostic

connection

Drive Enable

[2]

[3]

Ramp Accel Time

Ramp Decel Time

10.00 Sec

2.50%

[266] % S Ramp

Ramp O/p Dest

291

[293]

DIG IN 1

[C6]

[102]

[105]

Jog / Slack

Tag Parameter

[496] Jog/Slack

Factory Setting

Off

DIG IN 2

[228] Mode

False

Stop

[C7]

Operating Mode

Stop

Mode

False

True

False

True

False

True

Jog

Off

Run O/P

[212] Operating Mode

Off

S/P

Run

[253] Take Up 1

[254] Take Up 2

[218] Jog Speed 1

[219] Jog Speed 2

[225] Crawl Speed

[355] Ramp Rate

+5.00%

-5.00%

+5.00%

-5.00%

10.00%

1.0 Seconds

Take Up Slack 1

Take Up Slack 2

Jog 1

Jog 2

Crawl

S/P + Take Up 1

S/P + Take Up 2

Jog Speed 1

Jog Speed 2

Crawl Speed

True

Jog

Start

From

AUX I/O

Jog

Ramp Rate

S/P O/P

Parameter Descriptions

Ramp Output (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Refer to the diagnostics function block description.

Range: xxx.xx %

Ramping (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Refer to the diagnostics function block description.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Ramp Accel Time

Acceleration time (100% change)

Range: 0.1 to 600.0 Seconds

Ramp Decel Time

Deceleration time (100% change)

Range: 0.1 to 600.0 Seconds

Constant Accel

Reserved parameter.

Range: 0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

Ramp Hold

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

While ON, the ramp output is held at its last value. This is overridden by Ramp Reset.

Ramp Input

Ramp input tag.

Range: –105.00 to 105.00 %

% S–Ramp

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

Percentage of ramp with S–shaped rate of change. A value of zero is equivalent to a linear ramp.

Changing this value affects the ramp times.

Ramping Thresh.

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

Ramping flag threshold level. The threshold is used to detect whether the ramp is active.

Auto Reset

Range: 0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

If true, then the ramp is reset whenever System Reset is true, that is each time the speed/current

loop is unquenched. (System Reset [374] is an internal flag that is set true for one cycle after the

speed/current loop is enabled, i.e. every time the drive is started).

External Reset

Range: 0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

If true, then the ramp is held in reset. External reset does not depend on auto reset for its operation.

MN792

Programming 6-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ramps Continued

Parameter Descriptions

Reset Value

Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %

This value is loaded into the output when Ramp Reset is true, or at power–up. To catch a spinning

load smoothly (‘bumpless transfer’), connect Speed Feedback [62] (source) to Reset Value [422]

(destination).

MIN. Speed

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

The minimum speed clamp is fully bi–directional and operates with a 0.5% hysteresis. This clamp

operates on the input to the ramp and it can therefore be overrridden by the Reset Value (as far as

the ramp output is concerned).

Minimum Speed

Output

Input

-0.5

0.5

Functional Description

Ramping Threshold [286]

Input

Output

Ramping [113]

% S Ramp [266]

Input

Output

S/P

O/P

Ramp Output [293]

Ramp Input [5]

Jog/Slack

Min Speed [126]

S" Ramp

Ramp Decel Time [3]

Ramp Accel Time [2]

Ramp Hold [118]

Auto Reset [287]

External Reset [288]

Reset Value [422]

Acceleration / Deceleration Rates

RAMP INPUT (+ 100%)

Ramp Hold

RAMP HOLD ON

Ramp Input

RAMP OUTPUT

+100%

Off

RAMP OUTPUT

Ramp Accel Time

(S Ramp 0%)

RAMP DECEL TIME

(S RAMP 0%)

Actual Accel Time

with S Ramp

Actual Decel Time

with S Ramp

Ramp operation occurs when a ramp input is present. When

Digital Input 2 is ON, Ramp Hold stops the ramp output from

changing. Even when the ramp input signal is removed,

Ramp Hold keeps the ramp output from changing. Once

Ramp Hold is off, the ramp resumes.

RAMP INPUT (-100%)

RAMP OUTPUT

-100%

Ramp Accel Time

(S Ramp 0%)

RAMP DECEL TIME

(S RAMP 0%)

Actual Accel Time

with S Ramp

Actual Decel Time

with S Ramp

6-36 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ramps Continued

Minimum Speed

100%

Ramp Input

This figure shows the effect of setting MIN. Speed

above 0.00%. When the drive is enabled, the ramp

output cannot decrease below the MIN. Speed value.

Note the ramp rates are used when changing the

output from minimum speed to zero speed. Notice also

that in this example the ramp output only increases to

X% since the ramp input signal is limited to X%.

Drive Enabled

Ramp Input

t₀

100%

Ramp Output

t₀

Auto Reset

100%

With Auto Reset enabled, the ramp output resets to

reset value each time the drive is enabled. In this

example, reset value is 0.00%. It does not reset if the

drive is disabled.

Drive Enabled

Ramp Input

t₀

100%

Ramp Output

t₀

External Reset

100%

Ramp Input

The ramp input is set to X% at time t₀. The ramp

output will increase at the ramp rate. While external

reset is enabled, the ramp output resets to reset value.

When external reset is disabled, the ramp output

continues to follow input signal.

Drive Enabled

Ramp Input

t₀

100%

Ramp Output

t₀

MN792

Programming 6-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setpoint Sum 1 Setpoint Sum 1 allows the summing and scaling of three analog inputs to produce SPT. Sum Output [294].

Note: This block is ignored by the drive unless [294] is connected to a nonzero destination tag.

Input 0 and Input 1 have individual ratio and divider scalers, and signs. Input 1 has an additional deadband

function set by Deadband Width. When the input is within the deadband, the output clamps to zero to ignore any

noise. This parameter is useful when digital setpoints are used (for example from a 5703, serial

communications, or the Raise Lower function block). The inputs have symmetrical limits set by Limit. Input 2 has

no scaling or limits. The output after Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2 are summed is also clamped by Limit before

producing SPT. Sum Output.

SETUP PARAMETERS

Setpoint Sum 1

Tag Parameter

[292] Sign 0

[208] Ratio 0

[309] Input 0

[420] Divider 0

[423] Input 2

Ratio 1

[100] Input 1

[131] Deadband Width

[419] Divider 1

Factory Setting

Positive

1.0000

0.00%

1.0000

0.00%

1.0000

0.00%

1.0000

SETPOINT SUM 1

Ratio 1

Ratio 0

Sign 1

Sign 0

Divider 1

Divider 0

Deadband Width

Limit

Input 2

Input 1

Input 0

SPT Sum

Destination

A/B

Analog

Input 1

[294]

[6]

[86]

[8] Sign 1

[375] Limit

[294] SPT Sum 1 Dest

Positive

105.00%

390

Diagnostic

Connection

Parameter Descriptions

SPT. Sum 1 Destination [294] (Set in Configure I/O::Block Diagram Parameters)

Range: 0 to 549

Range: R/O

Refer to the diagnostics function block description.

SPT. Sum Output [86] (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Refer to the diagnostics function block description.

Ratio 1

Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000

Analog input 1 scaling.

Ratio 0

Input 0 scaling.

Sign 1

Analog input 1 polarity.

Range: 0 : Negative

1 : Positive

Sign 0

Input 0 polarity.

Range: 0 : Negative

1 : Positive

Divider 1

Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

Analog input 1 scaling. Dividing by 0 (zero) results in a zero output.

Divider 0

Input 0 scaling. Dividing by 0 (zero) results in a zero output.

Deadband Width

Analog input 1 deadband width. When Input 1 is within the deadband, the output clamps to zero to

ignore any noise.

LIMIT

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

The Setpoint Sum 1 programmable limit is symmetrical and has the range of 0.00% to 200.00%.

The limit is applied both to the intermediate results of the ratio calculation and the total ouput.

INPUT 2

Range: –200.00 to 200.00 %

Input 2 value. The factory settings do not connect this input to any analog input.

INPUT 1

Input 1 value. The factory settings connects this input to Analog Input 1 (A2).

INPUT 0

Input 0 value. The factory settings do not connect this input to any analog input.

6-38 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Speed Loop

Speed loop selects the speed feedback source and tunes the speed loop PI to produce a current demand. The

parameters are set in several menus, some parameters can be set in multiple menus. Speed FBK Select

determines the source of the speed feedback signal. The default, Arm Volts FBK, uses internal circuitry to derive

speed feedback. The other selections require external devices to provide the feedback signal. Speed Demand is

summed algebraically with Speed Feedback to yield Speed Error. When the drive is enabled, Speed Error is

controlled by the PI loop. Proportional and integral values are set in the Advanced::Adaption block. The resulting

current demand signal is sent to the Current Loop block and to the Advanced::Zero SPD. Quench block.

SETUP PARAMETERS

SPEED LOOP

SETUP PARAMETERS

SPEED LOOP

SETUP PARAMETERS

SPEED LOOP

SETUP PARAMETERS

SPEED LOOP

SETUP PARAMETERS

SPEED LOOP

Speed PROP Gain

Speed INT Time

INT Defeat

Encoder Sign

Speed FBK Select

Speed FBK Filter

ADVANCED

SETPOINTS

ADVANCED

ADAPTION

I Gain in Ramp

POS Loop P Gain

Setpoint 1

ZERO SPD QUENCH

Sign 2 (A3)

Ratio 2 (A3)

Setpoint 3

Setpoint 4

MAX Demand

MIN Demand

Zero SPD Level

Zero IAD Level

Mode

Speed BRK1 (Low)

Speed BRK2 (High)

PROP Gain

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Speed FBK Select

Encoder Sign

Speed INT Time

Speed PROP Gain

Speed Loop

I DMD Isolate (from Current Loop)

[119]

Tag# Parameter

Factory Setting

1.0000 Sec

Analog

Input 2

[7]

Ratio 2 (A3)

+ / -

To IDMD

Isolate Switch

(To Current Loop)

[9]

Sign 2 (A3)

Positive

0.00%

1.0000 Sec

SPT Sum Out

Ramp Out

105.00%

[290] Setpoint 2

[41] Setpoint 4

[289] Setpoint 1

[291] Setpoint 3

[357] MAX Demand

[358] MIN Demand

+ +

Speed Setpoint

Diagnostic

[63]

-105.00%

Connection

[13] INT Time Constant 0.500 Sec

[14] PROP Gain

10.00

Advanced

Adaption

Tag# Parameter

Zero SPD Quench

Tag# Parameter

Factory Setting

[270] SPD BRK2 (High)

[269] SPD BRK2 (Low)

[268] Mode

[271] PROP Gain 5.00

[272] INT Time Constant 0.500 Sec

5.00%

1.00%

[284] Zero SPD Level

[285] Zero IAD Level

0.50%

1.50%

Armature SCR

Firing Quench

[202] INT Defeat

[89] Speed Demand

Off

To Current

Current Demand

[356]

Loop

Diagnostic

Connection

Speed Feedback Select

[64]

[47] Speed FBK Select

Armature Volts

Diagnostic

Connection

Unfiltered Speed Error

[297]

[62]

Analog Tach

Diagnostic

Connection

Unfiltered Speed Feedback

Encoder

+ / -

Diagnostic

Connection

Note: Encoder analog feedback selection uses analog Tach feedback for the proportional

term of the speed loop PI and encoder feedback for the Integral term. This feedback

selection requires that the motor have an analog Tach/Encoder installed. This

selection cannot be used with the switchable Tachogenerator board is installed.

[207]

[49] Encoder Sign (+/-)

Zero SPD Offset

MN792

Programming 6-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Speed Loop Continued

Parameter Descriptions

Speed Loop Output SPD Loop Output (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Range: xxx.xx %

Range: 0.00 to 200.00

Output from Speed Loop PI.

Speed Feedback (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

The speed feedback value from the source chosen by SPEED FBK SEL.

Speed Setpoint (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Speed loop total setpoint including the ramp output before the ramp–to–zero function.

Speed Error (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Speed loop error.

Speed PROP. Gain (Can be set in Speed Loop or Configure Drive.)

Speed loop Pi proportional gain adjustment.

Speed INT. Time (Can be set in Speed Loop or Configure Drive.)

Speed loop PI integral gain adjustment.

Range: 0.001 to 30.000

Seconds

INT. DEFEAT

Range: 0 : Off

1 : On

Inhibits the integral part of the speed loop PI to give proportional control only.

Encoder Sign (Can be set in Speed Loop or Configure Drive.)

Since the encoder feedback cannot be reversed electrically, the signal polarity can be reversed by

the control software.

Range: 0 : Negative

1 : Positive

Speed FBK Select (Can be set in Speed Loop or Configure Drive.)

Range: 0 to 3

Four options are available:

0 : ARM Volts FBK

1 : Analog TACH

2 : Encoder

3 : Encoder/Analog

Setpoint 1

Speed Setpoint 1.

Range: –105.00 to 105.00 %

Sign 2 (A3)

Speed Setpoint 2 Sign.

Range: 0 : Negative

1 : Positive

Parameter Descriptions

Ratio 2 (A3)

Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000

Range: xxx.xx %

Speed Setpoint 2 Ratio.

Setpoint 2 (A3) This is a fixed (non–configurable) input.

This setpoint is scanned synchronously with the current loop .

Setpoint 3

Range: –105.00 to 105.00 %

Range: 0.00 to 105.00 %

Speed Setpoint 3.

Setpoint 4

Speed Setpoint 4.

MAX Demand

Sets the maximum input to the speed loop. It is clamped at 105% to allow for overshoot in the

external loops.

MIN Demand

Sets the minimum input to the speed loop.

Range: –105.00 to 105.00 %

I Gain in Ramp

Range:

POS Loop P Gain

Zero SPD Level

Zero IAD Level

Functional Description

Speed Loop PI Output – The PI output is available for connection using tag no. 356. This point is before the I Limit clamps

and the summing of the additional current demand. This tag is not visible at the keypad.

Speed Loop PI with Current Demand Isolate – The speed loop output is still valid (active) with the I DMD. Isolate parameter

enabled.

1. The speed loop is reset by unquenching the speed loop/current loop.

2. I DMD. ISOLATE is overridden by Program Stop (B8) or Normal Stop (C3).

3. The speed loop PI holds the integral term as soon as the PI output reaches current limit. This is true even in Current

Demand Isolate mode where it may interfere depending on the way the speed PI is used. At the present time. this feature

cannot be suppressed.

105% Speed Demands – The speed demand clamping allows the speed setpoint to reach 105%. This applies only to the

final summing junction immediately before the speed loop and also to the Setpoint Sum 1 output. Individual speed setpoints

are still clamped to 100%.

6-40 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Speed Loop Continued

Advanced

This function block is shown in Speed Loop

Adaption Adjusts speed loop gain scheduling.

Zero SPD Quench Similar to Standstill logic (i.e. keeps the contactor in but motor current drops to zero) except

the speed loop stays enabled and will cause the current loop to unquench very quickly.

SETUP PARAMETERS

SPEED LOOP

SETUP PARAMETERS

SPEED LOOP

ADVANCED

ADAPTION

ADVANCED

I Gain in Ramp

POS Loop P Gain

Mode

Speed BRK1 (Low)

Speed BRK2 (High)

PROP Gain

SETUP PARAMETERS

SPEED LOOP

SPD INT Time

ADVANCED

ZERO SPD QUENCH

Zero SPD Level

Zero IAD Level

Parameter Descriptions

Mode

Range: 0 to 3

0 – Disabled

1 – Speed Feedback Dependent

2 – Speed Error Dependent

3 – Current Demand Dependent

SPD BRK 1 (Low)

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

If Mode = 1 Then BRK–points correspond to speed feedback.

If Mode = 2 Then BRK–points correspond to speed error.

If Mode = 3 Then BRK–points correspond to current demand.

SPD BRK 2 (High)

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

Range: 0.00 to 200.00

Above SPD BRK 2 (HIGH) the normal gains (as per main menu above) prevail. Between the two

breakpoints, a linear variation of the gains is implemented.

PROP. Gain

Prop gain used below SPD BRK 1 (LOW)

SPD INT Time

Integral time constant used below SPD BRK 1 (LOW)

Range: 0.001 to 30.000

Seconds

I Gain IN Ramp

Range: 0.0000 to 2.0000

While the Ramping flag (Tag [113]) is true the integral gain is scaled by I GAIN IN RAMP. This can

be used to help prevent integral windup while the drive is ramping (particularly with high inertia

loads).

POS. LOOP P GAIN

Range: –200.00 to 200.00 %

Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %

Reserved parameter.

Zero SPD. Level

Sets the threshold of speed feedback below which Zero Speed Quench is active.

Zero IAD Level

Sets the threshold of current feedback below which Zero Speed Quench is active.

MN792

Programming 6-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Standstill

Standstill logic is used to inhibit rotation during Zero Speed demand. If the drive is below the zero speed

threshold [12] and Standstill Logic [11] is enabled, the speed and current loops are quenched to prevent shaft

oscillation around zero speed. Standstill Logic is useful in maintaining absolute zero speed but can cause

problems in web handling applications using tension feedback. At zero speed, the SCR’s turn off allowing web

tension to pull the driven roll in reverse. When the drive no longer senses zero speed, the SCR’s turn on

causing forward rotation and regulate tension. An oscillation condition can result as the drive SCR’s turn on and

off trying to maintain a fixed position. A “not at standstill” signal is sent to the drive enable logic.

When Speed Feedback is less than Zero Threshold, the At Zero Speed output is On. At Zero Setpoint is on

when Speed Setpoint is less than Zero Threshold. When both At Zero Speed and At Zero Setpoint are on, At

Standstill is on to indicate the motor has stopped.

When Standstill Logic is enabled, the SCR firing circuits are disabled, the main contactor remains energized and

the Run Led stays on when the drive is at standstill. The drive remains in this state until standstill drops out (the

speed setpoint or speed feedback increase above the zero threshold value).

SETUP PARAMETERS

STANDSTILL

Standstill

Tag# Parameter

[306] Source Tag

Factory Setting

Diagnostic

Connection

Standstill Logic

Zero Threshold

Source Tag

Speed Feedback

from [62] Speed Loop

At Zero Speed

At Zero Setpoint

At Standstill

[77]

[78]

[79]

97 Digital Output 1 (B5)

Speed Setpoint

from [63] Speed Loop

[12] Zero Threshold

[11] Standstill Logic

2.00%

Disabled

Not At Standstill"

To Enable circuit

Parameter Descriptions

AT Zero Setpoint (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

At zero speed demand.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

AT Zero Speed (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

At zero speed feedback.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

AT Standstill (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

At zero speed and zero setpoint.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Source Tag (Zero Setpoint)

Reserved parameter.

Range: 0 to 549

Standstill Logic

Range: 0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

If true, the control is quenched (although the contactor remains in) when the speed feedback and

speed setpoint values are less than zero threshold.

Zero Threshold

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

Threshold level which defines zero setpoint and zero speed diagnostic outputs and also controls the

zero speed relay output.

Functional Description

Standstill logic inhibits the controller at zero setpoint and zero speed, i.e. at standstill. The main contactor

remains in and the Run LED remains on.

Enabled

Disabled

Standstill Logic 0%

Speed Feedback

Speed Setpoint

Curve depends on load characteristics

Speed Feedback

Drive Enable

Zero Treshold

-2%

Enabled

Disabled

6-42 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Stop Rates

Sets the stop method parameters for the control. A normal stop occurs when the Run signal is removed from

terminal C3. It ramps the speed demand to zero at a rate set by Stop Time. Series 29 Non–regenerative drives

will stop no faster than the coast stop rate. Series 30 Regenerative drives use Stop Time to set the duration of

the stop. After the stop, the contactor de–energizes and the drive disables. The Stop Limit timer starts when C3

goes to zero volts. If the drive speed has not reached Stop Zero Speed within the Stop Limit time, the contactor

de–energizes and the drive disables.

During normal stops, Contactor Delay delays de–energizing the contactor after the motor reaches zero speed.

When Stop Zero Speed is set greater than 0.25%, the drive disables during the contactor delay. Below 0.25%,

the drive disables after the contactor delay. This is useful when using the jog function to prevent multiple

operations of the contactor. Contactor Delay is overridden when terminal C4 is at zero volts.

Program Stop provides a controlled fast stop using regenerative drives. The stop time is set by Program Stop

Time. The timer starts when terminal B8 goes to zero volts. When the drive reaches Stop Zero Speed, the

contactor de–energizes and the drive disables. Program Stop Limit sets the maximum time the program stop

can take before the contactor de–energizes and the drive disables.

Prog Stop I Lim sets the current limit (current loop) during a program stop. Other current limits can override it.

SETUP PARAMETERS

STOP RATES

Stop Rates

Tag# Parameter

[91] PROG Stop I Limit

Factory Setting

100.00%

PROG Stop I Limit

To Current Loop

Speed Setpoint

from [62] Speed Loop

Stop Time

Stop Limit

Speed

[89]

[27] Stop Time

[26] PROG Stop Time

10.0 Sec

0.1 Sec

Demand

Contactor Delay

PROG Stop Time

PROG Stop Limit

PROG Stop I LIM

Stop Zero Speed

[217] Stop Limit

[216] PROG Stop Limit

60.0 Sec

To Coast

Stop Logic

Drive

Start

[82]

[29] Stop Zero Speed

[302] Contactor Delay

2.00%

Speed Feedback

from [63] Speed Loop

1.0 Sec

Program

Stop

Program Stop is true when terminal

B8 is Low (Status LED Off).

Parameter Descriptions

Speed Demand (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

Range: xxx.xx %

Speed loop total setpoint after the ramp–to–zero block.

Program Stop (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)

State of Program Stop (Terminal B8). When B8 is at 24V, then Program Stop is false and the

Program Stop front panel LED is also on.

Range: 0 : False

1 : True

Stop Time

Range: 0.1 to 600.0

Seconds

Time to reach zero speed from 100% set speed in normal stop mode (C3 Off).

Stop Limit

Range: 0.0 to 600.0

Seconds

Delay time limit to allow normal stop action (regenerative breaking) to achieve zero speed before

drive quench and coast stop. The timer is triggered by Start command (C3) going low.

Contactor Delay

Range: 0.1 to 600.0

Seconds

This defines the time between the drive reaching Stop Zero Speed (Tag [29]) and the contactor

being opened. This is particularly useful during the jog cycle to prevent multiple operations of the

main contactor.

If Stop Zero Speed is ≥ 0.25%, the drive will be quenched during the contactor delay time. The

Contactor delay is overridden by Enable (C4).

Maintain zero speed during contactor delay.

If Stop Zero Speed is < 0.25%, the drive is not quenched until after the Contactor Delay time.

PROG Stop Time

Range: 0.1 to 600.0

Seconds

Time to reach zero speed from 100% set speed in program stop mode (B8 OFF).

PROG Stop Limit

Range: 0.0 to 600.0

Seconds

Delay time limit to allow program stop action (regenerative breaking) to achieve zero speed before

drive quench and coast stop. The timer is triggered by program stop command (B8) going low.

PROG Stop I LIM

Range:

Main current limit level in program stop mode assuming current limit not overridden by I Profile or

Inverse Time limits.

Stop Zero Speed

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

Zero speed level in program stop and normal stop modes at which the contactor delay timer starts

timing out. At the end of this delay the contactor is de–energized.

MN792

Programming 6-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Stop Rates Continued

Functional Description

Stop Hierarchy

Coast Stop – Terminal B9

Disables the drive and opens the contactor using the pilot output

Enable – Terminal C4

•

Suspends and resets the control loops

Program Stop – Terminal B8

•

Independent ramp time

Stop Timer

Independent current limit may be greater than normal current limit

Independent zero speed

Normal Run/Stop – Terminal C3

•

Independent ramp time

Contactor Delay

Note: The Control’s reaction to commands is defined by a state machine. This determines which commands

provide the demanded action, and in which sequence. Consequently, Coast Stop and Program Stop

must be false (the Control is not in Coast or Program mode), before a Run signal is applied. Otherwise

the control assumes a stop mode and remains disabled.

Normal Stop Sequence

Stop Zero Speed settings less than 0.25% allow the control to remain enabled for the Contactor Delay Time

after reaching Stop Zero Speed. This is useful for Jog applications.

100

Start / Run (C3)

Speed Setpoint %

Speed Demand %

Speed Feedback %

Drive Enable

100

Stop Time

10.0 Seconds

100

Actual stop rate depends on load inertia, motor horse power and

overload capacity of drive (motor + control)

Stop Zero Speed 2.00%

Control is disabled below

Stop Zero Speed if set>0.25%

Control remains enabled for the Contactor Delay if

Stop Zero Speed <0.25%

Enabled

Disabled

6-44 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Stop Rates Continued

Time Out During a Normal Stop

When a normal stop takes longer than the Stop Limit time, the control disables and the contactor is

de–energized.

100

Start / Run (C3)

Speed Setpoint %

Speed Demand %

Speed Feedback %

Drive Enable

100

Stop Time

10.0 Seconds

100

Stop Zero Speed 2.00%

Contactor drops out if Speed Feedback > Stop Zero Speed

when Stop Limit times out.

Enabled

Disabled

Run LED and

Contactor LED

Off

MN792

Programming 6-45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Stop Rates Continued

Normal Program Stop Sequence

Program Stop is a latched operation. When a Program Stop command is received (B8 goes to zero volts), the

stop continues even if 24 volts is restored at terminal B8.

100

LED On (Program Stop = False)

Program

Stop

LED Off

Speed Setpoint %

Speed Demand %

Speed Feedback %

Drive Enable

100

PROG Stop Time

0.10 Seconds

Current Limit is set by PROG Stop I Limit [91].

Actual stop rate depends on load inertia, motor horse power and

overload capacity of drive (motor + control)

100

Stop Zero Speed 2.00%

Enabled

Disabled

Run LED and

Contactor LED

Off

6-46 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Stop Rates Continued

Time Out During a Normal Program Stop

The time out operation is the same for both a normal stop and a program stop.

100

LED On (Program Stop = False)

Program

Stop

LED Off

Speed Setpoint %

Speed Demand %

Speed Feedback %

Drive Enable

100

PROG Stop Time

0.10 Seconds

100

Stop Zero Speed 2.00%

Contactor drops out if Speed Feedback > Stop Zero Speed

when PROG Stop Limit times out.

Enabled

Disabled

Run LED and

Contactor LED

Off

MN792

Programming 6-47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Port P3 The System Port (P3) is a non–isolated RS232 serial communications port. The port is used off–line (while the

drive is stopped) for transferring and saving drive configuration files using a personal computer (PC) running a

serial communications program, or online (while running) with the Peer–to–Peer Communications control. You

can also use the P3 port to transfer configuration files with a PC running Workbench D software.

Three menus are used to configure the serial port.

System Port P3 This menu sets parameters for transferring data to and from a PC.

P3 Setup This menu sets communication parameters for System Port P3.

BISYNCH SUPPORT This menu sets parameters to support the BISYNCH protocol.

5703 SUPPORT Sets parameters for the optional 5703 board (see 5703 Support).

SERIAL LINKS

P3 Setup

Tag# Parameter

SYSTEM PORT P3

Factory Setting

Dump MMI (TX)

UDP XFER (RX)

UDP XFER (TX)

Version No.

130 Mode

198 P3 Baud Rate

Disabled

9600

P3 SETUP

BISYNC SUPPORT)

5703 Support

Setpoint 4

[41]

Group ID (GID)

Unit ID (UID)

Error Report

P3 Port

SERIAL LINKS

132 Setpoint Ratio

187 Raw Input

133 Setpoint Sign

189 Scaled Input

0.0000

0.00%

Positive

R/O

RS232

SYSTEM PORT P3

P3 SETUP

Mode

5703 Support

P3 Baud Rate

Bisynch Support

329 Group ID (GID)

330 Init ID (UID)

332 Error Report

0x0000

0x00C0

Parameter Descriptions

Range: 0 to 3

Range: 9600

MODE Four options are available:

0 : Disabled

1 : 5703 Master

2 : 5703 Slave

3 : CELite (EIASCII)

P3 BAUD RATE Four options are available:

Only works at 9600

Setpoint Ratio

Input scaling ratio for [187].

Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000

Raw Input

Range: xxx.xx%

Value written to the control from the P3 port (input data).

Setpoint Sign

Invert/non–invert of Raw input [187]

Range: 0:Negative

1:Positive

Scaled Input

Range: xxx.xx%

Value written by the control to the P3 port (output data).

GROUP ID

Range: 0x0000 to 0x0007

Range: 0x0000 to 0x000F

Range: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF

The Baldor protocol group identity address.

UNIT ID

The Baldor protocol unit identity address.

ERROR REPORT

Displays the last error as a hexadecimal code. Writing any value to this parameter will set the value

to >00C0 (No Error). Refer to Section 8 “Serial Communications” – Reference for a list of codes.

6-48 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Port P3 Continued

Communication Port Setup

For UDP data and text file transfers, set the host computer communication port settings as follows:

9600 Baud 8 bits

1 Stop bit

XON/XOFF handshaking

NO parity UDP transfer procedure

Note: Set the P3 Baud Rate to match the PC’s COM port baud rate (9600 is recommended).

DB9 Pin No.

Female

DB25 Pin No.

P3 Port Connector

P3 Pin No.

Signal Name

Male

Female

Male

0VDC

24VDC

T_x

No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection

1 2 3 4

R_x

Download (DUMP File From P3)

This procedure is used to collect information that fully documents all the control’s settings in an ASCII text file.

You can print the file or store it for future use (troubleshooting etc.).

Note: This procedure transfers the drive’s current settings (in memory), not the settings stored in EEPROM.

Connect one end of the P3 cable to the P3 port and the other end to the PC’s COM port.

Ensure that the drive’s P3 Mode is set to Disable.

Save the parameter settings using Parameter Save to ensure the present settings will be read.

Using a standard communications package, prepare the host computer to receive an ASCII file. Use

a file extension like .MMI to differentiate it from .UDP format files.

Enable the host computer to begin receiving data.

Start the text download by selecting “DUMP MMI–> P3”. The file transfer begins and will appear

similar to the following:

DIGITAL DC DRIVE

ISSUE: 5.13

..DC 4Q 35A

....MENU LEVEL

......DIAGNOSTICS

........SPEED DEMAND [89 ] = 0.00 %

........SPEED FEEDBACK [207 ] = 0.01 %

........SPEED ERROR [297 ] = –0.01 %

........SPEED LOOP O/P [549 ] = 0.00 %

........CURRENT DEMAND [299 ] = 0.00 %

........CURRENT FEEDBACK [298 ] = 0.00 %

etc.

Note: Enabling the transmitting port in a serial communications setup initiates data transfer. Therefore, enable

the receiving port the host computer before beginning communication at the drive’s P3 port.

The file ends with the CTRL–Z character. This character automatically closes the file in some serial

communications software packages. If not, close the file manually when it has finished transferring

data and when the host computer has stopped scrolling text.

Save the file to disk.

UDP (UPLOAD–DOWNLOAD PROTOCOL) SUPPORT

Use the P3 port to transfer ASCII files containing the drive’s configuration and parameter settings between the

590 Digital drive and a host computer. The transfer uses a simple ASCII file structure and XON / XOFF

protocol. Most communications packages use this protocol. A PC Pentium running Windowsꢄ is required.

Transferring data from the control to a host computer is defined as downloading; transferring data from a host

computer to the control is an upload.

MN792

Programming 6-49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Port P3 Continued

UDP Download (UDP XFER From P3)

A UDP download transfers the actual parameter and configuration settings from the control to a host computer.

This file fully transfers all settings stored in EEPROM in a binary format and can be used as a back up file if the

current drive settings are lost or if the drive is replaced.

Note: A UDP download transfers settings stored in EEPROM since the last Parameter Save was performed.

Any parameter or configuration changes not saved to the EEPROM are not recorded within the UDP file.

Connect one end of the P3 cable to the P3 port and the other end to the PC’s COM port.

Ensure that the drive’s P3 Mode is set to Disable.

Save the parameter settings using Parameter Save to ensure that the drive’s EEPROM parameters

matches the drive’s current parameter settings.

Using a standard communications package, prepare the host computer to receive an ASCII file. Use

a file extension like .MMI to differentiate it from .UDP format files.

Enable the host computer to begin receiving data.

Start the UDP download from the control by selecting “UDP XFER–> P3”.

Note: Enabling the transmitting port in a serial communications setup initiates data transfer. Therefore, enable

the receiving port the host computer before beginning communication at the drive’s P3 port.

The file ends with the CTRL–Z character. This character automatically closes the file in some serial

communications software packages. If not, close the file manually when the PC has stopped scrolling

text. The last line of the file should read :00000001FF.

UDP Upload (UDP XFER To P3)

A UDP Upload transfers a parameter file from the PC to the control memory. This information is written directly

to EEPROM, so all the drive’s current settings will be overwritten.

Connect one end of the P3 cable to the P3 port and the other end to the PC’s COM port.

Ensure that the drive’s P3 Mode is set to disable.

Using a standard communications package, prepare the host computer to send an ASCII file. Set the

host computer’s communications port parameters to the settings listed above. Be sure the baud rate

and other COM settings at both ends of the serial communications match.

Start the upload by selecting “UDP XFER <– P3”.

When the keypad displays “RECEIVING”, begin the file transmission at the host computer.

The file ends in a :00000001FF which tells the control to close the file.

Reset the control by pressing the “E” key.

6-50 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5703 Support The 5703 peer–to–peer communication option is not available.

SERIAL LINKS

SYSTEM

5703

Destination Tag [135]

Scaled Input [189]

SYSTEM PORT P3

CONFIGURE I/O

Raw Input [187] 0.00%

89 [134] Source Tag

0.0000 [131] SETPT Ratio

Positive [132] SETPT Sign

P3 SETUP

CONFIGURE 5703

Source Tag

Destination Tag

5703 SUPPORT

SETPT Ratio

SETPT Sign

Raw Input

Scaled Input

Parameter Descriptions

Scaled Input

Range: xxx.xx %

Range: 0 to 549

Scaled input.

Raw Input

Raw input.

Source Tag

The source tag of the value to be sent to the 5703.

SETPT. Ratio

Input scaler.

Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000

SETPT. Sign

Input sign.

Range: 0 : Negative

1 : Positive

Destination Tag

Range: 0 to 549

(Keypad only) The destination tag of the value received from the 5703.

MN792

Programming 6-51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TEC Option

The Technology Option function block sets the inputs and outputs of the communications board options if

installed. If a communications board is installed, refer to its manual for additional information.

SERIAL LINKS

TEC OPTION

TEC Option

None [500] Type

None

0x0000

Fault [506]

Version [507]

Output 1 [508]

Output 2 [509]

[501] Input 1

[502] Input 2

[503] Input 3

[504] Input 4

[505] Input 5

TEC Option Type

TEC Option IN1

TEC Option IN2

TEC Option IN3

TEC Option IN4

TEC Option IN5

TEC Option Fault

TEC Option VER

TEC Option OUT1

TEC Option OUT2

Parameter Descriptions

FAULT (TEC Option Fault)

The fault state of the Technology Option

0 : None – no faults

Range: 0 to 6

1 : Parameter – parameter out–of–range

2 : Type Mismatch – TYPE parameter mismatch

3 : Self Test – hardware fault – internal

4 : Hardware – hardware fault – external

5 : Missing – no option fitted

6 : Version Number – older than Version 2.x (TEC option is using software

that doesn’t fully support the drive.

VERSION (TEC Option)

Range: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF

Range: xxxxx

The software version of the TEC Option. No option installed = zero.

OUTPUT 1 and 2 (TEC Option Out 1 to TEC Option Out 2)

The use of these output parameters depends upon the type of Technology Option installed. Refer to

its manual for additional information.

TYPE (TEC Option Type)

sets the type of Technology Option.

0 : None

Range: 0 to 7

1 : RS485

2 : Profibus DP

3 : Link

4 : Device Net

5 : Can Open

6 : Lonworks

7 : Type 7

Input 1 To Input 5 (TEC Option In 1 to TEC Option In 5)

The use of these input parameters depends upon the type of Technology Option installed. Refer to

its manual for additional information.

Range: –32768 to 32767

6-52 Programming

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 7

Keypad Operation

Keypad

The keypad allows full use of the Control’s features. The keypad provides “Local” motor control, status

monitoring, and complete access for application programming. The display, LEDs and keys are shown in Figure

7-1. The Keypad Display displays the status information during local or remote operation.

Figure 7-1 Keypad

Indicator Lights

(Also see Tables 7-1, 7-2, 7-3)

BALDOR DC DRIVE

DC 4Q 15A

16 x 2 line Keypad Display

Indicates general health status.

SEQ REF

SEQ indicates Start/Stop status.

REF indicates Speed Control status.

PROG

FWD REV

Indicates direction of rotation.

Local Control Keys

JOG

RUN

Indicates Local or Remote mode of

Start/Stop and Speed Control.

STOP

Programming Keys

Local Control Keys

Navigation - Moves upward through the list of parameters.

Parameter - Increments the value of the displayed parameter.

Control - In Local mode this key runs the motor at the Local

Setpoint speed.

Command Acknowledge - Confirms action in a command menu.

Local Mode - Increases motor speed.

Trip Reset - Resets a trip then runs the motor at the Local

Setpoint speed. Only operates in the Local mode.

Navigation - Moves downward through the list of parameters.

Parameter - Decrements the value of the displayed parameter.

Local Mode - Decreases motor speed.

Control - In Local mode this key changes the direction of motor

rotation. In Jog mode, it selects between two jog speeds. Only

operates in the Local mode.

Navigation - Displays the previous level's Menu.

Parameter - Returns to the parameter list.

Trip Acknowledge - Acknowledges Trip or Error message.

Control - In Local mode this key runs the motor at the Jog

Speed 1 parameter value. When the key is released, the

control stops the motor. This key only operates when the

control is stopped and in the Local mode. Only operates in the

Local mode.

JOG

Navigation - Displays the next Menu level, or the first parameter

of the current Menu.

Parameter - Press M" when a parameter is displayed to see the

parameter's Tag No. Repeated pressing at a writable parameter to

control cursor movement.

Control - In Local mode this key stops the motor if motor is

operating.

Trip Reset - If the control is tripped and the trip is no longer

active, this key resets the trip conditions and clears the

displayed message. Only operates in the Local mode.

Navigation - When in Local mode, displays the previous menu

while remaining in Local mode enabling changes to be made to

parameters not available in Local menu. Only operates in the

Local mode.

PROG

Control - Changes between Local and Remote modes for both

Start/Stop (Seq) and Speed Control (Ref). The keypad display

will display the correct Setpoint" screen and if in the Local

mode, the ꢀ " and ꢁ " keys are used to change the setpoint.

MN792

Keypad Operation 7-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Keypad LED Status

Seven LEDs indicate the status of the Control. Each LED (Figure 7-1) can operate in three different ways:

Off

Blink

, and

Table 7-1 Control Status

Run

Stop

Control Status

Re–Configuration

Tripped

Stopped

Stopping

Running with Zero Reference

Running

Autotuning

Table 7-2 Forward Reverse Status

Forward/Reverse Status

Commanded direction and actual direction are Forward.

Commanded direction and actual direction are Reverse (Series 30 only).

Commanded direction is Forward but actual direction is Reverse (Series 30 only).

Commanded direction is Reverse but actual direction is Forward.

FWD

SEQ

REV

REF

Table 7-3 Local and Remote Status

Local/Remote Status

Start/Stop (Seq) and Speed Control (Ref) are controlled from the terminals (Remote).

Start/Stop (Seq) and Speed Control (Ref) are controlled from the keypad (Local).

Alarm Messages Operational failures called “Faults” or “Trips” are displayed at the keypad when they occur. They are also stored

in memory and can be accessed for viewing. When a fault occurs, the control will “Trip” which means the motor

stops and the control is disabled until it is reset. Press the “E” key to acknowledge the trip condition without

resetting the fault. After the fault condition has been cleared press the Reset button to reset the control to

restore operation. Refer to the Troubleshooting Section of this manual for additional information.

7-2 Keypad Operation

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Local Menu

key (Figure 7-2)

Pressing the L/R key from anywhere in the Menu System activates the Local menu. The Local menu provides

setpoint information for local operation. Pressing and holding the M key in the Local menu will display additional

Feedback information. A display of forward or reverse feedback or reference whichever was previously

selected by the FWD/REV key. Pressing the “M” key changes between feedback and reference.

Figure 7-2 Local Menu

Local

Control Control

Mode Mode

Remote

Menu System

Local Menu

operates from Local mode only

FORWARD

menu/parameter

PROG

REF:

0.00%

HOLD

L/R

FORWARD

FBK.

0.00%

FWD/REV key

REVERSE

REF:

0.00%

HOLD

REVERSE

FBK:

0.00%

L/R Key

The L/R key (Local/Remote) only operates when the motor is stopped. It changes between Local and Remote

modes. A Local menu is displayed in the Local mode, and a main programming menu is displayed in the

Remote mode.

In Local, the Local LEDs, SEQ and REF, are illuminated and the RUN, STOP, JOG, ꢅ, ꢆ, ꢀ and ꢁ keys are

used to control the motor direction and speed. Pressing the L/R key in Local mode selects Remote mode and

returns to the previous menu.

PROG Key

The PROG key only operates in Local mode. It changes between the Local menu and the main Menu System

but the control remains in Local mode. This allows you to change parameters normally available in Remote

mode but remain in Local mode operation.

MN792

Keypad Operation 7-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu System

The menu system is divided into nine major selections, shown in Table 7-4. Each selection has a structure of

menus (Figure 7-3). At the keypad, press “M” to access the menus. Then press the ꢀ or ꢁ key to scroll

through the menus.

Table 7-4 The Keypad Display of the Main Menus

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Apply Power

FORWARD

REF:

0.00%

Press “PROG” key

BALDOR DC DRIVE

DC 4Q 15A

Press “M” key 2 times

Access the menus.

DC 4Q 15A

MENU LEVEL

Press

ꢁ

Scroll to next menu.

Press “M” key to access Diagnostic

MENU LEVEL

DIAGNOSTICS

menus.

Press “M” key to access Setup

Parameters menus.

MENU LEVEL

SETUP PARAMETERS

Press “M” key to access Password

menus.

MENU LEVEL

PASSWORD

Press “M” key to access Alarm

Status menus.

MENU LEVEL

ALARM STATUS

Press “M” key to access Menus.

MENU LEVEL

MENUS

MENU LEVEL

PARAMETER SAVE

Press “M” key to access Serial

Links menus.

MENU LEVEL

SERIAL LINKS

Press “M” key to access System

menus.

MENU LEVEL

SYSTEM

Press “M” key to access Configure

Drive menus.

MENU LEVEL

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Menu Navigation

Remember, press “E” to return to the previous level of menus. Press “M” to enter the next level of menus.

Press the ꢀ or ꢁ key to go to the previous or next menu item at the same level.

7-4 Keypad Operation

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figure 7-3 The Menu Map

Menu Levels

Ramps

Setup

Diagnostics

AUX I/O

Local Ramp

OP Station

Jog / Slack

Raise / Lower

Special Blocks

Startup Values

Setup Parameters

PID

Password

Alarm Status

Menus

Field Control

Current Profile

Stop Rates

FLD Voltage VARS

FLS Current VARS

FLD Weak VARS

Calibration

Inhibit Alarms

Current Loop

Speed Loop

Standstill

Advanced

Setpoints

Adaption

Zero SPD Quench

Setpoint Sum 1

5703 Support

TEC Option

Serial Links

P3 Setup

Bisynch Support

System Port (P3)

ANIN1 (A2)

ANIN2 (A3)

ANIN3 (A4)

ANIN4 (A5)

ANIN5 (A6)

Configure Enable

Analog Inputs

System

Software

Configure I/O

Peek

Parameter Save

Analog Outputs

Digital Inputs

ANOUT1 (A7)

ANOUT2 (A8)

ANOUT3 (A9)

Armature Current is

not displayed in menu

Configure Drive

Digital Input (C4)

Digital Input (C5)

DIGIN1 (C6)

DIGIN2 (C7)

DIGIN3 (C8)

Digital Outputs

Configure 5703

Block Diagram

DIGOUT1 (B5)

DIGOUT2 (B6)

DIGOUT3 (B7)

Full & Reduced Views

Full View Only

Internal Links

Link 1

Link 10

MN792

Keypad Operation 7-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Shortcuts and Special Key Combinations

Quick Tag Information

In any menu system, when a parameter is displayed hold down the “M” key for approximately ¹/₂second to

display the tag number for that parameter. In section 3, the example was given as shown in Figure 7-4. Each

parameter has a tag number associated with it. For example, the Output of Analog Input 1 has a tag number of

[246]. The value of tag [246] is 100. Input 1 parameter of Setpoint Sum 1 has a tag number of [100].

Figure 7-4 Menu Map

Setpoint Sum 1

Analog Input 1

Output [246]

1.0000 [230] Calibration

[231] MAX Value

[232] MIN Value

1.0000 [6] Ratio 1

1.0000 [208] Ratio 0

Positive [8] Sign 1

Positive [292] Sign 0

1.0000 [419] Divider 1

SPT Sum [86]

100

ANIN 1 (A2) [50]

0.00V

[420] Divider 0

1.0000

0.00% [131] Deadband

105.00% [375] Limit

0.00% [423] Input 2

[100] Input 1

0.00% [309] Input 0

Restore Factory Settings (2 Button Reset)

Power–up the drive holding two keys as described in Figure 7-5. The drive is now safely configured with the

factory settings described later in this manual (for the existing product code).

The factory settings are not automatically saved to non–volatile memory, so you must perform a Parameter

Save to save the settings.

Figure 7-5 2 Button Reset

With power off, press and hold the UP

and DOWN arrow keys.

Apply power to the control and continue

to hold both keys for at least 2 seconds.

INITIALIZING

FACTORY DEFAULTS

BALDOR DC DRIVE

DC 2Q 15A

7-6 Keypad Operation

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 button reset (Changing the Power Base). This is only necessary if you are installing a new control board on an existing

power base. Power–up the drive holding three keys as described in Figure 7-6.

It is important that the control be configured for the correct power rating damage may occur to the drive when it

attempts to run the motor.

Continue to select the correct product code rating. Perform a parameter save now (refer to Save Settings).

Figure 7-6 3 Button Reset

HOLD

PROG

Hold down these three keys:

Power–up the drive, continue to

hold the keys for 2 seconds.

M TO SET PCODE

E TO SAVE PCODE

PRODUCT CODE

Choices are:

Product Code (pick list)

Zero Cal Inputs (up to action)

Platform (STD/Elev)

250% i–limit (true/false)

PRODUCT CODE

DC 4Q 15A

PRODUCT CODE

DC 2Q 15A

E TO SAVE PCODE

PRODUCT CODE

M TO SET PCODE

E TO SAVE PCODE

BALDOR DC DRIVE

DC 2Q 15A

This is the preferred way of selecting a new product code. The available product codes are restricted to the set

of codes that match the power base.

If the product code is changed during the 3–button reset, the following parameters are set to their factory value

for the new product code:

Tag [523]

Tag [524]

Tag [201]

ARMATURE CURRENT

FIELD CURRENT

REGEN MODE

The 3–button reset does not cause the factory configuration to be loaded.

MN792

Keypad Operation 7-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation Examples

Select a Menu View Level Two view levels are available: Full view or Reduced view. These were illustrated in Figure 7-3.

Full view shows all menu choices. Reduced view only shows a portion of the menu items.

MENUS

FULL MENUS

LANGUAGE

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Apply Power

Keypad Display shows this opening

message.

This message is different for each

control.

FORWARD

REF:

0.00%

Press “PROG then

press “M” 2 times

Access the menus.

MENU LEVEL

DIAGNOSTICS

Press

ꢁ

Scroll to “MENUS” menu.

Access the “MENUS” menus choices.

MENU LEVEL

MENUS

Press “M” key

MENUS

FULL MENUS

Access the “FULL MENUS” menus

choices.

FULL MENUS

ENABLED

Press

ꢁ

Change to Reduced menus

FULL MENUS

DISABLED

Press “E” key

Exit to the “MENUS” menus choices.

Press “E” several times to return to

the top level.

MENUS

FULL MENUS

Language Selection English is the preset language that is saved in ROM. A second language option is available so that

either can be selected. If s second language is selected, use the Parameter Save feature to store the new

settings.

MENUS

FULL MENUS

LANGUAGE

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Apply Power

Keypad Display shows this opening

message.

This message is different for each

control.

FORWARD

REF:

0.00%

Press “PROG then

press “M” 2 times

Access the menus.

MENU LEVEL

DIAGNOSTICS

Press

Press “M” key

Press

Press “E” key

Press

Press “E” key

ꢁ

Scroll to “MENUS” menu.

MENU LEVEL

MENUS

Access the “MENUS” menus choices.

Scroll to “Language” menu.

MENUS

FULL MENUS

ꢁ

MENUS

LANGUAGE

Exit to the “MENUS” menus choices.

Scroll to the desired language.

Exit to the “MENUS” menus choices.

Press “E” several times to return to

the top level.

LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ꢁ

MENUS

ITALIAN

Press “E” several times to return to

the top level.

MENUS

FULL MENUS

7-8 Keypad Operation

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Password Protection A password prevents unauthorized parameter modification by making all parameters “read–only”. If

you attempt to modify a password protected parameter, it will cause “PASSWORD ??” to be displayed. The

PASSWORD

password protection is activated or deactivated using the ENTER PASSWORD and CHANGE PASSWORD

parameters.

ENTER PASSWORD

CHANGE PASSWORD

Activated: ENTER PASSWORD and CHANGE PASSWORD values are different.

Deactivated:ENTER PASSWORD and CHANGE PASSWORD values are same.

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Apply Power

Keypad Display shows this opening

message.

This message is different for each

control.

FORWARD

REF:

0.00%

Press “PROG then

press “M” 2 times

Access the menus.

MENU LEVEL

DIAGNOSTICS

Press

Press “M” key

Press

ꢁ

Scroll to “PASSWORD” menu.

MENU LEVEL

PASSWORD

Access the “ENTER PASSWORD”

choice.

PASSWORD

ENTER PASSWORD

ꢁ

Scroll to the “CHANGE PASSWORD”

choice.

PASSWORD

CHANGE PASSWORD

Press “M” key

Press ꢀ or ꢁ key

Press “E” key

Access the “CHANGE PASSWORD”

CHANGE PASSWORD

0x0000

choice.

Select the new password.

CHANGE PASSWORD

0x0002

Exit one level

PASSWORD

CHANGE PASSWORD

Press

ꢁ

Scroll to the “ENTER PASSWORD”

choice.

PASSWORD

ENTER PASSWORD

Press “M” key

Press ꢀ or ꢁ key

Press “E” key

Access the “ENTER PASSWORD”

The new password is automatically

displayed.

ENTER PASSWORD

0X0002

choice.

Select the new password.

Enter different password to activate.

ENTER PASSWORD

0x0000

Exit one level

Press “E” several times to return to

the top level.

PASSWORD

ENTER PASSWORD

MN792

Keypad Operation 7-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Deactivate a Password When password protection is activated, you can no longer edit the CHANGE PASSWORD

parameter until you deactivate the password protection (the value is displayed as “ ”). First, enter the current

****

PASSWORD

ENTER PASSWORD

CHANGE PASSWORD

password (e.g. 0x0002) in the ENTER PASSWORD parameter.

Action

Description

Display

Comments

Apply Power

Keypad Display shows this opening

message.

This message is different for each

control.

FORWARD

REF:

0.00%

Press “PROG then

press “M” 2 times

Access the menus.

MENU LEVEL

DIAGNOSTICS

Press

ꢁ

Scroll to “ENTER PASSWORD” menu.

MENU LEVEL

ENTER PASSWORD

Press “M” key

Press ꢀ or ꢁ key

Press “E” key

Access the “ENTER PASSWORD”

PASSWORD

choice.

ENTER PASSWORD

Access the “ENTER PASSWORD”

choice.

ENTER PASSWORD

0X0000

Select the new password.

Enter password.

ENTER PASSWORD

0x0002

Exit one level

Press “E” several times to return to

the top level.

PASSWORD

ENTER PASSWORD

Now use the “Password Protection” procedure to set the Change Password value to “0X0000” to disable

password protection if desired.

Note: Because the ENTER PASSWORD parameter value is always reset to 0x0000 when powering–up the

drive, 0x0000 is the factory setting for the CHANGE PASSWORD parameter, i.e. by default, the two

parameter values are the same and so password protection is disabled.

7-10 Keypad Operation

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save Settings When parameter values have been changed they are not permanent until they are saved. If you turn power off

SYSTEM

then turn power on, the previous settings (stored in memory) will be used. To make your new parameter

settings the power up settings, they must be saved to non–volatile memory. These new values are always used

until this procedure is used to write new values to non–volatile memory.

CONFIGURE I/O

CONFIGURE ENABLE

Note: Always ensure that “Configure I/O = Disabled” before doing a Parameter Save. If “Configure I/O =

Enabled”, the control cannot run the motor.

PARAMETER SAVE

Action

ꢁ

Description

Scroll to “SYSTEM” menu.

Display

Comments

Press

MENU LEVEL

SYSTEM

Press “M” key

Press ꢀ or ꢁ key

Press “E” key

SYSTEM

CONFIGURE I/O

ENABLED

Select Disabled.

CONFIGURE I/O

DISABLED

Exit one level

SYSTEM

CONFIGURE I/O

Exit one level

MENU LEVEL

SYSTEM

Press

Press “M” key

Press

ꢁ

Scroll to “PARAMETER SAVE” menu.

MENU LEVEL

PARAMETER SAVE

UP TO ACTION

ꢀ

Press ꢀ to save parameters.

Parameters are saved. Except the

“Local Setpoint”.

PARAMETER SAVE

REQUESTED

Press “E” key

Exit one level

Press “E” several times to return to

the top level.

MENU LEVEL

PARAMETER SAVE

Note: The Local Setpoint value is not saved as a parameter.

MN792

Keypad Operation 7-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7-12 Keypad Operation

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 8

Troubleshooting

Overview

When a trip occurs, the Control’s power stage is immediately disabled (tripped) causing the motor and load to

coast to a stop. The trip remains until action is taken to reset the fault, even if the original cause of the trip is no

longer present. If a trip condition is detected the following occurs:

The “OK” LED goes off indicating a trip condition has occurred. (Investigate, find and remove the

cause of the trip.)

Terminal B6 (Healthy) goes low (0V).

If a trip condition is detected, the keypad does the following actions.

The OK LED goes out indicating a Trip condition has occurred. The keypad displays the activated

alarm. (Investigate, find and remove the cause of the trip.)

Terminal B6 (Healthy) goes low (0V).

The alarm message(s) can be acknowledged by pressing the E key, however, the unit will not restart

at this point.

Reset a Trip Condition

All trips must be reset before the Control can be enabled. A trip can only be reset after the trip condition is no

longer active. (For example, a trip due to a heatsink over–temperature can not be reset until the temperature is

less than the trip level.)

More than one trip can be active at any time. For example, it is possible for both the Heatsink Trip and the

Overvolts (VA) trips to be active. Alternatively it is possible for the control to trip due to a Field Over I error and

then for the HEATSINK TRIP trip to become active after the control has stopped (this may occur due to the

thermal time constant of the heatsink).

A trip is reset in one of two ways:

Power–up, or remove and re–apply the auxiliary power supply.

Stop and start the control, i.e. remove and re–apply the Start/Run signal (terminal C3 or C4, or the

keypad Stop and Run keys).

Success is indicated when the “OK” LED is on. The keypad display will return to its original display.

Fault Conditions

Problem

Possible Cause

Remedy

Control will not power–up

Fuse blown

Check supply details, replace with correct fuse.

Check Product Code against Model No.

Faulty cabling

Check all connections are correct and secure.

Check cable continuity

Control fuse keeps blowing

Faulty cabling or connections Check for problem and rectify before replacing with correct fuse

wrong

Faulty control

Contact Baldor

Cannot obtain HEALTH state Incorrect or no supply

available

Check supply details

Motor will not run at switch

Motor jammed

Stop the control and clear the jam

Motor runs and stops

Motor becomes jammed

Stop the control and clear the jam

Motor runs at full speed only Reversed tachometer or open Check tachometer connections

circuit tachometer

Open circuit speed reference Check terminal

potentiometer

Serial (P3) Errors This is an output parameter in the System Port (P3) function block, where the parameter value can be read and

reset. The following values are returned if an inquiry (reading information from the control) is performed on this

Read/Write parameter. Writing any value to this parameter will set the value to >00C0. Clearing the last error

value may be useful to see if the error is re–occurring.

Value

Description

>00C0

>01C7

>02C2

>03C2

>04C8

>05C8

>07C7

>07C8

>08C8

No Error

Invalid mnemonic

Checksum (BCC) error

Framing or overrun error

Attempt to read from a write only parameter

Attempt to write to a read only parameter

Invalid message format

Invalid data (encoding error)

Data out of range

MN792

Troubleshooting 8-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Alarm Messages When a trip occurs an alarm message is displayed at the keypad and information about the trip is stored in the

Alarm Status menu. The alarm message and the Last Alarm parameter are displayed. The Health Store and

Health Word parameters display information as hexadecimal values (0 – 9 and A, B, C, D, F shown in Table

8-1), or the sum of the hexadecimal values when more than one alarm is active. Therefore, the value can

represent one or more alarms.

Table 8-1

Decimal number

Display

The Last Alarm, Health Word and Health Store parameters use a four digit hexadecimal value to identify

individual trips. Each trip has a unique number.

Last Alarm

(Tag [528]). This is the last alarm message to have been displayed. To reset the parameter simply press the

(down) key to clear the alarm. Alternatively, you can switch the auxiliary supply off and on, causing No Active

Alarms to be displayed.

ꢁ

Health Word (Tag [115]). This parameter continuously monitors the control status. As alarms are added or removed, the

display immediately updates to show the hexadecimal sum of these alarms.

The value reverts to 0x0000 when the Start (C3) input is raised (+24V), and when no trip condition is present.

Health Store (Tag [116]). Stores the hexadecimal value of the first (or only) alarm to occur causing the trip condition. The

display reverts to 0x0000 when the Start (C3) input is raised (+24V).

Table 8-2

LAST ALARM, HEALTH WORD and HEALTH STORE

Trip Code

Trip

First Digit

Digit

Last Digit

No active alarms

Overspeed

Missing pulse

Field over I

Heatsink trip *

Thermistor

Over volts (VA)

SPD Feedback

Encoder failed

Field failed

3 Phase failed *

Phase lock

5703 RCV Error

Stall trip

Over I trip

Other

ꢃ

ACCTS Failed *

ꢃ

8-2 Troubleshooting

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 8-3

Trip

LAST ALARM only

Autotune error

Autotune aborted

External trip

Remote trip

CONFIG Enabled

No OP–Station

PCB Version

Product code

When more than one trip is to be represented at the same time then the trip codes are simply added together to

form the value displayed. Within each digit, values between 10 and 15 are displayed as letters A to F shown in

Table 8-1.

For example, if the Health Word parameter = 01A8, this represents a “1” in digit 3, an “8” and a “2” in digit 2,

(8+2 = 10, displayed as A) and an 8 in digit 1. This in turn represents the active trips Field Failed, Encoder

Failed, Over Volts (VA) and Heatsink Trip (unlikely).

Power Board LED Trip Information (Frame 4 and 5)

The Heatsink Trip, 3 Phase Failed and ACCTS Failed trips are associated with the following LED indications:

Frame 4

Check the power board LEDs for more Heatsink Trip information. The LEDs are on to indicate a problem.

Trips

field heatsink overtemperature

armature heatsink overtemperature

phase loss

FLD HS OT

ARM HS OT

PHASE LOSS

HEATSINK TRIP

3 PHASE FAILED

Frame 5

The master power board (on the left hand side of the unit) is fitted with a Parallel Expansion Board. This board

has four additional LEDs providing information about the slave power board (on the right hand side of the unit),

and about the general status of the unit.

Master Power Board Slave Power Board

Trips

(indicated by the

Parallel Expansion Board)

field heatsink overtemperature

armature heatsink overtemperature

phase loss

FLD HS OT

HEATSINK TRIP

ARM HS OT

PHASE LOSS

ARM HS OT

PHASE LOSS

PH ROT FLT

CUR IMBALANCE

3 PHASE FAILED

ACCTS FAILED

phase rotation fault

current imbalance

It is essential that the phase sequence applied

to the two stacks are identical otherwise the

converter will trip on 3 PHASE FAILED.

If there is a current imbalance between the

stacks which exceeds 10% the converter will

trip on ACCTS FAILED.

MASTER

SLAVE

MN792

Troubleshooting 8-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manage Trips from the Keypad

Trip Messages Most of the alarms have a delay timer so that the control only trips if the condition persists for the whole of the

delay period. If the control trips, the display immediately shows a message indicating the reason for the trip.

These messages are shown in Table 8-4.

Table 8-4

Possible Cause

Trip Message and Description

Overspeed

Badly adjusted speed loop (alarm only operates with encoder or armature volts

feedback selected)

Alarm time delay : 0.1 seconds

Motor overspeed – the speed feedback signal

has exceeded 125% of rated speed.

Missing Pulse

Firing plug failure

A missing pulse from the 6–pulse armature

current waveform. Trips when the motor loading

exceeds 1.5 times the Discontinuous parameter

value.

Connection failure

Alarm time delay : 60 seconds

Field Over I

Regulator failure

The motor field current has exceeded 120% of

the calibrated value

Badly tuned control loop (alarm only operates with field current control mode

selected)

Alarm time delay : 15 seconds

Heatsink Trip

The ambient air temperature is too high

The control heatsink temperature is too high

Poor ventilation or spacing between controls

Fan failure, check fuse on power board, wrong rotation (models above 70A bridge

rating)

Blocked ventilation slots Clogged air filters

Excessive armature current – nominal armature current on motor nameplate

should be checked against the current calibration for the control. The stack must

be allowed to cool in order to re–start the control.

Alarm time delay : 0.75 seconds

Thermistor

Inadequate ventilation

The motor temperature is too high

Blower failure –check for direction, clogged air filters (models above 70A bridge

rating)

Excessive armature current – check nominal armature current on nameplate

against current calibration)

The motor must be allowed to cool in order to re–start the control.

Alarm time delay : 15 seconds

Over Volts (VA)

Loose armature connection

Motor armature voltage has exceeded 120% of Badly adjusted field voltage setting

rated volts

Badly adjusted field current loop

Badly adjusted field–weakening bemf loop

Badly adjusted speed loop

Alarm time delay : 1.5 seconds

Speed Feedback

Analog tachometer feedback polarity incorrect (terminals G3 and G4)

The ENCODER SIGN parameter’s polarity is incorrect

Tachometer failure

Tachometer coupling failure

Alarm time delay : 0.4 seconds

The difference between speed feedback and

armature voltage feedback is greater than the

SPDFBK ALM Level parameter value

If FLD Weak Enable parameter is enabled,

speed feedback is less than 10% when in the

field weakening region

Encoder Failed

No speed feedback signal

The SPEED FBK SELECT parameter is set to ENCODER but an optional

Encoder board is not installed.

Check cable and connections on wire–ended encoder

Field Fail

Open circuit motor field – check connection and measure field resistance

Faulty operation of field controller

Where an AC supply feeds the onboard field regulator, check connections FL1 &

Field current is less than 6% of rated current

when in Current Control mode

Field current is less than 50mA when in Voltage FL2 for line–to–line voltage (rather than line–to–neutral) – L1 into FL1, L2 into

Control mode (with default current burden of

15K)

FL2. The 3–phase supply must be present for synchronization. For loads where

no field supply is required, e.g. a permanent magnet motor, set the FIELD

ENABLE parameter to disable to suspend this alarm.

Alarm time delay : 0.75 seconds

8-4 Troubleshooting

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 8-4 Continued

Possible Cause

Total failure of supply, or missing phase of 3–phase supply (detected under most

circumstances) – check main AC supply to the control, check high–speed thyristor

protection fuses, check power chassis coding fuses.

Trip Message and Description

3–Phase Failed

3–phase supply failure

Check the main AC voltage of the control (refer to Product Code). This alarm may

not operate properly if the voltage is incorrect, i.e. wrong unit or control.

Phase Lock

Check supply frequency

Supply frequency is outside the frequency band Synchronization errors caused by distorted supply

limits 45 – 65Hz

5703 RCV Error

(Alarm only operates when MODE parameter is set to 5703 SLAVE)

Invalid data received via P3 port from another

control

STALL TRIP

(Alarm only operates when the STALL TRIP parameter is enabled).

With motor stationary (AT ZERO SPEED

parameter shows TRUE), current has exceeded

the STALL THRESHOLD parameter value for

longer than the STALL TRIP DELAY parameter

value

OVER I TRIP

(300% loading not exceeding 15ms or 325% not exceeding 6.6ms is acceptable)

Current feedback value has exceeded 280% of Motor armature windings failure – check insulation resistance

rated current

Badly tuned current loop

Faulty control – Contact Baldor

ACCTS FAILED

Check armature current transformer plug for correct installation.

AC current transformer plug connection to

control power board missing

Frame 5 only : Load imbalance between the two parallel power stacks

The trip prevents the contactor closing and the current loop activating without

armature current feedback – important in the case of external stack controllers

where the thyristor stack is remote from the control board.

AUTOTUNE ERROR

(Alarm only operates during the Autotune sequence).

Speed feedback has exceeded 20% of rated

speed, or field current feedback has exceeded

6% of rated field current

AUTOTUNE ABORT

The Autotune sequence has been aborted.

Coast Stop, Program Stop, Enable or Start Run terminal(s) disabled during

Autotune sequence

The AUTOTUNE parameter reset during the Autotune sequence

Autotune sequence has timed–out (approximately 2 minutes).

REM. SEQUENCE parameter Remote Trip flag set to zero.

The drive was requested to start in Configuration mode.

Calibration fault

REMOTE TRIP

CONFIG INHIBIT

CALIB INHIBIT

COMMS FAULT CODE x

OP STATION (Keypad)

Operator Station faulty

Keypad has been disconnected from control while running in local mode.

These are internal software errors. If these should occur please contact Baldor.

0xF100 ERROR CAM FULL INIT

0xFF02 UNIMPLEMENTED OPCODE

0xFF03 ERROR NMI

0xFF04 ERROR TRAP

0xFF05 ERROR PCB VERSION

0xFF06 ERROR PRODUCT CODE

0xFF07 ERROR HSO FULL

Symbolic Alarm Messages These are generally internal software or hardware errors. If these occur please contact Baldor.

Number

Description

Action

0xF003 Pre–Ready Fault

Coding not present. Replace power board or chassis. (If an external stack,

check coding supply field).

0xF004 Aux Contactor Open

0xF005 External Trip

The internal auxiliary 3–phase contactor failed to close.

Ext Trip (C2) open circuit.

0xF006 Remote Trip

REM. Sequence parameter Remote Trip flag set to zero.

Check Aux. Supply and/or Main AC Input

0xFF03 Aux Power Fail

MN792

Troubleshooting 8-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Self Test Alarms

Self Test Alarm and Meaning

(EEPROM) CHECKSUM FAIL

Possible Reason for Alarm

(The alarm appears at power–up or at the end of “Upload” UDP Transfer)

Parameters not saved, or are corrupted. Corrupted UDP file loaded – press the E key and perform a PARAMETER SAVE. The

control will be returned to its factory default values.

ENABLE CONFIG.

Select Disable for the ENABLE CONFIG. parameter

The ENABLE CONFIG. parameter has

been left in the Enable state.

LANGUAGE CHECKSUM FAIL

(The alarm appears at power–up or at the end of “Upload” UDP Transfer)

Incorrect language selected, or

corrupted

Corrupted UDP file loaded – press the E key and reload the correct language or de–select

the second language.

INIT CAL FAIL

(The alarm appears at power–up)

Self calibration of analog inputs has

exceeded normal tolerance

As a temporary measure, the tolerance can be increased by 0.1% with each press of the

E key, however, this indicates a hardware fault – contact Baldor.

IA FBK CAL FAIL / IA INST CAL FAIL

(The alarm appears at power–up)

The self calibration of the armature

current has failed

If powering the unit off and on does not remove the problem, a hardware failure is

suspected. Contact Baldor.

Setting Trip Conditions The following parameters in the CALIBRATION menu are used to set trip conditions:

Over Speed Level

SPDFBK ALM Level

Stall Threshold

Stall Trip Delay

Remote Trip Delay

Viewing Trip Conditions

The following parameters in the Level 1 ALARM STATUS menu can be viewed to investigate trip conditions:

LAST ALARM

HEALTH WORD

HEALTH STORE

THERMISTOR STATE

SPEED FBK STATE

STALL TRIP

REMOTE TRIP

Inhibiting Alarms

The following alarms can be inhibited in the Setup Parameters::INHIBIT ALARMS menu.

FIELD FAIL

5703 RCV ERROR

STALL TRIP

TRIP RESET

SPEED FBK ALARM

ENCODER ALARM

REM TRIP INHIBIT

Note:

The Stall Trip parameter in the Diagnostics menu is set regardless of the state of Stall Trip inhibit. The flag

is set after the stall time–out expires. The relevant bit (bit 12) in the Health Word and Health Store

parameters is only set when Stall Trip is enabled.

8-6 Troubleshooting

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Test Points

The following test points are located on the control board and can be accessed through the Technology Option

housing. When used with a meter, they will provide valuable information in the event of a fault. Contact Baldor

for more information.

Technology Box

Option

PEEK

Table 8-5

Test

Point

Description

Field current feedback 0.0V = 0% 4.0V =100% (mean voltage),

value of FIELD I FBK diagnostic, Tag No. 300

Armature current feedback ± 1.1V ≡ ±100% (mean current),

value of CURRENT FEEDBACK diagnostic, Tag No. 298

Armature volts feedback ±10V ≡ ±100% calculated VA (mean voltage),

value of TERMINAL VOLTS diagnostic, Tag No. 57

PEEK

PEEK software (factory use only)

Maintenance

Repair

The Baldor control requires very little maintenance, if any, and should provide years of trouble free operation

when installed and applied correctly. Occasional visual inspection and cleaning should be considered to ensure

tight wiring connections and to remove dust, dirt, or foreign debris which can reduce heat dissipation.

Before attempting to service this equipment, all input power must be removed from the control to avoid the

possibility of electrical shock. The servicing of this equipment should be handled by a qualified electrical service

technician experienced in the area of high power electronics. Electrical shock hazards are present inside this

control.

Only qualified personnel should attempt to repair or replace parts. Isolate the control from all sources of

electrical power before service is perfomed.

Save Your Data

The Control retains saved settings during power–down. You can download and upload these settings to a new

or replacement control, if necessary. Data should be copied when the parameters were changed. You may

attempt the back–up of your application data now, refer to “Copying an Application” in Section 7. If successful,

the data can be restored to the new control. This information will be helpful when you contact Baldor for help.

Control Model number,

Voltage rating and

hp rating. These can be obtained from the motor nameplate.

MN792

Troubleshooting 8-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-8 Troubleshooting

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 9

Specifications & Product Data

Identification

Digital DC Control

XXXX –CXX

BC29D7A

Baldor Control

Logic Power (Single Phase)

CO7 Internal Logic Transformer

CO1 Requires 115VAC Logic Power

CO2 Requires 230VAC Logic Power

Series 29 Digital DC

230/460VAC, 3 Phase

Input Voltage

Output Amps

Specifications:

Enclosure:

Open Type (Chassis Mount)

Enclosure rating:

Europe

North America / Canada

IP00 (Frame 1 is IP20)

UL Open type

Enclosure Heat Rise:

(if placed inside a totally enclosed cabinet)

The exposed metal surfaces dissipate approximately 50 Watts / m for a

10 °C temperature rise above the ambient

Horsepower:

5–300 HP, 3 Phase

Voltage Range:

230 VAC Models

460 VAC Models

198-242 VAC 3φ 60 Hz / 50 Hz

414-550 VAC 3φ 60 Hz / 50 Hz

Input Frequency:

Logic Power:

50/60 HZ ± 5%

Built in for size 1 and 2 controls.

External for Size 3, 4 and 5 controls.

115VAC, 1 phase with 3A fast blow fuse.

AC Line Contactor:

Built in for size 1 and 2 controls.

External for Size 3, 4 and 5 controls.

3 Amps maximum at control rated voltage.

Output Voltage:

Output Current:

DC; 0 – 1.2 times input VAC

See Ratings

Output Current Limit:

Adjustable 150% for 30 seconds, 200% for 10 seconds,

250% for 3 seconds

Service Factor:

1.0

Duty:

Continuous

Ambient Operating Temperature:

0 to +45 °C (sizes 1 & 2); 0 to +40 °C (sizes 3, 4 and 5)

Derate Output 2% per °C over rating up to 55 °C Maximum

Rated Storage Temperature:

Humidity:

– 25 °C to +55 °C

10 to 85% RH at 40 °C Non-Condensing

Altitude:

Sea level to 1650 Feet (500 Meters)

Derate 1% per 660 Feet (200 Meters) above 1650 Feet

Maximum altitude 16,500 Feet (5,000 Meters)

Shock:

Vibration:

0.5G at 10Hz to 60Hz

Climatic conditions:

Safety:

Class 3k3, as defined by EN60721–3–3 (1995)

Europe

EN50178 (1998), when installed inside suitable enclosure.

UL508C

Category III (3 phase power), Category II (1 phase Logic power)

Pollution Degree 2

North America / Canada

Overvoltage Category

Pollution Degree

EMC Compliance:

All models

European Directive 89 / 336 / EEC;

EN50082–1 (1992) and EN50082–2 (1995) for immunity

EN50081–2 (1994) Class A conducted emissions

If external filters installed

MN792

Specifications & Product Data 9-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications: Continued

Keypad Display:

Display:

Backlit LCD Alphanumeric

2 Lines x 16 Characters

Keys:

10 key membrane with tactile response

Display Function:

Running

Setting

Trip

Motor RPM, Output current, Voltage (selectable)

Parameter values for setting and viewing

Separate message for each trip, last trip retained in memory

LED Indicators:

SEQ

REF

FWD

REV

Run

Stop

Remote Mount

10 feet (3m) max from control

Control Specifications:

Control Method:

Three phase, full wave, uni-directional DC control with 6 total pulses per cycle

and 6 controlled pulses per cycle. NEMA Type C.

Input Line Impedance:

Speed Feedback Type:

5% Maximum

Armature (Standard)

Encoder (optional, requires expansion board)

Tachometer (optional, requires expansion board. 200V max without resistor)

Pulse Generator

Speed Setting:

±10VDC, 0–10VDC, 0–20mA, 4–20mA, RS232. Digital using keypad.

Optional expansion board: RS485, ProfibusDP or DeviceNet.

Accel / Decel Time:

JOG Speed:

0 - 600 seconds

0 - Maximum speed

Minimum Output Speed:

Maximum Output Speed:

Motor Matching:

0 - 100% Maximum speed

0 - 200% Maximum speed

Automatic tuning to motor with manual override

Field Power Supply:

Type

Voltage

Current

Full wave fixed voltage or current regulated

DC; 0 to 90% of line input voltage

4 Amps (Size 1), 10 Amps (size 2 and 3), 30 Amps (size 4 and 5)

Off or 50%

Field Economy Level

Protective Functions:

Analog Inputs (5):

Control Trip

Fusing

Monitored Alarm conditions (see Alarm Indications)

Standard Input Line, Armature, Field and Control logic, High Energy MOV’s.

LED indicators for trip conditions, 3 assignable logic outputs– 30VDC,

3 ±10VDC analog outputs (2 assignable).

External Output

Full Scale Range

Resolution

Input impedance

Update rate

±10VDC

12 bits + sign

w 10k ohms

10 milli seconds for 60Hz line (3milli seconds for Analog 2)

Analog Outputs (3):

Digital Inputs (5):

Digital Outputs (3):

Full Scale Range

Resolution

0–10VDC @ 5mA

10 bits + sign

Update rate

10 milli seconds for 60Hz line

Rated Voltage

Input impedance

Update rate

10–30VDC

w 4.7k ohms

10 milli seconds for 60Hz line

Maximum Voltage

On Current Sink

On Voltage Drop

30VDC

100 mA maximum

2VDC maximum

Alarm Indications:

Overspeed

Missing pulse

SPD Feedback

5703 RCV Error

Autotune Abort

Field over I

Encoder failed

Stall trip

Heatsink trip

Field failed

Thermistor

3 Phase failed

ACCTS Failed

Over volts (VA)

Phase lock

Over I trip

Autotune Error

Remote Trip

Comms Fault Code

9-2 Specifications & Product Data

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications: Continued

Encoder

Maximum Pulse Rate

Receiver Current

100kHz

10mA per channel

Minimum Differential Input Voltage

Encoder supply

Terminal Wire Size

3.5V

5VDC, 12VDC, 15VDC or 24VDC; 2W maximum

16AWG

Tachometer

Maximum Input Voltage

Switch settings

Terminal Wire Size

200VDC

Selectable in 1VDC increments

16AWG

Terminal Tightening Torque

Torque (by Control Size)

Terminals

40–110A

120 lb–in

(13.5 Nm)

125–165A

Power Connector (L1, L2, L3)

Power Connector (A+, A–)

16 lb–in

(1.8 Nm)

16 lb–in

(1.8 Nm)

97 lb–in

(11 Nm)

204 lb–in

(23 Nm)

204 lb–in

(23 Nm)

120 lb–in

375 lb–in

(13.5 Nm) (42.4 Nm)

97 lb–in

(11 Nm)

Ground Terminals

17 lb–in

(2.0 Nm)

120 lb–in

( 13.5Nm)

60 lb–in

(6.8 Nm)

Power Connector (F+, F–, BL1, BL2, BL3, FL1, FL2)

Power Connector (L, N, 3, 4, TH1, TH2,

Aux Cont–TB4)

7 lb–in (0.8 Nm)

5 lb–in (0.5 Nm)

7 lb–in (0.8 Nm)

5 lb–in (0.5 Nm)

Power Connector (D1–D8, Term+, Therm–)

4 lb–in

(0.45 Nm)

Signal Connectors (A, B, C)

Encoder Expansion Board

Tachometer Expansion Board

5 – 7 lb–in (0.6 – 0.8Nm)

3.5 in–lb (0.4Nm)

5.3 in–lb (0.6Nm)

Ratings

Max. Output

Approx.

Ship Weight

lbs.

Catalog

Number

Input

VAC

Logic

Supply

AC Line

Contactor

Size

Armature

Amps

Peak

Amps

@230VAC @460VAC

BC29D7A35–CO7

BC29D7A70–CO7

BC29D7A110–CO7

BC29D7A165–CO7

BC29D7A243–CO1/CO2

BC29D7A380–CO1/CO2

BC29D7A500–CO1/CO2

BC29D7A725–CO1/CO2

BC29D7A830–CO1/CO2

BC29D7A1580–CO1/CO2

230/460

100

150

200

250

450

100

150

200

300

400

500

900

Internal

External

200

105

165

248

365

570

750

1088

1245

2370

110

165

243

380

500

725

830

1580

Internal

External*

* CO1 requires 115VAC external logic supply.

CO2 requires 230VAC external logic supply.

MN792

Specifications & Product Data 9-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Dimensions

Size 1, 2, 3, 4

Size 5

For safe operation, allow a clearance distance between each control and on all sides of each control.

Dimensions

Size

Amp Rating

15–35

40–165

270

380–500

725–830

1580

14.8 (375)

21.5 (546)

19.7 (500)

27.6 (700)

14.2 (360)

21.0 (530)

15.7 (400)

26.8 (680)

5.5 (140)

4 *

5 *

7.9 (200)

11.8 (297)

10.0 (253)

20.0 (506)

8.7 (220)

5.5 (140)

7.9 (200)

5.9 (150)

11.5 (292)

8.3 (213)

14.2 (358)

The height of Size 4 and 5 controls does not include the external vent kit. The height of the external

vent is 10.39 (264) and approximately 3.9 (99) extends beyond the top of the enclosure.

9-4 Specifications & Product Data

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Dimensions Continued

EMC Filters

EMC Filter Assemblies – 15A through 180A

CO467844U040

CO467844U070

CO467844U110

CO467844U165

CO467844U015

EMC Filter Assemblies – 270A and Larger

20.0

L3'

L2'

8.5

14.5

300.0

15.0

370.0

L1'

4 Places

GND

944.0

984.0

80.0

47.0

Alternate Side Mount

EMC Filter

CO467844U015

CO467844U040

CO467844U070

CO467844U110

CO467844U165

CO467844U180

4.49(114)

7.48(190)

8.82(224)

3.15(80)

9.01(229)

12.28(312)

38.74(984)

8.54(217)

11.73(298)

37.16(944)

2.16(55)

3.66(93)

1.65(42)

3.11(79)

M10

3.66(93)

3.11(79)

3.66(93)

3.11(79)

4.96(126)

14.57(370)

4.41(112)

11.81(300)

MN792

Specifications & Product Data 9-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-6 Specifications & Product Data

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix A

CE Guidelines

CE Declaration of Conformity

Baldor indicates that the products are only components and not ready for immediate or instant use within the

meaning of “Safety law of appliance”, “EMC Law” or “Machine directive”.

The final mode of operation is defined only after installation into the user’s equipment. It is the responsibility of

the user to verify compliance.

The product conforms with the following standards:

DIN VDE 0160 / 05.88

DIN VDE 0100

DIN IEC 326 Teil 1 / 10.90

Electronic equipment for use in electrical power installations

Erection of power installations with nominal voltages up to 1000V

Design and use of printed boards

DIN VDE 0110Teil 1-2 / 01.89 Dimensioning of clearance and creepage

DIN VDE 0110Teil 20 / 08.90

EN 60529 / 10.91

distances

Degrees of protection provided by enclosures

EMC – Conformity and CE – Marking

The information contained herein is for your guidance only and does not guarantee that the installation will meet

the requirements of the council directive 89/336/EEC.

The purpose of the EEC directives is to state a minimum technical requirement common to all the member

states within the European Union. In turn, these minimum technical requirements are intended to enhance the

levels of safety both directly and indirectly.

Council directive 89/336/EEC relating to Electro Magnetic Compliance (EMC) indicates that it is the

responsibility of the system integrator to ensure that the entire system complies with all relative directives at the

time of installing into service.

Motors and controls are used as components of a system, per the EMC directive. Hence all components,

installation of the components, interconnection between components, and shielding and grounding of the

system as a whole determines EMC compliance.

The CE mark does not inform the purchaser which directive the product complies with. It rests upon the

manufacturer or his authorized representative to ensure the item in question complies fully with all the relative

directives in force at the time of installing into service, in the same way as the system integrator previously

mentioned. Remember, it is the instructions of installation and use, coupled with the product, that comply with

the directive.

Wiring of Shielded (Screened) Cables

Conductive

Clamp

Remove the outer insulation

to expose the overall screen.

MN792

CE Guidelines A-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using CE approved components will not guarantee a CE compliant system!

The components used in the drive, installation methods used, materials selected for interconnection

of components are important.

The installation methods, interconnection materials, shielding, filtering and grounding of the system

as a whole will determine CE compliance.

The responsibility of CE mark compliance rests entirely with the party who offers the end system for

sale (such as an OEM or system integrator).

Baldor products which meet the EMC directive requirements are indicated with a “CE” mark. A duly signed CE

declaration of conformity is available from Baldor.

EMC Wiring Technique

CABINET

The drawing shows an electroplated zinc coated enclosure,

which is connected to ground.

This enclosure has the following advantages:

Capacitor

– All parts mounted on the back plane are connected to ground.

– All shield (screen) connections are connected to ground.

Within the cabinet there should be a spatial separation between

power wiring (motor and AC power cables) and control wiring.

SCREEN CONNECTIONS

All connections between components must use shielded cables.

The cable shields must be connected to the enclosure. Use

conductive clamps to ensure good ground connection. With this

technique, a good ground shield can be achieved.

EMC – FILTER

The EMI or main filter should be mounted next to the power

supply (here BPS). For the connection to and from the main

filter screened cables should be used. The cable screens should

be connected to screen clamps on both sides. (Exception:

Analog Command Signal).

Grounding (Earth)

For safety reasons (VDE0160), all BALDOR components must

be connected to ground with a separate wire. The diameter of

the wire must be at minimum AWG#6 (10mm@). Ground

connections (dashed lines) must be made from the central

ground to the regen resistor enclosure and from the central

ground to the Shared Power Supply.

Y–CAPACITOR

The connection of the regeneration resistor can cause RFI (radio

frequency interference) to be very high. To minimize RFI, a

Y–capacitor is used. The capacitor should only be connected

between the dynamic brake resistor housing and terminal pin R1

(lead from Lin).

Recommendation: 0,1µF / 250VAC Type: PME265

BALDOR–Ordering–No.: ASR27104

A-2 CE Guidelines

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EMC Installation Instructions

To ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), the following installation instructions should be completed.

These steps help to reduce interference.

Consider the following:

•

Grounding of all system elements to a central ground point

Shielding of all cables and signal wires

Filtering of power lines

A proper enclosure should have the following characteristics:

A) All metal conducting parts of the enclosure must be electrically connected to the back plane. These

connections should be made with a grounding strap from each element to a central grounding point .

ꢀ

B) Keep the power wiring (motor and power cable) and control wiring separated. If these wires must

cross, be sure they cross at 90 degrees to minimize noise due to induction.

C) The shield connections of the signal and power cables should be connected to the screen rails or

clamps. The screen rails or clamps should be conductive clamps fastened to the cabinet. ꢁ

D) The cable to the regeneration resistor must be shielded. The shield must be connected to ground at

both ends.

E) The location of the AC mains filter has to be situated close to the drive so the AC power wires are as

short as possible.

F) Wires inside the enclosure should be placed as close as possible to conducting metal, cabinet walls

and plates. It is advised to terminate unused wires to chassis ground. ꢀ

G) To reduce ground current, use at least a 10mm²(6 AWG) solid wire for ground connections.

ꢀ

ꢁ

Grounding in general describes all metal parts which can be connected to a protective conductor, e.g. housing of

cabinet, motor housing, etc. to a central ground point. This central ground point is then connected to the main plant

(or building) ground.

Or run as twisted pair at minimum.

AC Line Filter, Choke and Motor Connections for CE

Notes:

Protective

Earth

See Protection Device description in Section 4.

Metal conduit or shielded cable should be used. Connect conduits so the

use of a Reactor or RC Device does not interrupt EMI/RFI shielding.

Use the same gauge wire for Earth as used for L1, L2, L3 connections.

High

Speed

Fuses

Independent

PE Point

Note 1

Note 2

Use same gauge wire for Earth ground as is used for L and N, or L1, L2

L3. (VDE (Germany) requires 10mm minimum, 6AWG).

Note 3 & 4

Reference EMC wiring in Appendix A for CE compliance.

For EN60204 installations in Europe:

AC Line Filter

Note 6

S Each conductor used for earth connections must individually meet

the protective earth (PE) conductor requirements.

S AC Line Filter must be connected to earth.

Start

Contactor

Note 7

S For permanent earth connection, the control requires two protective

earth conductors (10mm ) or one (10mm ) conductor connected to

the independent PE point near the control.

S The Motor PE conductor is run with the motor wires and in the same

conduit. Connect to the independent PE point near the control.

S Connect the control PE to the independent PE point near the control.

AC Line

Choke

AC Contactor is internal for size 1 and 2 controls. Size 3–5, the

contactor can be connected between TB3–3 (line) and TB3–4 (neutral)

and its purpose is to provide AC power disconnection. Maximum inrush

current must not exceed 3A.

TB1

TB3

Baldor Control

This figure shows optional components not furnished with control.

See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.

F–

F+

A+

A–

Field

Armature

MN792

CE Guidelines A-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cable Screens Grounding

Cable (Twisted Pair Conductors)

Conductive Clamp – Must contact bare cable shield

and be secured to metal backplane.

Input Signal Cable Grounding

Control

Cable

Simulated Encoder Output Cable Grounding

Control

Cable

Controller

Encoder Cable Grounding

Expansion

Board

A+

A–

B+

B–

C+

C–

Encoder

A-4 CE Guidelines

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B

Parameter Table

Parameter Values (Version 5.13) RW: RO = Read Only, RW = Read / Write. WB Block = WorkbenchD Block name.

Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

10.0 Secs

MN Notes

RW Ramp Accel Time

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

Ramps

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

RW Ramp Decel Time

RW Constant Accel

RW Ramp Input

RW Ratio 1

Ramps

10.0 Secs

Ramps

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

Ramps

-105.00 to 105.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

0.00%

1.0000

.0000

Setpoint Sum 1

Speed Loop

RW Ratio 2 (A3)

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

RW Sign 1

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

Setpoint Sum 1

Speed Loop

0 : Negative 1 : Positive Positive

RW Sign 2 (A3)

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

RW Zero SPD. Offset

RW Standstill Logic

RW Zero Threshold

RW SPD.INT.TIME

RW SPD.PROP.GAIN

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Calibration

Standstill

-5.00 to 5.00 %

0.00%

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

Standstill

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.001 to 30.000 Secs

0.00 to 200.00

2.00%

0.500 Secs

Speed Loop

Current Loop

Alarms

CONFIGURE DRIVE

RW CUR.LIMIT/SCALER CONFIGURE DRIVE

0.00 to 200.00 %

0.00 to 200.00

90.00%

45.00

3.50

RW PROP. GAIN

RW INT. GAIN

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

CONFIGURE DRIVE

0.00 to 200.00

RO Autotune

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

Output, 1

RW Field Fail

SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

CONFIGURE DRIVE

0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited Enabled

RW Armature V CAL.

RW IR Compensation

RW Encoder RPM

RW Analog TACH CAL

RW Encoder Lines

RW Armature I (A9)

Calibration

0.9800 to 1.1000

0.00 to 100.00 %

0 to 6000 RPM

0.9800 to 1.1000

10 to 5000

1.0000

0.00%

1750 RPM

1.0000

1024

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

CONFIGURE DRIVE

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

0 : UNIPOLAR

1 : BIPOLAR

Bipolar

RW PROG Stop Time

RW Stop Time

SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES

SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE

MENUS

Stop Rates

Alarms

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0.1 Secs

10.0 Secs

RW Stall Trip

0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited Inhibited

RW Stop Zero Speed

RW Additional DEM

RW SPD BRK2 (HIGH)

RW SPD BRK1 (LOW)

RW IMAX BRK2(SPD2)

RW FULL MENUS

RW Configure Enable

RW Setpoint 4

Stop Rates

Current Loop

Current Profile

Menus

0.00 to 100.00 %

2.00%

-200.00 to 200.00 %

0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

0.00 to 200.00 % (h)

0.00%

100.00%

200.00%

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Unallocated

Speed Loop

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

-105.00 to 105.00 %

0.00%

RO At Current Limit

RW Modulus

DIAGNOSTICS

Current Loop

Digout 1 (B5)

0 : False 1 : True

False

b6 Output

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)

TRUE

RW Modulus

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)

Digout 2 (B6)

Digout 3 (B7)

Speed Loop

0 : False 1 : True

TRUE

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)

TRUE

RW SPEED FBK SELECT CONFIGURE DRIVE

0 : Arm Volts Fbk

1 : Analog Tach

2 : Encoder

Arm Volts Fbk

3 : Encoder/Analog

RW NEG. I CLAMP

RW ENCODER SIGN

RO ANIN 1 (A2)

RO ANIN 2 (A3)

RO ANIN 3 (A4)

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

Current Loop

Speed Loop

-100.00 to 100.00 %

0.00%

CONFIGURE DRIVE

DIAGNOSTICS

0 : Negative 1 : Positive Positive

be Output

bf Output

bg Output

Analog Input 1

Analog Input 2

Analog Input 3

xxx.xx VOLTS

0.00V

Notes: 1. This parameter is not saved in non–volitile memory.

2. This parameter can only be written when control is stopped.

3. This parameter can only be written when contol is in configuration mode (stopped & Configure Drive::Configure Enable = Enabled).

4. This parameter is reserved.

MN792

Parameter Table B-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued

Tag R/W Name

RO ANIN 4 (A5)

Keypad Menu

DIAGNOSTICS

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

0.00V

10.00V

0.00V

0.0%

0 RPM

0.0%

-90.0%

0.03%

0.00%

0.0%

90.00%

Off

MN Notes

Analog Input 4

Analog Input 5

xxx.xx VOLTS

bh Output

RO ANIN 5 (A6)

RO ANOUT 1 (A7)

RO ANOUT 2 (A8)

RO Terminal Volts

Output

Analog Output 1 xxx.xx VOLTS (h)

Analog Output 2 xxx.xx VOLTS (h)

bk Output

bl Output

Calibration

Diagnostics

Speed Loop

Current Loop

Diagnostics

Aux I/O

xxx.xx % (h)

xxxxx RPM

RO UNFIL.TACH INPUT DIAGNOSTICS

bm Output

bn Output

bo Output

bp Output

bq Output

RO UNFIL.ENCODER

RO BACK EMF

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx % (h)

xxx.xx %

RO ACTUAL NEG I LIM

RO UNFIL.SPD.FBK

RO Speed Setpoint

RO UNFIL.SPD.ERROR

RO IaFbk UNFILTERED

xxx.xx %

bs Output

bt Output

Output

xxx.xx %

xxx.xx % (h)

0 : Off 1 : On

0 : False 1 : True

RO IaDmd UNFILTERED DIAGNOSTICS

bu Output

bv Output

bw Output

bx Output

by Output

bz Output

c0 Output

c1 Output

c2 Output

c3 Output

c4 Output

c5 Output

c6 Output

c7 Output

c8 Output

RO ACTUAL POS I LIM

RO Start (C3)

DIAGNOSTICS

RO Digital Input C4

RO Digital Input C5

RO DIGIN 1 (C6)

RO DIGIN 2 (C7)

RO DIGIN 3 (C8)

RO DIGOUT 1 (B5)

RO DIGOUT 2 (B6)

RO DIGOUT 3 (B7)

RO At Zero Speed

RO At Zero Setpoint

RO At Standstill

Aux I/O

Off

Aux I/O

Digital Input 1

Digital Input 2

Digital Input 3

Digout 1 (B5)

Digout 2 (B6)

Digout 3 (B7)

Standstill

Off

True

Standstill

True

Standstill

True

RO Program Stop

Stop Rates

Alarms

False

RW SPEED FBK ALARM SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited Enabled

RO Drive Start

DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics

Unallocated

Diagnostics

Ramps

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

ca Output

cb Output

RO Contactor Closed

RO Drive Enable

DIAGNOSTICS

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

Output

RO Ramp Output

RO SPT SUM OUTPUT

RO POS. I CLAMP

RO NEG. I CLAMP

RO Speed Demand

RW Bipolar Clamps

RW PROG STOP I LIM

RW Encoder Alarm

RW IMAX BRK1(SPD1)

RW AUX DIGOUT 1

RW AUX DIGOUT 2

RW AUX DIGOUT 3

RW Source Tag

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx %

0.00%

90.0%

-90.0%

0.00%

cd Output

ce Output

DIAGNOSTICS

Setpoint Sum 1

Diagnostics

Stop Rates

Current Loop

Stop Rates

Alarms

xxx.xx %

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx % (h)

xxx.xx %

Output

DIAGNOSTICS

cg Output

DIAGNOSTICS

ch Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES

SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE

SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

0.00 to 200.00 % 100.00%

0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited Enabled

Current Profile

Aux I/O

0.00 to 200.00 % (h)

0 : Off 1 : On

0 to 549

200.00%

Off

Aux I/O

Off

Aux I/O

Off

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)

Digout 1 (B5)

cp 2, 3

RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)

Digout 2 (B6)

Digout 3 (B7)

0 to 549

122

125

cq 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)

2, 3

100 RW Input 1

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

Setpoint Sum 1

Digital Input 1

-200.00 to 200.00 %

0 to 549

0.00%

102 RW Destination Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)

cu 2, 3

103 RW Value For True

104 RW Value For False

105 RW Destination Tag

106 RW Value For True

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)

Digital Input 1

Digital Input 2

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0 to 549

0.01%

0.00%

118

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)

2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0.01%

B-2 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

107 RW Value For False

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)

Digital Input 2

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0.00%

108 RW Destination Tag

109 RW Value For True

110 RW Value For False

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)

Digital Input 3

0 to 549

119

d0 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0.01%

0.00%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)

111 RW 5703 RCV ERROR

112 RO Stall Trip

SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

ALARM STATUS

Alarms

0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited Enabled

Alarms

0 : OK 1 : Failed

0 : False 1 : True

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

0 : Off 1 : On

d4 Output

d5 Output

d7 Output

d8 Output

113 RO Ramping

DIAGNOSTICS

Ramps

False

0x0200

0x0000

Off

115 RO Health Word

116 RO Health Store

118 RW Ramp Hold

119 RW I DMD. ISOLATE

120 RW Enter Password

121 RW Change Password

122 RO Health LED

123 RW Peek Data

124 RW Peek Scale

125 RO Ready

ALARM STATUS

Alarms

ALARM STATUS

Alarms

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

PASSWORD

Ramps

Current Loop

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

0 : False 1 : True

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

-300.00 to 300.00

0 : False 1 : True

0.00 to 100.00 %

-100.00 to 100.00 %

0x0000

True

PASSWORD

DIAGNOSTICS

Alarms

de Output

SYSTEM::PEEK

0x0078

8.00

SYSTEM::PEEK

DIAGNOSTICS

Alarms

Ramps

Aux I/O

False

0.00%

dh Output

126 RW MIN SPEED

128 RW ANOUT 1

129 RW ANOUT 2

130 RW Mode

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

System Port P3 0 : Disabled

1 : 5703 Master

2 : 5703 Slave

3 : CELite (EIASCII)

131 RW Deadband Width

132 RW SETPT. RATIO

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

Setpoint Sum 1

5703

0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

-3.0000 to 3.0000

0.0%

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::5703 SUPPORT

0.0000

133 RW SETPT. SIGN

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::5703 SUPPORT

5703

0 : Negative 1 : Positive Positive

134 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE 5703 5703

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE 5703 Scaled 5703 InĆ 0 to 549

put

0 to 549

dq 2, 3

135 RW Destination Tag

2, 3

136 RW Feed Forward

137 RW Discontinuous

155 RO Version Number

161 RW AUX START

168 RW Aux Enable

169 RO Field Enabled

170 RW Field Enable

171 RW Setpoint

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)

SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O

DIAGNOSTICS

Current Loop

Unallocated

Aux I/O

0.10 to 50.00

2.00

0.00 to 200.00 %

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

0 : Off 1 : On

12.00%

eb Output

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

Field Control

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

ep Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00 to 100.00

100.00%

172 RW INT. GAIN

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS

Field Control

Calibration

1.28

173 RW PROP. GAIN

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS

0.10

174 RW FLD. WEAK ENABLE SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

175 RW EMF LEAD

176 RW EMF LAG

177 RW EMF GAIN

178 RW MAX VOLTS

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

0.10 to 50.00

2.00

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

0.00 to 200.00

40.00

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

0.00 to 100.00

0.30

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

100.00%

10.00%

50.00%

179 RW MIN FLD.CURRENT SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

180 RW SPDFBK ALM LEVEL SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

MN792

Parameter Table B-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

181 RO Unfil. Field FBK

182 RW Field I CAL.

183 RO Field Demand

DIAGNOSTICS

Calibration

Field Control

xxx.xx %

0.00%

Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

DIAGNOSTICS

0.9800 to 1.1000

xxx.xx %

1.0000

0.00%

Output

184 RO FLD.FIRING ANGLE DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx DEG

0.0 to 600.0 Secs

0.00 Deg

0.0 Secs

185 RW FLD.QUENCH

DELAY

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL

186 RW FLD. QUENCH

MODE

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL

Field Control

5703

0 : Quench 1 : Standby

xxx.xx %

Quench

0.00%

187 RO Raw Input

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::5703 SUPPORT

Output

188 RW Over Speed Level

189 RO Scaled Input

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

Calibration

5703

0.00 to 200.00 %

xxx.xx %

125.00%

0.00%

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::5703 SUPPORT

Output, 2

191 RW BEMF FBK LEAD

192 RW BEMF FBK LAG

195 RW Threshold (>)

196 RW Threshold (>)

197 RW Threshold (>)

198 RW P3 Baud Rate

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

Field Control

Digout 1 (B5)

Digout 2 (B6)

Digout 3 (B7)

10 to 5000

100

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

10 to 5000

100

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0.00%

9600

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

0:300 1:600 2:1200

3:2400 4:4800 5:9600

6:19200

199 RW Delay

SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

Inverse Time

Current Loop

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

10.0 Secs

2, 4

200 RW Rate

60.0 Secs

201 RW Regen Mode

0 : 2Q (Non-regen)

1 : 4Q (Regen)

2Q(Non-regen)

202 RW INT. DEFEAT

203 RO Inverse Time O/P

204 RW Aiming Point

206 RO Encoder

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP

DIAGNOSTICS

Speed Loop

Inverse Time

Diagnostics

0 : Off 1 : On

xxx.xx %

Off

200.0%

103.00%

0 RPM

Output, 2, 4

2, 4

SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME

DIAGNOSTICS

0.00 to 103.00 %

xxxxx RPM

Output

207 RO Speed Feedback

208 RW Ratio 0

DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics

xxx.xx %

0.01%

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Setpoint Sum 1

Field Control

-3.0000 to 3.0000

1.0000

209 RW FLD.CTRL MODE

0 : Voltage Control

1 : Current Control

Voltage Control

210 RW FLD.VOLTS RATIO

212 RO Operating Mode

CONFIGURE DRIVE

DIAGNOSTICS

Field Control

Jog/Slack

0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

67.0%

Stop

0 : Stop

1 : Stop

Output

2 : Jog Sp. 1

3 : Jog Sp. 2

4 : Run

5 : Take Up Sp. 1

6 : Take Up Sp. 2

7 : Crawl

216 RW PROG STOP LIMIT

217 RW Stop Limit

218 RW Jog Speed 1

219 RW Jog Speed 2

224 RW Stall Trip Delay

225 RW Crawl Speed

227 RW AUX JOG

228 RW Mode

SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES

SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK

SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O

Stop Rates

Jog/Slack

Calibration

Jog/Slack

Aux I/O

0.0 to 600.0 Secs

-100.00 to 100.00 %

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

-100.00 to 100.00 %

0 : Off 1 : On

60.0 Secs

20.00 %

-5.00 %

10.0 Secs

10.00%

SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK

Jog/Slack

Analog Input 1

0 : False 1 : True

-3.0000 to 3.0000

FALSE

230 RW Calibration

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)

1.0000

231 RW Max Value

232 RW Min Value

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)

Analog Input 1

-300.00 to 300.00 %

100.00%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)

-100.00%

B-4 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

233 RW Calibration

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)

Analog Input 2

-3.0000 to 3.0000

1.0000

234 RW Max Value

235 RW Min Value

236 RW Calibration

237 RW Max Value

238 RW Min Value

239 RW Calibration

240 RW Max Value

241 RW Min Value

242 RW Calibration

243 RW Max Value

244 RW Min Value

245 RW % TO GET 10V

246 RW Destination Tag

247 RW Destination Tag

248 RW % TO GET 10V

249 RW Destination Tag

250 RW Destination Tag

251 RW Source Tag

252 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)

Analog Input 2

Analog Input 3

Analog Input 4

Analog Input 5

-300.00 to 300.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

100.00%

-100.00%

1.0000

100.00%

-100.00%

1.0000

100.00%

-100.00%

1.0000

200.00%

-200.00%

100.00%

100

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)

Analog Output 1 -300.00 to 300.00 %

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)

Analog Input 1

Analog Input 5

0 to 549

gu 2, 3

gv 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)

301

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)

Analog Output 2 -300.00 to 300.00 %

100.00%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)

Analog Input 3

Analog Input 4

0 to 549

gx 2, 3

gy 2, 3

gz 2, 3

h0 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)

Analog Output 1 0 to 549

Analog Output 2 0 to 549

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)

253 RW Take Up 1

254 RW Take Up 2

255 RW Reset Value

256 RW Increase Rate

257 RW Decrease Rate

258 RW Min Value

SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER

Jog/Slack

-100.00 to 100.00 %

5.00%

Jog/Slack

-100.00 to 100.00 %

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0 to 549

-5.00%

0.00%

Raise/Lower

10.0 Secs

-100.00%

100.00%

259 RW Max Value

260 RW Raise/Lower Dest

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM Raise/Lower

Output

261 RW Raise Input

262 RW Lower Input

263 RW Stall Threshold

264 RO Raise/Lower O/P

266 RW % S-RAMP

268 RW Mode

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

DIAGNOSTICS

Raise/Lower

Calibration

Raise/Lower

Ramps

0 : False 1 : True

0.00 to 200.00 %

xxx.xx %

FALSE

95.00%

0.00%

2.50%

hc Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

0.00 to 100.00 %

0 to 3

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

Advanced

269 RW SPD BRK1 (LOW)

270 RW SPD BRK2 (HIGH)

271 RW PROP. GAIN

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

Advanced

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00 to 200.00

1.00%

5.00%

5.00

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

MN792

Parameter Table B-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

272 RW SPD.INT.TIME

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

Advanced

0.001 to 30.000 Secs

0.500 Secs

273 RW POS. LOOP P GAIN SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED

Advanced

-200.00 to 200.00 %

0.0000 to 2.0000

0.00 to 200.00 %

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00%

1.0000

0.50%

1.50%

0.50%

274 RW I GAIN IN RAMP

284 RW ZERO SPD. LEVEL

285 RW ZERO IAD LEVEL

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ZERO SPD. QUENCH

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ZERO SPD. QUENCH

286 RW RAMPING THRESH. SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

287 RW Auto Reset

288 RW External Reset

289 RW Setpoint 1

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

Ramps

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

Speed Loop

-105.00 to 105.00 %

0.00%

290 RO Setpoint 2 (A3)

291 RW Setpoint 3

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

Speed Loop

Setpoint Sum 1

xxx.xx %

Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

-105.00 to 105.00 %

292 RW SIGN 0

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

0 : Negative 1 : Positive Positive

293 RW RAMP O/P DEST

294 RW SPT SUM 1 DEST

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM Ramp Output

0 to 549

291

289

2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM Setpoint Sum 1

Output

297 RO Speed Error

298 RO Current Feedback

299 RO Current Demand

300 RO FIELD I FBK.

301 RW POS. I CLAMP

302 RW Contactor Delay

305 RW Trip Reset

DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics

Current Loop

Stop Rates

Alarms

xxx.xx %

-0.01%

0.00%

100.00%

1.0 Secs

TRUE

Output

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx %

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx %

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx %

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES

SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER

DIAGNOSTICS

-100.00 to 100.00 %

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0 : False 1 : True

0 to 549

306 RW Source Tag

307 RW External Reset

308 RO Tach Input

Standstill

2, 3, 4

Output

Raise/Lower

Diagnostics

Setpoint Sum 1

0 : False 1 : True

xxx.xx % (h)

FALSE

0.0%

309 RW Input 0

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

-200.00 to 200.00 %

0.00%

0x0000

329 RW GROUP ID (GID)

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT

System Port P3 0x0000 to 0x0007

System Port P3 0x0000 to 0x000F

System Port P3 0x0000 to 0xFFFF

330 RW UNIT ID (UID)

332 RW Error Report

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT

0x0000

0x00C0

False

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT

337 RO Thermistor State

354 RW Parameter Save

355 RW Ramp Rate

ALARM STATUS

Unallocated

Jog/Slack

0 : False 1 : True

Output

PARAMETER SAVE

Up To Action Requested

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0.00 to 105.00 %

SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK

1.0 Secs

105.00%

357 RW Max Demand

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

Speed Loop

358 RW Min Demand

359 RW Inverted

360 RW Inverted

361 RW Inverted

362 RW Modulus

363 RW Modulus

364 RW Source Tag

365 RW Destination Tag

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

Speed Loop

Digout 1 (B5)

Digout 2 (B6)

Digout 3 (B7)

-105.00 to 105.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

-105.00%

FALSE

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)

Analog Output 1 0 : False 1 : True

Analog Output 2 0 : False 1 : True

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 1

Link 1

0 to 549

k4 2, 3

k5 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 1

B-6 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

366 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 2

Link 2

0 to 549

k6 2, 3

367 RW Destination Tag

368 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 2

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

0 to 549

k7 2, 3

k8 2, 3

k9 2, 3

ka 2, 3

kb 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 3

369 RW Destination TaG

370 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 4

371 RW Destination Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 4

374 RO System Reset

375 RW Limit

DIAGNOSTICS

Unallocated

0 : False 1 : True

0.00 to 200.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

0 to 549

True

ke Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

DIAGNOSTICS

Setpoint Sum 1

Unallocated

105.00%

False

376 RO Drive Running

400 RW PID O/P DEST

401 RW DERIVATIVE TC

402 RW INT.TIME.CONST

403 RW FILTER T.C.

404 RW PROP. GAIN

405 RW Positive Limit

406 RW Negative Limit

kg Output

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM PID Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

2, 3

0.000 to 10.000 Secs

0.01 to 100.00 Secs

0.000 to 10.000 Secs

0.0 to 100.0

0.000Secs

5.00 Secs

0.100 Secs

1.0

0.00 to 105.00 %

-105.00 to 0.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

100.00%

-100.00%

0.2000

407 RW O/P SCALER(TRIM) SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

408 RW Enable

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

409 RW INT. DEFEAT

410 RW Input 1

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

-300.00 to 300.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

xxx.xx %

0.00%

1.0000

0.00%

False

411 RW Input 2

412 RW Ratio 1

413 RW Ratio 2

414 RW Divider 2

415 RO PID Error

416 RO PID Clamped

417 RO PID Output

418 RW Divider 1

419 RW Divider 1

420 RW Divider 0

421 RW MAIN CURR. LIMIT

422 RW Reset Value

423 RW Input 2

DIAGNOSTICS

PID

Output

0 : False 1 : True

xxx.xx %

0.00%

1.0000

200.00%

0.00%

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

-3.0000 to 3.0000

0.00 to 200.00 %

-300.00 to 300.00 %

-200.00 to 200.00 %

0 to 549

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Setpoint Sum 1

Current Loop

Ramps

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

Setpoint Sum 1

Link 5

454 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 5

2, 3

455 RW Destination Tag

456 RW Source Tag

457 RW Destination Tag

458 RW Source Tag

459 RW Destination Tag

460 RW Source Tag

461 RW Destination Tag

464 RW Offset

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 5

Link 5

Link 6

Link 7

Link 8

0 to 549

mn 2, 3

mo 2, 3

mp 2, 3

mq 2, 3

mr 2, 3

ms 2, 3

mt 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 6

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 6

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 7

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 7

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 8

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 8

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)

Analog Output 1 -100.00 to 100.00 %

Analog Output 2 -100.00 to 100.00 %

0.00%

465 RW Offset

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)

467 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 9

Link 9

0 to 549

mz 2, 3

MN792

Parameter Table B-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

468 RW Destination Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 9

Link 9

0 to 549

n0 2, 3

469 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 10

Link 10

0 to 549

n1 2, 3

n2 2, 3

470 RW Destination Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 10

Link 10

472 RO SPEED FBK STATE

473 RW Mode

ALARM STATUS

Unallocated

0 : False 1 : True

0 to 4

False

n4 Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

474 RW MIN PROFILE GAIN SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

0.00 to 100.00 %

xxxx.x

20.00%

0.0

475 RO Profiled Gain

493 RO Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

n7 Output

np Output, 2

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)

Analog Input 2

xxx.xx %

0.00%

494 RW Destination Tag

495 RW Destination Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C4

Dig in C4

Dig in C5

0 to 549

496

497

nq 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C5

2, 3

496 RO Jog/Slack

497 RO Enable

SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O

SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

ns Output

Aux I/O

Output

500 RW TEC Option Type

Tec Option

0 : None

1 : Rs485

None

2 : Profibus Dp

3 : Link

4 : Device Net

5 : Can Open

6 : Lonworks

7 : Type 7

501 RW TEC Option IN 1

502 RW TEC Option IN 2

503 RW TEC Option IN 3

504 RW TEC Option IN 4

505 RW TEC Option IN 5

506 RO TEC Option Fault

SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION

Tec Option

-32768 to 32767

0 : None

None

o2 Output

1 : Parameter

2 : Type Mismatch

3 : Self Test

4 : Hardware

5 : Missing

507 RO TEC Option VER

508 RO TEC Option OUT 1

509 RO TEC Option OUT 2

511 RW Local Key Enable

512 RW Setpoint

SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION

Tec Option

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

xxxxx

0x0000

o3 Output, 1

o4 Output, 1

o5 Output, 1

xxxxx

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP Op Station

0 : False 1 : True

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

TRUE

0.00%

5.00%

10.0 Secs

513 RW Jog Setpoint

514 RW Ramp Accel Time

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::LOCAL

RAMP

Op Station

515 RW Ramp Decel Time

516 RW Forward

517 RW Local

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::LOCAL

RAMP

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0 : False 1 : True

0.00 to 100.00 %

10.0 Secs

TRUE

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

TRUE

518 RW Program

519 RW Setpoint

520 RW Jog Setpoint

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

FALSE

0.00%

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

5.00%

521 RW NOM Motor Volts

523 RW Armature Current

524 RW Field Current

525 RO Coast Stop

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Calibration

Stop Rates

Current Loop

100 to 875 Volts

2.0 to 15.0 AMPS

0.2 to 4.0 AMPS

0 : False 1 : True

0 : Off 1 : On

500 Volts

2.0 Amps

0.2 Amps

FALSE

Off

CONFIGURE DRIVE

DIAGNOSTICS

Output

527 RO Master Bridge

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

on Output, 1

B-8 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

528 RO Last Alarm

ALARM STATUS

Alarms

0x0000 : No Active Alarms No Active Alarms

0x0001 : Over Speed

0x0002 : Missing Pulse

0x0004 : Field Over I

0x0008 : Heatsink Trip

0x0010 : Thermistor

oo Output, 1

0x0020 : Over Volts (VA)

0x0040 : SPD Feed back

0x0080 : Encoder Failed

0x0100 : Field Failed

0x0200 : 3 Phase Failed

0x0400 : Phase Lock

0x0800 : 5703 RCV Error

0x1000 : Stall Trip

0x2000 : Over I Trip

0xf005 : External Trip

0x8000 : Accts Failed

0xf001 : Autotune Error

0xf002 : Autotune Aborted

0xf200 : Config Enabled

0xf400 : No Keypad

0xf006 : Remote Trip

0xff05 : PCB Version

0xff06 : Product Code

535 RW REM.SEQ.ENABLE

536 RW REM.SEQUENCE

537 RO SEQ Status

SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O

DIAGNOSTICS

Aux I/O

0 : False, 1 : True

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

xxxx.x AMPS

FALSE

Aux I/O

0x0000

Aux I/O

0x0C03

0.0 Amps

ox Output

oy Output, 1, 3

oz Output, 1, 3

538 RO Current FBK.Amps

539 RO Field I FBK.AMPS

540 RW REM Trip Inhibit

541 RW REM Trip Delay

542 RO Remote Trip

Current Loop

Alarms

DIAGNOSTICS

xxxx.x AMPS

SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

ALARM STATUS

0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited Enabled

Alarms

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0 : False 1 : True

Up To Action Requested

0.000 to 1.000

10.0 Secs

FALSE

Alarms

p2 Output, 1

p3 1, 2, 3, 4

543 RW Zero CAL Inputs

547 RW SPD.FBK.FILTER

549 RO Speed LOOP O/P

594 RW CURR Decay Rate

605 RO ARM Volts FBK

617 RW Field I Thresh

618 RO Up To Field

CONFIGURE DRIVE

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP

DIAGNOSTICS

Menus

0.000

0.00%

0.00

Speed Loop

Stop Rates

Unallocated

Field Control

Ramps

-200 to 200 %

p9 Output, 2

SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES

DIAGNOSTICS

0 to 200.00

0 Volts

80.00%

False

Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

0.00 to 100.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

620 RW Invert

MN792

Parameter Table B-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Parameter Values Continued R/W: RO = Read Only, RW = Read / Write

Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

2.50%

MN Notes

266 RW % S-RAMP

245 RW % TO GET 10V

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

0.00 to 100.00 %

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)

Analog Output 1 -300.00 to 300.00 %

100.00%

248 RW % TO GET 10V

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)

Analog Output 2 -300.00 to 300.00 %

100.00%

111 RW 5703 RCV ERROR

SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

DIAGNOSTICS

Alarms

0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited Enabled

RO ACTUAL NEG I LIM

RO ACTUAL POS I LIM

RW Additional DEM

Diagnostics

Current Loop

Inverse Time

Calibration

xxx.xx % (h)

-90.0%

90.00%

0.00%

103.00%

1.0000

0.00V

bp Output

bv Output

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx % (h)

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

DIAGNOSTICS

-200.00 to 200.00 %

0.00 to 103.00 %

0.9800 to 1.1000

xxx.xx VOLTS

204 RW Aiming Point

2, 4

RW Analog TACH CAL

RO ANIN 1 (A2)

RO ANIN 2 (A3)

RO ANIN 3 (A4)

RO ANIN 4 (A5)

RO ANIN 5 (A6)

Analog Input 1

Analog Input 2

Analog Input 3

Analog Input 4

Analog Input 5

Aux I/O

be Output

bf Output

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx VOLTS

0.00V

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx VOLTS

0.00V

bg Output

bh Output

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx VOLTS

0.00V

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx VOLTS

10.00V

0.00%

0.00V

Output

128 RW ANOUT 1

55 RO ANOUT 1 (A7)

129 RW ANOUT 2

56 RO ANOUT 2 (A8)

SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O

DIAGNOSTICS

-100.00 to 100.00 %

Analog Output 1 xxx.xx VOLTS (h)

Aux I/O -100.00 to 100.00 %

Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O

DIAGNOSTICS

0.00%

0.00V

Analog Output 2 xxx.xx VOLTS (h)

Unallocated

bk Output

Output

605 RO ARM Volts FBK

523 RW Armature Current

DIAGNOSTICS

0 Volts

2.0 Amps

Bipolar

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Calibration

2.0 to 15.0 AMPS

RW Armature I (A9)

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

0 : UNIPOLAR

1 : BIPOLAR

RW Armature V CAL.

RO At Current Limit

RO At Standstill

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

DIAGNOSTICS

Calibration

Current Loop

Standstill

Ramps

0.9800 to 1.1000

0 : False 1 : True

1.0000

False

True

b6 Output

c7 Output

c6 Output

c5 Output

DIAGNOSTICS

RO At Zero Setpoint

RO At Zero Speed

DIAGNOSTICS

True

DIAGNOSTICS

True

287 RW Auto Reset

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

CONFIGURE DRIVE

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

RO Autotune

Current Loop

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

xxx.xx % (h)

10 to 5000

Off

Output, 1

RW AUX DIGOUT 1

RW AUX DIGOUT 2

RW AUX DIGOUT 3

SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O

DIAGNOSTICS

Off

Aux I/O

Off

Aux I/O

Off

168 RW Aux Enable

227 RW AUX JOG

161 RW AUX START

Aux I/O

RO BACK EMF

Calibration

Field Control

0.0%

100

bo Output

192 RW BEMF FBK LAG

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

191 RW BEMF FBK LEAD

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

Field Control

10 to 5000

100

RW Bipolar Clamps

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

Current Loop

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

230 RW Calibration

233 RW Calibration

236 RW Calibration

239 RW Calibration

242 RW Calibration

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)

Analog Input 1

-3.0000 to 3.0000

1.0000

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)

Analog Input 2

Analog Input 3

Analog Input 4

Analog Input 5

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)

121 RW Change Password

525 RO Coast Stop

PASSWORD

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

0 : False 1 : True

0x0000

FALSE

DIAGNOSTICS

Stop Rates

Unallocated

Ramps

Output

RW Configure Enable

RW Constant Accel

RO Contactor Closed

CONFIGURE DRIVE

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

DIAGNOSTICS

Unallocated

Stop Rates

Jog/Slack

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

cb Output

302 RW Contactor Delay

225 RW Crawl Speed

SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES

SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

-100.00 to 100.00 %

1.0 Secs

10.00%

B-10 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

90.00%

0.00

MN Notes

15 RW CUR.LIMIT/SCALER CONFIGURE DRIVE

Current Loop

Stop Rates

0.00 to 200.00 %

0 to 200.00

594 RW CURR Decay Rate

299 RO Current Demand

538 RO Current FBK.Amps

298 RO Current Feedback

131 RW Deadband Width

257 RW Decrease Rate

199 RW Delay

SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES

DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics

Current Loop

Diagnostics

Setpoint Sum 1

Raise/Lower

Inverse Time

xxx.xx %

0.00%

Output

DIAGNOSTICS

xxxx.x AMPS

xxx.xx %

0.0 Amps

0.00%

oy Output, 1, 3

DIAGNOSTICS

Output

2, 4

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER

SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME

0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0.000 to 10.000 Secs

0 to 549

0.0%

10.0 Secs

0.000Secs

401 RW DERIVATIVE TC

102 RW Destination Tag

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)

Digital Input 1

cu 2, 3

cx 2, 3

d0 2, 3

dr 2, 3

105 RW Destination Tag

108 RW Destination Tag

135 RW Destination Tag

246 RW Destination Tag

247 RW Destination Tag

249 RW Destination Tag

250 RW Destination Tag

365 RW Destination Tag

367 RW Destination Tag

369 RW Destination TaG

371 RW Destination Tag

455 RW Destination Tag

457 RW Destination Tag

459 RW Destination Tag

461 RW Destination Tag

468 RW Destination Tag

470 RW Destination Tag

494 RW Destination Tag

495 RW Destination Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)

Digital Input 2

Digital Input 3

0 to 549

118

119

100

301

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE 5703 Scaled 5703 InĆ 0 to 549

put

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)

Analog Input 1

Analog Input 5

Analog Input 3

Analog Input 4

Link 1

0 to 549

gu 2, 3

gv 2, 3

gx 2, 3

gy 2, 3

k5 2, 3

k7 2, 3

k9 2, 3

kb 2, 3

mn 2, 3

mp 2, 3

mr 2, 3

mt 2, 3

n0 2, 3

n2 2, 3

nq 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 1

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 2

Link 2

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 3

Link 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 4

Link 4

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 5

Link 5

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 6

Link 6

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 7

Link 7

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 8

Link 8

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 9

Link 9

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 10

Link 10

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C4

Dig in C4

Dig in C5

496

497

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C5

2, 3

RO DIGIN 1 (C6)

RO DIGIN 2 (C7)

RO DIGIN 3 (C8)

RO Digital Input C4

RO Digital Input C5

RO DIGOUT 1 (B5)

RO DIGOUT 2 (B6)

RO DIGOUT 3 (B7)

DIAGNOSTICS

Digital Input 1

Digital Input 2

Digital Input 3

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

bz Output

c0 Output

c1 Output

bx Output

by Output

c2 Output

c3 Output

c4 Output

DIAGNOSTICS

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

DIAGNOSTICS

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

DIAGNOSTICS

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

DIAGNOSTICS

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

DIAGNOSTICS

Digout 1 (B5)

Digout 2 (B6)

Digout 3 (B7)

Current Loop

Setpoint Sum 1

0 : Off 1 : On

DIAGNOSTICS

0 : Off 1 : On

DIAGNOSTICS

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

137 RW Discontinuous

420 RW Divider 0

418 RW Divider 1

419 RW Divider 1

414 RW Divider 2

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

0.00 to 200.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

12.00%

1.0000

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

Setpoint Sum 1

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

MN792

Parameter Table B-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

DIAGNOSTICS

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

cc Output

RO Drive Enable

Diagnostics

Unallocated

Diagnostics

Field Control

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

376 RO Drive Running

0 : False 1 : True

0 : Off 1 : On

False

Off

kg Output

ca Output

RO Drive Start

177 RW EMF GAIN

176 RW EMF LAG

175 RW EMF LEAD

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

0.00 to 100.00

0.30

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

Field Control

0.00 to 200.00

0.10 to 50.00

40.00

2.00

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

408 RW Enable

497 RO Enable

206 RO Encoder

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O

DIAGNOSTICS

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

xxxxx RPM

Output

Diagnostics

Alarms

0 RPM

RW Encoder Alarm

RW Encoder Lines

RW Encoder RPM

RW ENCODER SIGN

SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

CONFIGURE DRIVE

0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited Enabled

Calibration

Speed Loop

10 to 5000

1024

CONFIGURE DRIVE

0 to 6000 RPM

1750 RPM

CONFIGURE DRIVE

0 : Negative 1 : Positive Positive

120 RW Enter Password

332 RW Error Report

PASSWORD

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

System Port P3 0x0000 to 0xFFFF

0x0000

0x00C0

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT

288 RW External Reset

307 RW External Reset

136 RW Feed Forward

524 RW Field Current

183 RO Field Demand

170 RW Field Enable

169 RO Field Enabled

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Ramps

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

Raise/Lower

Current Loop

Calibration

Field Control

Alarms

0 : False 1 : True

0.10 to 50.00

0.2 to 4.0 AMPS

xxx.xx %

FALSE

2.00

0.2 Amps

0.00%

DIAGNOSTICS

Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL

DIAGNOSTICS

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited Enabled

ep Output

RW Field Fail

SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

DIAGNOSTICS

182 RW Field I CAL.

300 RO FIELD I FBK.

539 RO Field I FBK.AMPS

617 RW Field I Thresh

403 RW FILTER T.C.

Calibration

Diagnostics

Current Loop

Field Control

0.9800 to 1.1000

xxx.xx %

1.0000

0.00%

Output

DIAGNOSTICS

xxxx.x AMPS

0.0 Amps

80.00%

0.100 Secs

Quench

oz Output, 1, 3

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.000 to 10.000 Secs

0 : Quench 1 : Standby

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL Field Control

186 RW FLD. QUENCH

MODE

174 RW FLD. WEAK ENABLE SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

Field Control

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

209 RW FLD.CTRL MODE

CONFIGURE DRIVE

0 : Voltage Control

1 : Current Control

Voltage Control

184 RO FLD.FIRING ANGLE DIAGNOSTICS

Field Control

xxx.xx DEG

0.00 Deg

0.0 Secs

Output

185 RW FLD.QUENCH

DELAY

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL

0.0 to 600.0 Secs

210 RW FLD.VOLTS RATIO

516 RW Forward

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Field Control

Op Station

0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

0 : False 1 : True

67.0%

TRUE

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

RW FULL MENUS

MENUS

Menus

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

329 RW GROUP ID (GID)

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT

System Port P3 0x0000 to 0x0007

0x0000

122 RO Health LED

116 RO Health Store

115 RO Health Word

119 RW I DMD. ISOLATE

274 RW I GAIN IN RAMP

DIAGNOSTICS

Alarms

0 : False 1 : True

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

True

de Output

d8 Output

d7 Output

ALARM STATUS

Alarms

0x0000

0x0200

ALARM STATUS

Alarms

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

Current Loop

Advanced

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED

0.0000 to 2.0000

1.0000

RO IaDmd UNFILTERED DIAGNOSTICS

Current Loop

Current Profile

Raise/Lower

xxx.xx % (h)

0.0%

bu Output

RO IaFbk UNFILTERED

RW IMAX BRK1(SPD1)

RW IMAX BRK2(SPD2)

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx % (h)

0.0%

Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

0.00 to 200.00 % (h)

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

-200.00 to 200.00 %

-300.00 to 300.00 %

200.00%

10.0 Secs

0.00%

256 RW Increase Rate

309 RW Input 0

100 RW Input 1

410 RW Input 1

Setpoint Sum 1

0.00%

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

0.00%

B-12 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

411 RW Input 2

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

-300.00 to 300.00 %

-200.00 to 200.00 %

0 : Off 1 : On

0.00%

Off

423 RW Input 2

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP

Setpoint Sum 1

Speed Loop

202 RW INT. DEFEAT

409 RW INT. DEFEAT

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

RW INT. GAIN

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

Current Loop

Field Control

0.00 to 200.00

0.00 to 100.00

3.50

1.28

172 RW INT. GAIN

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS

402 RW INT.TIME.CONST

203 RO Inverse Time O/P

620 RW Invert

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

0.01 to 100.00 Secs

xxx.xx %

5.00 Secs

200.0%

False

DIAGNOSTICS

Inverse Time

Output, 2, 4

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

0 : False 1 : True

359 RW Inverted

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)

Digout 1 (B5)

FALSE

360 RW Inverted

361 RW Inverted

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)

Digout 2 (B6)

Digout 3 (B7)

Calibration

0 : False 1 : True

FALSE

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)

RW IR Compensation

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00%

5.00%

513 RW Jog Setpoint

520 RW Jog Setpoint

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP Op Station

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

Op Station

218 RW Jog Speed 1

219 RW Jog Speed 2

496 RO Jog/Slack

528 RO Last Alarm

SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK

SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O

ALARM STATUS

Jog/Slack

Aux I/O

-100.00 to 100.00 %

0 : Off 1 : On

20.00 %

-5.00 %

Off

ns Output

Alarms

0x0000 : No Active Alarms No Active Alarms oo Output, 1

0x0001 : Over Speed

0x0002 : Missing Pulse

0x0004 : Field Over I

0x0008 : Heatsink Trip

0x0010 : Thermistor

0x0020 : Over Volts (VA)

0x0040 : SPD Feed back

0x0080 : Encoder Failed

0x0100 : Field Failed

0x0200 : 3 Phase Failed

0x0400 : Phase Lock

0x0800 : 5703 RCV Error

0x1000 : Stall Trip

0x2000 : Over I Trip

0xf005 : External Trip

0x8000 : Accts Failed

0xf001 : Autotune Error

0xf002 : Autotune Aborted

0xf200 : Config Enabled

0xf400 : No Keypad

0xf006 : Remote Trip

0xff05 : PCB Version

0xff06 : Product Code

375 RW Limit

517 RW Local

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

Setpoint Sum 1

Op Station

0.00 to 200.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

105.00%

TRUE

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

511 RW Local Key Enable

262 RW Lower Input

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP Op Station

0 : False 1 : True

0.00 to 200.00 %

0 : Off 1 : On

TRUE

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

Raise/Lower

Current Loop

Speed Loop

FALSE

200.00%

Off

421 RW MAIN CURR. LIMIT

527 RO Master Bridge

357 RW Max Demand

on Output, 1

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

0.00 to 105.00 %

105.00%

231 RW Max Value

234 RW Max Value

237 RW Max Value

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)

Analog Input 1

Analog Input 2

Analog Input 3

-300.00 to 300.00 %

100.00%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)

MN792

Parameter Table B-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

240 RW Max Value

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)

Analog Input 4

-300.00 to 300.00 %

100.00%

243 RW Max Value

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)

Analog Input 5

-300.00 to 300.00 %

200.00%

259 RW Max Value

178 RW MAX VOLTS

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER

Raise/Lower

Field Control

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0.00 to 100.00 %

100.00%

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

358 RW Min Demand

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

Speed Loop

Field Control

-105.00 to 105.00 %

0.00 to 100.00 %

-105.00%

10.00%

179 RW MIN FLD.CURRENT SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

474 RW MIN PROFILE GAIN SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

0.00 to 100.00 %

-300.00 to 300.00 %

20.00%

0.00%

126 RW MIN SPEED

232 RW Min Value

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)

Analog Input 1

-100.00%

235 RW Min Value

238 RW Min Value

241 RW Min Value

244 RW Min Value

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)

Analog Input 2

Analog Input 3

Analog Input 4

Analog Input 5

Raise/Lower

-300.00 to 300.00 %

-100.00%

-200.00%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)

258 RW Min Value

130 RW Mode

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER

-100.00%

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

System Port P3 0 : Disabled

1 : 5703 Master

2 : 5703 Slave

3 : CELite (EIASCII)

228 RW Mode

268 RW Mode

SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK

Jog/Slack

Advanced

0 : False 1 : True

0 to 3

FALSE

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

473 RW Mode

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

0 to 4

RW Modulus

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)

Digout 1 (B5)

0 : False 1 : True

TRUE

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)

Digout 2 (B6)

Digout 3 (B7)

0 : False 1 : True

TRUE

FALSE

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)

362 RW Modulus

363 RW Modulus

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)

Analog Output 1 0 : False 1 : True

Analog Output 2 0 : False 1 : True

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)

RW NEG. I CLAMP

RO NEG. I CLAMP

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

DIAGNOSTICS

Current Loop

Diagnostics

-100.00 to 100.00 %

xxx.xx % (h)

0.00%

-90.0%

-100.00%

500 Volts

0.2000

cg Output

406 RW Negative Limit

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

CONFIGURE DRIVE Calibration

-105.00 to 0.00 %

100 to 875 Volts

-3.0000 to 3.0000

521 RW NOM Motor Volts

407 RW O/P SCALER(TRIM) SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

464 RW Offset

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)

Analog Output 1 -100.00 to 100.00 %

0.00%

465 RW Offset

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)

Analog Output 2 -100.00 to 100.00 %

0.00%

Stop

212 RO Operating Mode

DIAGNOSTICS

Jog/Slack

0 : Stop

1 : Stop

Output

2 : Jog Sp. 1

3 : Jog Sp. 2

4 : Run

5 : Take Up Sp. 1

6 : Take Up Sp. 2

7 : Crawl

B-14 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

493 RO Output

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)

Analog Input 2

xxx.xx %

0.00%

np Output, 2

188 RW Over Speed Level

198 RW P3 Baud Rate

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

Calibration

0.00 to 200.00 %

125.00%

9600

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

0:300 1:600 2:1200

3:2400 4:4800 5:9600

6:19200

354 RW Parameter Save

123 RW Peek Data

124 RW Peek Scale

416 RO PID Clamped

415 RO PID Error

PARAMETER SAVE

SYSTEM::PEEK

DIAGNOSTICS

Unallocated

Up To Action Requested

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

-300.00 to 300.00

0 : False 1 : True

xxx.xx %

0x0078

8.00

PID

False

0.00%

Output

2, 3

400 RW PID O/P DEST

417 RO PID Output

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM PID Output

0 to 549

DIAGNOSTICS

PID

xxx.xx %

0.00%

90.0%

100.00%

0.00%

Output

RO POS. I CLAMP

DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics

Current Loop

Advanced

xxx.xx % (h)

301 RW POS. I CLAMP

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

-100.00 to 100.00 %

-200.00 to 200.00 %

273 RW POS. LOOP P GAIN SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED

405 RW Positive Limit

475 RO Profiled Gain

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

0.00 to 105.00 %

xxxx.x

100.00%

0.0

n7 Output

216 RW PROG STOP LIMIT

26 RW PROG Stop Time

518 RW Program

RW PROG STOP I LIM

SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES

Stop Rates

0.00 to 200.00 %

0.0 to 600.0 Secs

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0 : False 1 : True

100.00%

60.0 Secs

0.1 Secs

FALSE

Stop Rates

Op Station

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

RO Program Stop

RW PROP. GAIN

DIAGNOSTICS

Stop Rates

0 : False 1 : True

0.00 to 200.00

0.00 to 100.00

False

45.00

0.10

c8 Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

Current Loop

Field Control

173 RW PROP. GAIN

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS

271 RW PROP. GAIN

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

Advanced

0.00 to 200.00

5.00

404 RW PROP. GAIN

261 RW Raise Input

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

0.0 to 100.0

0 : False 1 : True

0 to 549

1.0

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER

Raise/Lower

FALSE

260 RW Raise/Lower Dest

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM Raise/Lower

Output

264 RO Raise/Lower O/P

DIAGNOSTICS

Raise/Lower

Ramps

xxx.xx %

0.00%

hc Output

RW Ramp Accel Time

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

10.0 Secs

514 RW Ramp Accel Time

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::LOCAL

RAMP

Op Station

RW Ramp Decel Time

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

10.0 Secs

515 RW Ramp Decel Time

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::LOCAL

RAMP

Op Station

118 RW Ramp Hold

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

RW Ramp Input

293 RW RAMP O/P DEST

85 RO Ramp Output

-105.00 to 105.00 %

0 to 549

0.00%

291

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM Ramp Output

2, 3

DIAGNOSTICS

Ramps

xxx.xx %

0.00%

1.0 Secs

False

cd Output

355 RW Ramp Rate

113 RO Ramping

SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK

DIAGNOSTICS

Jog/Slack

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0 : False 1 : True

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

-3.0000 to 3.0000

Ramps

d5 Output

286 RW RAMPING THRESH. SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

0.50%

60.0 Secs

1.0000

.0000

200 RW Rate

SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

Inverse Time

Setpoint Sum 1

2, 4

208 RW Ratio 0

RW Ratio 1

412 RW Ratio 1

413 RW Ratio 2

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

RW Ratio 2 (A3)

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

Speed Loop

187 RO Raw Input

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::5703 SUPPORT

5703

xxx.xx %

0.00%

Output

125 RO Ready

DIAGNOSTICS

Alarms

0 : False 1 : True

False

dh Output

201 RW Regen Mode

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

Current Loop

0 : 2Q (Non-regen)

1 : 4Q (Regen)

2Q(Non-regen)

541 RW REM Trip Delay

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

Alarms

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

10.0 Secs

MN792

Parameter Table B-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

540 RW REM Trip Inhibit

535 RW REM.SEQ.ENABLE

536 RW REM.SEQUENCE

542 RO Remote Trip

255 RW Reset Value

422 RW Reset Value

189 RO Scaled Input

SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O

ALARM STATUS

Alarms

0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited Enabled

Aux I/O

Alarms

0 : False, 1 : True

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

0 : False 1 : True

-300.00 to 300.00 %

xxx.xx %

FALSE

0x0000

FALSE

0.00%

p2 Output, 1

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Raise/Lower

Ramps

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::5703 SUPPORT

5703

Output, 2

537 RO SEQ Status

171 RW Setpoint

SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O

Aux I/O

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

0.00 to 100.00 %

0x0C03

ox Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS

Field Control

100.00%

512 RW Setpoint

519 RW Setpoint

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP Op Station

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00%

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

Op Station

Speed Loop

5703

289 RW Setpoint 1

290 RO Setpoint 2 (A3)

291 RW Setpoint 3

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

-105.00 to 105.00 %

xxx.xx %

0.00%

0.0000

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

-105.00 to 105.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

RW Setpoint 4

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

132 RW SETPT. RATIO

133 RW SETPT. SIGN

292 RW SIGN 0

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::5703 SUPPORT

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::5703 SUPPORT

5703

0 : Negative 1 : Positive Positive

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

Setpoint Sum 1

Speed Loop

0 : Negative 1 : Positive Positive

RW Sign 1

RW Sign 2 (A3)

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)

Digout 1 (B5)

Digout 2 (B6)

Digout 3 (B7)

0 to 549

cp 2, 3

cq 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)

122

125

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)

2, 3

134 RW Source Tag

251 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE 5703 5703

dq 2, 3

gz 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)

Analog Output 1 0 to 549

252 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)

Analog Output 2 0 to 549

h0 2, 3

306 RW Source Tag

364 RW Source Tag

SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL

Standstill

Link 1

0 to 549

2, 3, 4

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 1

k4 2, 3

366 RW Source Tag

368 RW Source Tag

370 RW Source Tag

454 RW Source Tag

456 RW Source Tag

458 RW Source Tag

460 RW Source Tag

467 RW Source Tag

469 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 2

Link 2

0 to 549

k6 2, 3

k8 2, 3

ka 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 3

Link 3

0 to 549

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 4

Link 4

0 to 549

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 5

Link 5

0 to 549

2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 6

Link 6

0 to 549

mo 2, 3

mq 2, 3

ms 2, 3

mz 2, 3

n1 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 7

Link 7

0 to 549

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 8

Link 8

0 to 549

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 9

Link 9

0 to 549

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 10

Link 10

Current Profile

0 to 549

RW SPD BRK1 (LOW)

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE

0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

100.00%

B-16 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

269 RW SPD BRK1 (LOW)

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

Advanced

0.00 to 100.00 %

1.00%

RW SPD BRK2 (HIGH)

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE

Current Profile

Advanced

0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

0.00 to 100.00 %

100.00%

5.00%

270 RW SPD BRK2 (HIGH)

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

547 RW SPD.FBK.FILTER

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Menus

0.000 to 1.000

0.000

RW SPD.INT.TIME

Speed Loop

Advanced

0.001 to 30.000 Secs

0.500 Secs

272 RW SPD.INT.TIME

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

RW SPD.PROP.GAIN

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Speed Loop

Calibration

Stop Rates

Diagnostics

Alarms

0.00 to 200.00

0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

xxx.xx %

180 RW SPDFBK ALM LEVEL SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

50.00%

0.00%

-0.01%

RO Speed Demand

DIAGNOSTICS

ch Output

297 RO Speed Error

xxx.xx %

Output

RW SPEED FBK ALARM SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

RW SPEED FBK SELECT CONFIGURE DRIVE

0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited Enabled

Speed Loop

0 : Arm Volts Fbk

1 : Analog Tach

2 : Encoder

Arm Volts Fbk

3 : Encoder/Analog

472 RO SPEED FBK STATE

207 RO Speed Feedback

549 RO Speed LOOP O/P

ALARM STATUS

DIAGNOSTICS

Unallocated

Diagnostics

Speed Loop

0 : False 1 : True

xxx.xx %

False

0.01%

0.00%

289

n4 Output

fr Output

p9 Output, 2

-200 to 200 %

xxx.xx %

RO Speed Setpoint

Output

2, 3

294 RW SPT SUM 1 DEST

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM Setpoint Sum 1

Output

0 to 549

263 RW Stall Threshold

28 RW Stall Trip

RO SPT SUM OUTPUT

DIAGNOSTICS

Setpoint Sum 1

Calibration

Alarms

xxx.xx %

0.00%

ce Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

ALARM STATUS

0.00 to 200.00 %

95.00%

0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited Inhibited

112 RO Stall Trip

Alarms

0 : OK 1 : Failed

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

d4 Output

224 RW Stall Trip Delay

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL

DIAGNOSTICS

Calibration

Standstill

10.0 Secs

RW Standstill Logic

RO Start (C3)

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

bw Output

217 RW Stop Limit

SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES

DIAGNOSTICS

Stop Rates

Unallocated

Diagnostics

Jog/Slack

Tec Option

0.0 to 600.0 Secs

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0.00 to 100.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

xxx.xx % (h)

60.0 Secs

10.0 Secs

2.00%

True

RW Stop Time

RW Stop Zero Speed

374 RO System Reset

308 RO Tach Input

253 RW Take Up 1

254 RW Take Up 2

506 RO TEC Option Fault

ke Output

DIAGNOSTICS

0.0%

Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK

SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION

-100.00 to 100.00 %

5.00%

-5.00%

None

0 : None

o2 Output

1 : Parameter

2 : Type Mismatch

3 : Self Test

4 : Hardware

5 : Missing

501 RW TEC Option IN 1

502 RW TEC Option IN 2

503 RW TEC Option IN 3

504 RW TEC Option IN 4

505 RW TEC Option IN 5

508 RO TEC Option OUT 1

509 RO TEC Option OUT 2

500 RW TEC Option Type

SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION

Tec Option

-32768 to 32767

xxxxx

o4 Output, 1

o5 Output, 1

xxxxx

0 : None

1 : Rs485

None

2 : Profibus Dp

3 : Link

4 : Device Net

5 : Can Open

6 : Lonworks

7 : Type 7

507 RO TEC Option VER

SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION

Tec Option

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

0x0000

o3 Output, 1

MN792

Parameter Table B-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

DIAGNOSTICS

ALARM STATUS

WB Block

Calibration

Unallocated

Digout 1 (B5)

Range

Factory Setting

0.0%

MN Notes

RO Terminal Volts

xxx.xx % (h)

Output

337 RO Thermistor State

195 RW Threshold (>)

0 : False 1 : True

-300.00 to 300.00 %

False

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)

0.00%

196 RW Threshold (>)

197 RW Threshold (>)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)

Digout 2 (B6)

Digout 3 (B7)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0.00%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)

305 RW Trip Reset

SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

DIAGNOSTICS

Alarms

0 : False 1 : True

xxx.xx %

TRUE

0.00%

0 RPM

0.00%

0.03%

0.0%

181 RO Unfil. Field FBK

Calibration

Speed Loop

Calibration

Output

RO UNFIL.ENCODER

RO UNFIL.SPD.ERROR

RO UNFIL.SPD.FBK

DIAGNOSTICS

xxxxx RPM

xxx.xx %

bn Output

bs Output

bq Output

bm Output

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx %

RO UNFIL.TACH INPUT DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx % (h)

330 RW UNIT ID (UID)

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT

System Port P3 0x0000 to 0x000F

0x0000

618 RO Up To Field

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL

Field Control

Digital Input 1

0 : False 1 : True

False

Output

104 RW Value For False

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0.00%

107 RW Value For False

110 RW Value For False

103 RW Value For True

106 RW Value For True

109 RW Value For True

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)

Digital Input 2

Digital Input 3

Digital Input 1

Digital Input 2

Digital Input 3

Unallocated

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0.00%

0.01%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)

155 RO Version Number

543 RW Zero CAL Inputs

285 RW ZERO IAD LEVEL

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)

CONFIGURE DRIVE

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

Up To Action Requested

0.00 to 200.00 %

eb Output

p3 1, 2, 3, 4

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ZERO SPD. QUENCH

Advanced

1.50%

0.50%

284 RW ZERO SPD. LEVEL

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ZERO SPD. QUENCH

0.00 to 200.00 %

RW Zero SPD. Offset

RW Zero Threshold

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL

Calibration

Standstill

-5.00 to 5.00 %

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00%

2.00%

B-18 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Parameter Values Continued R/W: RO = Read Only, RW = Read / Write

Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

0x0000

MN Notes

d8 Output

d7 Output

116 RO Health Store

115 RO Health Word

528 RO Last Alarm

ALARM STATUS

Alarms

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

Alarms

0x0200

Alarms

0x0000 : No Active Alarms No Active Alarms oo Output, 1

0x0001 : Over Speed

0x0002 : Missing Pulse

0x0004 : Field Over I

0x0008 : Heatsink Trip

0x0010 : Thermistor

0x0020 : Over Volts (VA)

0x0040 : SPD Feed back

0x0080 : Encoder Failed

0x0100 : Field Failed

0x0200 : 3 Phase Failed

0x0400 : Phase Lock

0x0800 : 5703 RCV Error

0x1000 : Stall Trip

0x2000 : Over I Trip

0xf005 : External Trip

0x8000 : Accts Failed

0xf001 : Autotune Error

0xf002 : Autotune Aborted

0xf200 : Config Enabled

0xf400 : No Keypad

0xf006 : Remote Trip

0xff05 : PCB Version

0xff06 : Product Code

542 RO Remote Trip

ALARM STATUS

Alarms

0 : False 1 : True

0 : OK 1 : Failed

0 : False 1 : True

2.0 to 15.0 AMPS

0 : Off 1 : On

FALSE

False

p2 Output, 1

n4 Output

d4 Output

472 RO SPEED FBK STATE

112 RO Stall Trip

ALARM STATUS

Unallocated

Alarms

ALARM STATUS

337 RO Thermistor State

523 RW Armature Current

ALARM STATUS

Unallocated

Calibration

Current Loop

Unallocated

Current Loop

Calibration

Speed Loop

Calibration

Field Control

False

2.0 Amps

Off

Output

CONFIGURE DRIVE

RO Autotune

Output, 1

RW Configure Enable

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

RW CUR.LIMIT/SCALER CONFIGURE DRIVE

0.00 to 200.00 %

10 to 5000

90.00%

1024

RW Encoder Lines

RW Encoder RPM

RW ENCODER SIGN

CONFIGURE DRIVE

0 to 6000 RPM

1750 RPM

0 : Negative 1 : Positive Positive

524 RW Field Current

0.2 to 4.0 AMPS

0.2 Amps

209 RW FLD.CTRL MODE

0 : Voltage Control

1 : Current Control

Voltage Control

210 RW FLD.VOLTS RATIO

521 RW NOM Motor Volts

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Field Control

Calibration

0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

100 to 875 Volts

67.0%

500 Volts

0.500 Secs

RW SPD.INT.TIME

Speed Loop

0.001 to 30.000 Secs

0.00 to 200.00

RW SPD.PROP.GAIN

RW SPEED FBK SELECT CONFIGURE DRIVE

0 : Arm Volts Fbk

1 : Analog Tach

2 : Encoder

Arm Volts Fbk

3 : Encoder/Analog

543 RW Zero CAL Inputs

CONFIGURE DRIVE

DIAGNOSTICS

Up To Action Requested

xxx.xx % (h)

p3 1, 2, 3, 4

bp Output

bv Output

be Output

RO ACTUAL NEG I LIM

RO ACTUAL POS I LIM

RO ANIN 1 (A2)

Diagnostics

-90.0%

90.00%

0.00V

10.00V

0.00V

0 Volts

Diagnostics

xxx.xx % (h)

Analog Input 1

Analog Input 2

Analog Input 3

Analog Input 4

Analog Input 5

xxx.xx VOLTS

RO ANIN 2 (A3)

Output

RO ANIN 3 (A4)

bg Output

bh Output

RO ANIN 4 (A5)

RO ANIN 5 (A6)

Output

RO ANOUT 1 (A7)

RO ANOUT 2 (A8)

Analog Output 1 xxx.xx VOLTS (h)

Analog Output 2 xxx.xx VOLTS (h)

Unallocated

bk Output

Output

605 RO ARM Volts FBK

MN792

Parameter Table B-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

DIAGNOSTICS

WB Block

Current Loop

Standstill

Range

Factory Setting

False

True

MN Notes

b6 Output

c7 Output

c6 Output

c5 Output

bo Output

RO At Current Limit

0 : False 1 : True

xxx.xx % (h)

0 : False 1 : True

0 : Off 1 : On

xxx.xx %

RO At Standstill

RO At Zero Setpoint

RO At Zero Speed

RO BACK EMF

Standstill

True

Standstill

True

Calibration

Stop Rates

Unallocated

Diagnostics

Current Loop

Diagnostics

Digital Input 1

Digital Input 2

Digital Input 3

Aux I/O

0.0%

FALSE

Off

525 RO Coast Stop

cb Output

ib Output

oy Output, 1, 3

ia Output

Output

RO Contactor Closed

299 RO Current Demand

538 RO Current FBK.Amps

298 RO Current Feedback

0.00%

0.0 Amps

0.00%

Off

xxxx.x AMPS

xxx.xx %

RO DIGIN 1 (C6)

RO DIGIN 2 (C7)

RO DIGIN 3 (C8)

RO Digital Input C4

RO Digital Input C5

RO DIGOUT 1 (B5)

RO DIGOUT 2 (B6)

RO DIGOUT 3 (B7)

RO Drive Enable

0 : Off 1 : On

bz Output

c0 Output

c1 Output

bx Output

by Output

c2 Output

c3 Output

c4 Output

Off

Aux I/O

Digout 1 (B5)

Digout 2 (B6)

Digout 3 (B7)

Diagnostics

Unallocated

Diagnostics

Field Control

Diagnostics

Current Loop

Field Control

Alarms

Off

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

Output

376 RO Drive Running

82 RO Drive Start

0 : False 1 : True

0 : Off 1 : On

xxxxx RPM

False

Off

kg Output

ca Output

206 RO Encoder

0 RPM

0.00%

Output

183 RO Field Demand

169 RO Field Enabled

300 RO FIELD I FBK.

539 RO Field I FBK.AMPS

xxx.xx %

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

ep Output

ic Output

oz Output, 1, 3

f4 Output

xxx.xx %

0.00%

0.0 Amps

0.00 Deg

True

xxxx.x AMPS

xxx.xx DEG

0 : False 1 : True

xxx.xx % (h)

xxx.xx %

184 RO FLD.FIRING ANGLE DIAGNOSTICS

122 RO Health LED DIAGNOSTICS

RO IaDmd UNFILTERED DIAGNOSTICS

de Output

bu Output

Current Loop

Inverse Time

Diagnostics

Jog/Slack

0.0%

RO IaFbk UNFILTERED

DIAGNOSTICS

0.0%

Output

203 RO Inverse Time O/P

88 RO NEG. I CLAMP

200.0%

-90.0%

Stop

Output, 2, 4

xxx.xx % (h)

cg Output

212 RO Operating Mode

0 : Stop

1 : Stop

Output

2 : Jog Sp. 1

3 : Jog Sp. 2

4 : Run

5 : Take Up Sp. 1

6 : Take Up Sp. 2

7 : Crawl

416 RO PID Clamped

415 RO PID Error

417 RO PID Output

DIAGNOSTICS

PID

0 : False 1 : True

xxx.xx %

False

0.00%

90.0%

False

0.00%

False

0.00%

-0.01%

0.01%

0.00%

Off

Output

PID

xxx.xx %

RO POS. I CLAMP

RO Program Stop

Diagnostics

Stop Rates

Raise/Lower

Ramps

xxx.xx % (h)

0 : False 1 : True

xxx.xx %

c8 Output

hc Output

cd Output

d5 Output

dh Output

ch Output

264 RO Raise/Lower O/P

85 RO Ramp Output

xxx.xx %

113 RO Ramping

125 RO Ready

Ramps

0 : False 1 : True

xxx.xx %

Alarms

RO Speed Demand

Stop Rates

Diagnostics

Speed Loop

Setpoint Sum 1

Aux I/O

297 RO Speed Error

207 RO Speed Feedback

549 RO Speed LOOP O/P

xxx.xx %

Output

xxx.xx %

-200 to 200 %

xxx.xx %

p9 Output, 2

br Output

RO Speed Setpoint

RO SPT SUM OUTPUT

RO Start (C3)

xxx.xx %

ce Output

bw Output

ke Output

0 : Off 1 : On

0 : False 1 : True

xxx.xx % (h)

xxx.xx %

374 RO System Reset

308 RO Tach Input

Unallocated

Diagnostics

Calibration

True

0.0%

Output

RO Terminal Volts

0.0%

181 RO Unfil. Field FBK

0.00%

B-20 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

DIAGNOSTICS

WB Block

Calibration

Speed Loop

Calibration

Menus

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

bn Output

bs Output

bq Output

bm Output

RO UNFIL.ENCODER

xxxxx RPM

xxx.xx %

xxx.xx % (h)

0 RPM

RO UNFIL.SPD.ERROR

RO UNFIL.SPD.FBK

0.00%

0.03%

RO UNFIL.TACH INPUT DIAGNOSTICS

0.0%

RW FULL MENUS

MENUS

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

Up To Action Requested

354 RW Parameter Save

121 RW Change Password

120 RW Enter Password

155 RO Version Number

130 RW Mode

PARAMETER SAVE

PASSWORD

Unallocated

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

0x0000

PASSWORD

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)

Unallocated

eb Output

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

System Port P3 0 : Disabled

1 : 5703 Master

2 : 5703 Slave

3 : CELite (EIASCII)

198 RW P3 Baud Rate

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

0:300 1:600 2:1200

3:2400 4:4800 5:9600

6:19200

9600

187 RO Raw Input

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::5703 SUPPORT

5703

xxx.xx %

0.00%

0.0000

Output

189 RO Scaled Input

132 RW SETPT. RATIO

133 RW SETPT. SIGN

332 RW Error Report

329 RW GROUP ID (GID)

330 RW UNIT ID (UID)

506 RO TEC Option Fault

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::5703 SUPPORT

xxx.xx %

Output, 2

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::5703 SUPPORT

-3.0000 to 3.0000

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::5703 SUPPORT

0 : Negative 1 : Positive Positive

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT

System Port P3 0x0000 to 0xFFFF

System Port P3 0x0000 to 0x0007

System Port P3 0x0000 to 0x000F

0x00C0

0x0000

None

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT

SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION

Tec Option

0 : None

o2 Output

1 : Parameter

2 : Type Mismatch

3 : Self Test

4 : Hardware

5 : Missing

501 RW TEC Option IN 1

502 RW TEC Option IN 2

503 RW TEC Option IN 3

504 RW TEC Option IN 4

505 RW TEC Option IN 5

508 RO TEC Option OUT 1

509 RO TEC Option OUT 2

500 RW TEC Option Type

SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION

Tec Option

-32768 to 32767

xxxxx

o4 Output, 1

o5 Output, 1

xxxxx

0 : None

1 : Rs485

None

2 : Profibus Dp

3 : Link

4 : Device Net

5 : Can Open

6 : Lonworks

7 : Type 7

507 RO TEC Option VER

128 RW ANOUT 1

SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION

SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O

Tec Option

Aux I/O

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

-100.00 to 100.00 %

0 : Off 1 : On

0x0000

0.00%

Off

o3 Output, 1

129 RW ANOUT 2

RW AUX DIGOUT 1

RW AUX DIGOUT 2

RW AUX DIGOUT 3

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

168 RW Aux Enable

0 : Off 1 : On

MN792

Parameter Table B-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

227 RW AUX JOG

161 RW AUX START

497 RO Enable

SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

Output

496 RO Jog/Slack

535 RW REM.SEQ.ENABLE

536 RW REM.SEQUENCE

537 RO SEQ Status

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

ns Output

Aux I/O

0 : False, 1 : True

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

0.9800 to 1.1000

FALSE

0x0000

0x0C03

1.0000

Bipolar

Aux I/O

ox Output

RW Analog TACH CAL

RW Armature I (A9)

Calibration

0 : UNIPOLAR

1 : BIPOLAR

RW Armature V CAL.

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

Calibration

0.9800 to 1.1000

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00 to 200.00 %

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

0.00 to 200.00 %

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

-5.00 to 5.00 %

1.0000

182 RW Field I CAL.

21 RW IR Compensation

Calibration

1.0000

Calibration

0.00%

188 RW Over Speed Level

541 RW REM Trip Delay

Calibration

125.00%

10.0 Secs

50.00%

95.00%

10.0 Secs

0.00%

Alarms

180 RW SPDFBK ALM LEVEL SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

Calibration

263 RW Stall Threshold

224 RW Stall Trip Delay

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

Calibration

RW Zero SPD. Offset

RW Additional DEM

RW Bipolar Clamps

Calibration

Current Loop

-200.00 to 200.00 %

0.00%

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

137 RW Discontinuous

136 RW Feed Forward

119 RW I DMD. ISOLATE

0.00 to 200.00 %

0.10 to 50.00

12.00%

2.00

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

RW INT. GAIN

0.00 to 200.00

3.50

421 RW MAIN CURR. LIMIT

527 RO Master Bridge

0.00 to 200.00 %

0 : Off 1 : On

200.00%

Off

on Output, 1

301 RW POS. I CLAMP

16 RW PROP. GAIN

201 RW Regen Mode

RW NEG. I CLAMP

-100.00 to 100.00 %

0.00 to 200.00

0.00%

100.00%

45.00

0 : 2Q (Non-regen)

1 : 4Q (Regen)

2Q(Non-regen)

RW IMAX BRK1(SPD1)

RW IMAX BRK2(SPD2)

RW SPD BRK1 (LOW)

RW SPD BRK2 (HIGH)

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL

Current Profile

Field Control

0.00 to 200.00 % (h)

0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

200.00%

100.00%

170 RW Field Enable

617 RW Field I Thresh

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

0.00 to 100.00 %

80.00%

Quench

186 RW FLD. QUENCH

MODE

0 : Quench 1 : Standby

185 RW FLD.QUENCH

DELAY

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL

Field Control

0.0 to 600.0 Secs

0.0 Secs

618 RO Up To Field

172 RW INT. GAIN

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL

Field Control

0 : False 1 : True

0.00 to 100.00

False

1.28

Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS

173 RW PROP. GAIN

171 RW Setpoint

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS

Field Control

0.00 to 100.00

0.00 to 100.00 %

10 to 5000

0.10

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS

100.00%

100

192 RW BEMF FBK LAG

191 RW BEMF FBK LEAD

177 RW EMF GAIN

176 RW EMF LAG

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

10 to 5000

100

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

0.00 to 100.00

0.00 to 200.00

0.10 to 50.00

0.30

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

40.00

2.00

175 RW EMF LEAD

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

174 RW FLD. WEAK ENABLE SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

B-22 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

178 RW MAX VOLTS

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

Field Control

0.00 to 100.00 %

100.00%

179 RW MIN FLD.CURRENT SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

Field Control

0.00 to 100.00 %

10.00%

111 RW 5703 RCV ERROR

SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

Alarms

0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited Enabled

0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited Inhibited

RW Encoder Alarm

RW Field Fail

Alarms

540 RW REM Trip Inhibit

Alarms

RW SPEED FBK ALARM SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

Alarms

RW Stall Trip

SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME

SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK

Alarms

305 RW Trip Reset

204 RW Aiming Point

199 RW Delay

Alarms

0 : False 1 : True

TRUE

Inverse Time

Jog/Slack

Op Station

0.00 to 103.00 %

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

-100.00 to 100.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

103.00%

10.0 Secs

60.0 Secs

10.00%

20.00 %

-5.00 %

FALSE

2, 4

200 RW Rate

225 RW Crawl Speed

218 RW Jog Speed 1

219 RW Jog Speed 2

228 RW Mode

355 RW Ramp Rate

253 RW Take Up 1

254 RW Take Up 2

514 RW Ramp Accel Time

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

-100.00 to 100.00 %

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

1.0 Secs

5.00%

-5.00%

10.0 Secs

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::LOCAL

RAMP

515 RW Ramp Decel Time

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::LOCAL

RAMP

Op Station

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

10.0 Secs

513 RW Jog Setpoint

511 RW Local Key Enable

512 RW Setpoint

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP Op Station

0.00 to 100.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

0.00 to 100.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

5.00%

TRUE

0.00%

TRUE

516 RW Forward

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

Op Station

520 RW Jog Setpoint

517 RW Local

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

0.00 to 100.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

0.00 to 100.00 %

5.00%

TRUE

FALSE

0.00%

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

518 RW Program

519 RW Setpoint

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

257 RW Decrease Rate

307 RW External Reset

256 RW Increase Rate

262 RW Lower Input

259 RW Max Value

258 RW Min Value

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Raise/Lower

Ramps

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0 : False 1 : True

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0 : False 1 : True

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0.00 to 100.00 %

10.0 Secs

FALSE

10.0 Secs

FALSE

100.00%

-100.00%

FALSE

261 RW Raise Input

255 RW Reset Value

266 RW % S-RAMP

287 RW Auto Reset

0.00%

2.50%

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

RW Constant Accel

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

288 RW External Reset

620 RW Invert

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

0 : False 1 : True

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0 : Off 1 : On

False

126 RW MIN SPEED

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

0.00%

10.0 Secs

Off

RW Ramp Accel Time

RW Ramp Decel Time

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

118 RW Ramp Hold

RW Ramp Input

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

-105.00 to 105.00 %

0.00 to 100.00 %

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

-3.0000 to 3.0000

0.00%

0.50%

0.00%

0.0%

286 RW RAMPING THRESH. SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

422 RW Reset Value

131 RW Deadband Width

420 RW Divider 0

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

Ramps

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

Setpoint Sum 1

1.0000

419 RW Divider 1

MN792

Parameter Table B-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu Continued

Tag R/W Name

309 RW Input 0

100 RW Input 1

423 RW Input 2

375 RW Limit

208 RW Ratio 0

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

Setpoint Sum 1

-200.00 to 200.00 %

0.00 to 200.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

0.00%

105.00%

1.0000

RW Ratio 1

292 RW SIGN 0

RW Sign 1

1.0000

0 : Negative 1 : Positive Positive

401 RW DERIVATIVE TC

418 RW Divider 1

414 RW Divider 2

408 RW Enable

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

0.000 to 10.000 Secs

-3.0000 to 3.0000

0.000Secs

1.0000

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

403 RW FILTER T.C.

410 RW Input 1

0.000 to 10.000 Secs

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0 : Off 1 : On

0.100 Secs

0.00%

Off

411 RW Input 2

409 RW INT. DEFEAT

402 RW INT.TIME.CONST

0.01 to 100.00 Secs

0.00 to 100.00 %

0 to 4

5.00 Secs

20.00%

474 RW MIN PROFILE GAIN SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

473 RW Mode

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

406 RW Negative Limit

-105.00 to 0.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

0.00 to 105.00 %

xxxx.x

-100.00%

0.2000

100.00%

0.0

407 RW O/P SCALER(TRIM) SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

405 RW Positive Limit

475 RO Profiled Gain

404 RW PROP. GAIN

412 RW Ratio 1

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

n7 Output

0.0 to 100.0

1.0

-3.0000 to 3.0000

0 : Off 1 : On

1.0000

Off

413 RW Ratio 2

202 RW INT. DEFEAT

547 RW SPD.FBK.FILTER

274 RW I GAIN IN RAMP

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP

Speed Loop

Menus

0.000 to 1.000

0.000

1.0000

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED

Advanced

0.0000 to 2.0000

273 RW POS. LOOP P GAIN SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED

Advanced

-200.00 to 200.00 %

0 to 3

0.00%

268 RW Mode

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

Advanced

271 RW PROP. GAIN

269 RW SPD BRK1 (LOW)

270 RW SPD BRK2 (HIGH)

272 RW SPD.INT.TIME

285 RW ZERO IAD LEVEL

284 RW ZERO SPD. LEVEL

357 RW Max Demand

358 RW Min Demand

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

Advanced

0.00 to 200.00

5.00

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

Advanced

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.001 to 30.000 Secs

0.00 to 200.00 %

0.00 to 105.00 %

-105.00 to 105.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

-105.00 to 105.00 %

xxx.xx %

1.00%

5.00%

0.500 Secs

1.50%

0.50%

105.00%

-105.00%

.0000

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

Advanced

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

Advanced

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ZERO SPD. QUENCH

Advanced

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ZERO SPD. QUENCH

Advanced

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

Speed Loop

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

RW Ratio 2 (A3)

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

289 RW Setpoint 1

290 RO Setpoint 2 (A3)

291 RW Setpoint 3

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

0.00%

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

-105.00 to 105.00 %

RW Setpoint 4

RW Sign 2 (A3)

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

0 : Negative 1 : Positive Positive

B-24 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

306 RW Source Tag

SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL

SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES

Standstill

0 to 549

2, 3, 4

RW Standstill Logic

RW Zero Threshold

Standstill

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

Standstill

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0 to 200.00

2.00%

302 RW Contactor Delay

594 RW CURR Decay Rate

Stop Rates

Analog Input 1

1.0 Secs

0.00

216 RW PROG STOP LIMIT

26 RW PROG Stop Time

217 RW Stop Limit

RW PROG STOP I LIM

0.00 to 200.00 %

0.0 to 600.0 Secs

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0.0 to 600.0 Secs

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0.00 to 100.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

100.00%

60.0 Secs

0.1 Secs

60.0 Secs

10.0 Secs

2.00%

RW Stop Time

RW Stop Zero Speed

230 RW Calibration

246 RW Destination Tag

231 RW Max Value

232 RW Min Value

233 RW Calibration

234 RW Max Value

235 RW Min Value

493 RO Output

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)

1.0000

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)

Analog Input 1

Analog Input 2

Analog Input 3

Analog Input 4

Analog Input 5

0 to 549

100

gu 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

-300.00 to 300.00 %

xxx.xx %

100.00%

-100.00%

1.0000

100.00%

-100.00%

0.00%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)

np Output, 2

236 RW Calibration

249 RW Destination Tag

237 RW Max Value

238 RW Min Value

239 RW Calibration

250 RW Destination Tag

240 RW Max Value

241 RW Min Value

242 RW Calibration

247 RW Destination Tag

243 RW Max Value

244 RW Min Value

245 RW % TO GET 10V

362 RW Modulus

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)

-3.0000 to 3.0000

0 to 549

1.0000

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)

gx 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

0 to 549

100.00%

-100.00%

1.0000

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)

gy 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

0 to 549

100.00%

-100.00%

1.0000

301

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)

gv 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

200.00%

-200.00%

100.00%

FALSE

0.00%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)

Analog Output 1 -300.00 to 300.00 %

Analog Output 1 0 : False 1 : True

Analog Output 1 -100.00 to 100.00 %

Analog Output 1 0 to 549

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)

464 RW Offset

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)

251 RW Source Tag

248 RW % TO GET 10V

363 RW Modulus

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)

gz 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)

Analog Output 2 -300.00 to 300.00 %

Analog Output 2 0 : False 1 : True

100.00%

FALSE

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)

MN792

Parameter Table B-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

465 RW Offset

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)

Analog Output 2 -100.00 to 100.00 %

0.00%

252 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)

Analog Output 2 0 to 549

h0 2, 3

400 RW PID O/P DEST

260 RW Raise/Lower Dest

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM PID Output

0 to 549

2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM Raise/Lower

Output

293 RW RAMP O/P DEST

294 RW SPT SUM 1 DEST

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM Ramp Output

0 to 549

291

289

2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM Setpoint Sum 1

Output

135 RW Destination Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE 5703 Scaled 5703 InĆ 0 to 549

put

2, 3

134 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE 5703 5703

0 to 549

dq 2, 3

cu 2, 3

102 RW Destination Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)

Digital Input 1

104 RW Value For False

103 RW Value For True

105 RW Destination Tag

107 RW Value For False

106 RW Value For True

108 RW Destination Tag

110 RW Value For False

109 RW Value For True

494 RW Destination Tag

495 RW Destination Tag

359 RW Inverted

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)

Digital Input 1

Digital Input 2

Digital Input 3

Dig in C4

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0 to 549

0.00%

0.01%

118

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)

2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0 to 549

0.00%

0.01%

119

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)

d0 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0 to 549

0.00%

0.01%

496

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C4

nq 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C5

Dig in C5

0 to 549

497

2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)

Digout 1 (B5)

Digout 2 (B6)

Digout 3 (B7)

Link 1

0 : False 1 : True

0 to 549

FALSE

TRUE

RW Modulus

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)

RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)

cp 2, 3

195 RW Threshold (>)

360 RW Inverted

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

0 to 549

0.00%

FALSE

TRUE

122

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)

RW Modulus

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)

RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)

cq 2, 3

196 RW Threshold (>)

361 RW Inverted

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

0 to 549

0.00%

FALSE

TRUE

125

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)

RW Modulus

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)

RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)

2, 3

197 RW Threshold (>)

365 RW Destination Tag

364 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0 to 549

0.00%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 1

k5 2, 3

k4 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 1

Link 1

0 to 549

B-26 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

470 RW Destination Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 10

Link 10

0 to 549

n2 2, 3

469 RW Source Tag

367 RW Destination Tag

366 RW Source Tag

369 RW Destination TaG

368 RW Source Tag

371 RW Destination Tag

370 RW Source Tag

455 RW Destination Tag

454 RW Source Tag

457 RW Destination Tag

456 RW Source Tag

459 RW Destination Tag

458 RW Source Tag

461 RW Destination Tag

460 RW Source Tag

468 RW Destination Tag

467 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 10

Link 10

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Link 5

Link 6

Link 7

Link 8

Link 9

0 to 549

n1 2, 3

k7 2, 3

k6 2, 3

k9 2, 3

k8 2, 3

kb 2, 3

ka 2, 3

mn 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 2

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 2

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 4

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 4

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 5

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 5

2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 6

mp 2, 3

mo 2, 3

mr 2, 3

mq 2, 3

mt 2, 3

ms 2, 3

n0 2, 3

mz 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 6

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 7

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 7

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 8

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 8

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 9

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 9

123 RW Peek Data

124 RW Peek Scale

SYSTEM::PEEK

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

-300.00 to 300.00

0x0078

8.00

MN792

Parameter Table B-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Parameter Values Continued R/W: RO = Read Only, RW = Read / Write

Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

CONFIGURE DRIVE

PASSWORD

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

p3 1, 2, 3, 4

543 RW Zero CAL Inputs

121 RW Change Password

120 RW Enter Password

198 RW P3 Baud Rate

Up To Action Requested

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

0x0000

9600

PASSWORD

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

0:300 1:600 2:1200

3:2400 4:4800 5:9600

6:19200

123 RW Peek Data

124 RW Peek Scale

187 RO Raw Input

SYSTEM::PEEK

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

-300.00 to 300.00

xxx.xx %

0x0078

8.00

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::5703 SUPPORT

5703

0.00%

Output

189 RO Scaled Input

132 RW SETPT. RATIO

133 RW SETPT. SIGN

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::5703 SUPPORT

xxx.xx %

0.00%

0.0000

Output, 2

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::5703 SUPPORT

-3.0000 to 3.0000

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::5703 SUPPORT

0 : Negative 1 : Positive Positive

134 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE 5703 5703

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ Advanced

VANCED

273 RW POS. LOOP P GAIN SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED

0 to 549

dq 2, 3

274 RW I GAIN IN RAMP

0.0000 to 2.0000

1.0000

Advanced

-200.00 to 200.00 %

0 to 3

0.00%

268 RW Mode

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

271 RW PROP. GAIN

269 RW SPD BRK1 (LOW)

270 RW SPD BRK2 (HIGH)

272 RW SPD.INT.TIME

285 RW ZERO IAD LEVEL

284 RW ZERO SPD. LEVEL

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

0.00 to 200.00

5.00

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.001 to 30.000 Secs

0.00 to 200.00 %

1.00%

5.00%

0.500 Secs

1.50%

0.50%

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ADAPTION

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ZERO SPD. QUENCH

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ

VANCED::ZERO SPD. QUENCH

116 RO Health Store

115 RO Health Word

528 RO Last Alarm

ALARM STATUS

Alarms

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

0x0000

0x0200

d8 Output

d7 Output

0x0000 : No Active Alarms No Active Alarms oo Output, 1

0x0001 : Over Speed

0x0002 : Missing Pulse

0x0004 : Field Over I

0x0008 : Heatsink Trip

0x0010 : Thermistor

0x0020 : Over Volts (VA)

0x0040 : SPD Feed back

0x0080 : Encoder Failed

0x0100 : Field Failed

0x0200 : 3 Phase Failed

0x0400 : Phase Lock

0x0800 : 5703 RCV Error

0x1000 : Stall Trip

0x2000 : Over I Trip

0xf005 : External Trip

0x8000 : Accts Failed

0xf001 : Autotune Error

0xf002 : Autotune Aborted

0xf200 : Config Enabled

0xf400 : No Keypad

0xf006 : Remote Trip

0xff05 : PCB Version

0xff06 : Product Code

B-28 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

FALSE

MN Notes

542 RO Remote Trip

112 RO Stall Trip

ALARM STATUS

Alarms

0 : False 1 : True

0 : OK 1 : Failed

0 : False 1 : True

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

p2 Output, 1

ALARM STATUS

Alarms

d4 Output

122 RO Health LED

125 RO Ready

DIAGNOSTICS

Alarms

True

de Output

DIAGNOSTICS

Alarms

False

dh Output

541 RW REM Trip Delay

111 RW 5703 RCV ERROR

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

Alarms

10.0 Secs

Alarms

0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited Enabled

0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited Inhibited

RW Encoder Alarm

RW Field Fail

Alarms

540 RW REM Trip Inhibit

Alarms

RW SPEED FBK ALARM SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

Alarms

RW Stall Trip

SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS

DIAGNOSTICS

Alarms

305 RW Trip Reset

50 RO ANIN 1 (A2)

Alarms

0 : False 1 : True

xxx.xx VOLTS

TRUE

0.00V

1.0000

Analog Input 1

be Output

230 RW Calibration

246 RW Destination Tag

231 RW Max Value

232 RW Min Value

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)

-3.0000 to 3.0000

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)

Analog Input 1

0 to 549

100

gu 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

100.00%

-100.00%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)

RO ANIN 2 (A3)

DIAGNOSTICS

Analog Input 2

xxx.xx VOLTS

0.00V

Output

233 RW Calibration

234 RW Max Value

235 RW Min Value

493 RO Output

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)

-3.0000 to 3.0000

1.0000

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)

Analog Input 2

-300.00 to 300.00 %

xxx.xx %

100.00%

-100.00%

0.00%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)

np Output, 2

RO ANIN 3 (A4)

DIAGNOSTICS

Analog Input 3

xxx.xx VOLTS

0.00V

bg Output

236 RW Calibration

249 RW Destination Tag

237 RW Max Value

238 RW Min Value

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)

-3.0000 to 3.0000

1.0000

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)

Analog Input 3

0 to 549

gx 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

100.00%

-100.00%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)

RO ANIN 4 (A5)

DIAGNOSTICS

Analog Input 4

xxx.xx VOLTS

0.00V

bh Output

239 RW Calibration

250 RW Destination Tag

240 RW Max Value

241 RW Min Value

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)

-3.0000 to 3.0000

1.0000

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)

Analog Input 4

0 to 549

gy 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

100.00%

-100.00%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)

RO ANIN 5 (A6)

DIAGNOSTICS

Analog Input 5

xxx.xx VOLTS

10.00V

1.0000

Output

242 RW Calibration

247 RW Destination Tag

243 RW Max Value

244 RW Min Value

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)

-3.0000 to 3.0000

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)

Analog Input 5

0 to 549

301

gv 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

200.00%

-200.00%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ

PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)

RO ANOUT 1 (A7)

DIAGNOSTICS

Analog Output 1 xxx.xx VOLTS (h)

Analog Output 1 -300.00 to 300.00 %

0.00V

Output

245 RW % TO GET 10V

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)

100.00%

362 RW Modulus

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)

Analog Output 1 0 : False 1 : True

FALSE

MN792

Parameter Table B-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

464 RW Offset

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)

Analog Output 1 -100.00 to 100.00 %

0.00%

251 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)

Analog Output 1 0 to 549

gz 2, 3

RO ANOUT 2 (A8)

DIAGNOSTICS

Analog Output 2 xxx.xx VOLTS (h)

Analog Output 2 -300.00 to 300.00 %

0.00V

bk Output

248 RW % TO GET 10V

363 RW Modulus

465 RW Offset

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)

100.00%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)

Analog Output 2 0 : False 1 : True

Analog Output 2 -100.00 to 100.00 %

Analog Output 2 0 to 549

FALSE

0.00%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)

252 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ

PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)

h0 2, 3

RO Digital Input C4

RO Digital Input C5

RO Start (C3)

DIAGNOSTICS

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

bx Output

DIAGNOSTICS

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

by Output

DIAGNOSTICS

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

bw Output

128 RW ANOUT 1

129 RW ANOUT 2

SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Aux I/O

-100.00 to 100.00 %

0 : Off 1 : On

0.00%

Off

Aux I/O

RW AUX DIGOUT 1

Aux I/O

RW AUX DIGOUT 2

RW AUX DIGOUT 3

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

168 RW Aux Enable

227 RW AUX JOG

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

161 RW AUX START

497 RO Enable

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

Output

496 RO Jog/Slack

Aux I/O

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

ns Output

535 RW REM.SEQ.ENABLE

536 RW REM.SEQUENCE

537 RO SEQ Status

523 RW Armature Current

Aux I/O

0 : False, 1 : True

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

2.0 to 15.0 AMPS

10 to 5000

FALSE

0x0000

0x0C03

2.0 Amps

1024

Aux I/O

ox Output

Calibration

RW Encoder Lines

RW Encoder RPM

CONFIGURE DRIVE

0 to 6000 RPM

0.2 to 4.0 AMPS

100 to 875 Volts

xxx.xx % (h)

1750 RPM

0.2 Amps

500 Volts

0.0%

0.00%

0 RPM

0.0%

1.0000

Bipolar

524 RW Field Current

CONFIGURE DRIVE

521 RW NOM Motor Volts

CONFIGURE DRIVE

RO BACK EMF

DIAGNOSTICS

bo Output

RO Terminal Volts

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx % (h)

Output

181 RO Unfil. Field FBK

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx %

RO UNFIL.ENCODER

DIAGNOSTICS

xxxxx RPM

bn Output

RO UNFIL.TACH INPUT DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx % (h)

bm Output

RW Analog TACH CAL

RW Armature I (A9)

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

0.9800 to 1.1000

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

0 : UNIPOLAR

1 : BIPOLAR

RW Armature V CAL.

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

Calibration

0.9800 to 1.1000

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00 to 200.00 %

0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

0.00 to 200.00 %

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

-5.00 to 5.00 %

0 : Off 1 : On

1.0000

0.00%

182 RW Field I CAL.

21 RW IR Compensation

188 RW Over Speed Level

Calibration

125.00%

50.00%

95.00%

10.0 Secs

0.00%

180 RW SPDFBK ALM LEVEL SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

Calibration

263 RW Stall Threshold

224 RW Stall Trip Delay

SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Calibration

RW Zero SPD. Offset

RO Autotune

Calibration

Current Loop

Off

Output, 1

RW CUR.LIMIT/SCALER CONFIGURE DRIVE

0.00 to 200.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

xxxx.x AMPS

90.00%

False

RO At Current Limit

DIAGNOSTICS

b6 Output

538 RO Current FBK.Amps

539 RO Field I FBK.AMPS

0.0 Amps

0.0%

oy Output, 1, 3

oz Output, 1, 3

bu Output

xxxx.x AMPS

RO IaDmd UNFILTERED DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx % (h)

RO IaFbk UNFILTERED

RW Additional DEM

RW Bipolar Clamps

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx % (h)

0.0%

Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

-200.00 to 200.00 %

0.00%

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

137 RW Discontinuous

136 RW Feed Forward

0.00 to 200.00 %

0.10 to 50.00

12.00%

2.00

B-30 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

119 RW I DMD. ISOLATE

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP

Current Loop

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

RW INT. GAIN

0.00 to 200.00

3.50

421 RW MAIN CURR. LIMIT

527 RO Master Bridge

0.00 to 200.00 %

0 : Off 1 : On

200.00%

Off

on Output, 1

301 RW POS. I CLAMP

16 RW PROP. GAIN

201 RW Regen Mode

RW NEG. I CLAMP

-100.00 to 100.00 %

0.00 to 200.00

0.00%

100.00%

45.00

0 : 2Q (Non-regen)

1 : 4Q (Regen)

2Q(Non-regen)

RW IMAX BRK1(SPD1)

RW IMAX BRK2(SPD2)

RW SPD BRK1 (LOW)

RW SPD BRK2 (HIGH)

RO ACTUAL NEG I LIM

RO ACTUAL POS I LIM

SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE

DIAGNOSTICS

Current Profile

Diagnostics

Dig in C4

0.00 to 200.00 % (h)

0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

xxx.xx % (h)

200.00%

100.00%

-90.0%

90.00%

0.00%

bp Output

bv Output

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx % (h)

299 RO Current Demand

298 RO Current Feedback

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx %

Output

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx %

0.00%

RO Drive Enable

RO Drive Start

DIAGNOSTICS

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

DIAGNOSTICS

0 : Off 1 : On

xxxxx RPM

xxx.xx %

Off

ca Output

206 RO Encoder

DIAGNOSTICS

0 RPM

0.00%

-90.0%

90.0%

-0.01%

0.01%

0.0%

Output

300 RO FIELD I FBK.

DIAGNOSTICS

RO NEG. I CLAMP

RO POS. I CLAMP

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx % (h)

xxx.xx %

cg Output

DIAGNOSTICS

Output

297 RO Speed Error

207 RO Speed Feedback

308 RO Tach Input

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx %

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx % (h)

0 to 549

494 RW Destination Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C4

496

nq 2, 3

495 RW Destination Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C5

Dig in C5

0 to 549

497

nr 2, 3

RO DIGIN 1 (C6)

DIAGNOSTICS

Digital Input 1

0 : Off 1 : On

0 to 549

Off

bz Output

cu 2, 3

102 RW Destination Tag

104 RW Value For False

103 RW Value For True

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)

Digital Input 1

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0.00%

0.01%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)

RO DIGIN 2 (C7)

DIAGNOSTICS

Digital Input 2

0 : Off 1 : On

0 to 549

Off

c0 Output

105 RW Destination Tag

107 RW Value For False

106 RW Value For True

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)

118

2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)

Digital Input 2

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0.00%

0.01%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)

RO DIGIN 3 (C8)

DIAGNOSTICS

Digital Input 3

0 : Off 1 : On

0 to 549

Off

c1 Output

d0 2, 3

108 RW Destination Tag

110 RW Value For False

109 RW Value For True

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)

119

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)

Digital Input 3

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0.00%

0.01%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ

PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)

RO DIGOUT 1 (B5)

DIAGNOSTICS

Digout 1 (B5)

0 : Off 1 : On

c2 Output

359 RW Inverted

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)

0 : False 1 : True

FALSE

RW Modulus

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)

Digout 1 (B5)

Digout 2 (B6)

0 : False 1 : True

0 to 549

TRUE

RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)

cp 2, 3

195 RW Threshold (>)

75 RO DIGOUT 2 (B6)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0 : Off 1 : On

0.00%

DIAGNOSTICS

c3 Output

MN792

Parameter Table B-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

360 RW Inverted

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)

Digout 2 (B6)

0 : False 1 : True

FALSE

RW Modulus

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)

Digout 2 (B6)

0 : False 1 : True

0 to 549

TRUE

122

RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)

cq 2, 3

196 RW Threshold (>)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0.00%

RO DIGOUT 3 (B7)

DIAGNOSTICS

Digout 3 (B7)

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

c4 Output

361 RW Inverted

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)

0 : False 1 : True

FALSE

RW Modulus

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)

Digout 3 (B7)

Field Control

0 : False 1 : True

0 to 549

TRUE

RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)

125

2, 3

197 RW Threshold (>)

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ

PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0.00%

209 RW FLD.CTRL MODE

CONFIGURE DRIVE

0 : Voltage Control

1 : Current Control

Voltage Control

210 RW FLD.VOLTS RATIO

183 RO Field Demand

169 RO Field Enabled

CONFIGURE DRIVE

DIAGNOSTICS

Field Control

0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

xxx.xx %

67.0%

0.00%

Output

DIAGNOSTICS

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

xxx.xx DEG 0.00 Deg

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

ep Output

184 RO FLD.FIRING ANGLE DIAGNOSTICS

Output

170 RW Field Enable

617 RW Field I Thresh

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL

0.00 to 100.00 %

80.00%

Quench

186 RW FLD. QUENCH

MODE

0 : Quench 1 : Standby

185 RW FLD.QUENCH

DELAY

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL

Field Control

0.0 to 600.0 Secs

0.0 Secs

618 RO Up To Field

172 RW INT. GAIN

Field Control

0 : False 1 : True

0.00 to 100.00

False

1.28

Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS

173 RW PROP. GAIN

171 RW Setpoint

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS

Field Control

0.00 to 100.00

0.00 to 100.00 %

10 to 5000

0.10

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS

100.00%

100

192 RW BEMF FBK LAG

191 RW BEMF FBK LEAD

177 RW EMF GAIN

176 RW EMF LAG

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

10 to 5000

100

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

0.00 to 100.00

0.00 to 200.00

0.10 to 50.00

0.30

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

40.00

2.00

175 RW EMF LEAD

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

174 RW FLD. WEAK ENABLE SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

178 RW MAX VOLTS

SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

0.00 to 100.00 %

100.00%

10.00%

179 RW MIN FLD.CURRENT SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ

TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS

203 RO Inverse Time O/P

204 RW Aiming Point

199 RW Delay

DIAGNOSTICS

Inverse Time

Jog/Slack

xxx.xx %

200.0%

103.00%

10.0 Secs

60.0 Secs

Stop

Output, 2, 4

2, 4

SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME

DIAGNOSTICS

0.00 to 103.00 %

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

2, 4

200 RW Rate

2, 4

212 RO Operating Mode

0 : Stop

1 : Stop

Output

2 : Jog Sp. 1

3 : Jog Sp. 2

4 : Run

5 : Take Up Sp. 1

6 : Take Up Sp. 2

7 : Crawl

B-32 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Jog/Slack

Link 1

Range

Factory Setting

10.00%

20.00 %

-5.00 %

FALSE

MN Notes

225 RW Crawl Speed

218 RW Jog Speed 1

219 RW Jog Speed 2

228 RW Mode

SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK

-100.00 to 100.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

-100.00 to 100.00 %

0 to 549

355 RW Ramp Rate

253 RW Take Up 1

254 RW Take Up 2

365 RW Destination Tag

1.0 Secs

5.00%

-5.00%

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 1

k5 2, 3

364 RW Source Tag

470 RW Destination Tag

469 RW Source Tag

367 RW Destination Tag

366 RW Source Tag

369 RW Destination TaG

368 RW Source Tag

371 RW Destination Tag

370 RW Source Tag

455 RW Destination Tag

454 RW Source Tag

457 RW Destination Tag

456 RW Source Tag

459 RW Destination Tag

458 RW Source Tag

461 RW Destination Tag

460 RW Source Tag

468 RW Destination Tag

467 RW Source Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 1

Link 1

Link 10

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Link 5

Link 6

Link 7

Link 8

Link 9

0 to 549

k4 2, 3

n2 2, 3

n1 2, 3

k7 2, 3

k6 2, 3

k9 2, 3

k8 2, 3

kb 2, 3

ka 2, 3

mn 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 10

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 10

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 2

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 2

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 4

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 4

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 5

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 5

2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 6

mp 2, 3

mo 2, 3

mr 2, 3

mq 2, 3

mt 2, 3

ms 2, 3

n0 2, 3

mz 2, 3

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 6

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 7

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 7

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 8

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 8

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 9

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL

LINKS::LINK 9

RW FULL MENUS

MENUS

Menus

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

547 RW SPD.FBK.FILTER

514 RW Ramp Accel Time

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP

Menus

0.000 to 1.000

0.000

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::LOCAL

RAMP

Op Station

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

10.0 Secs

515 RW Ramp Decel Time

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::LOCAL

RAMP

Op Station

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

10.0 Secs

513 RW Jog Setpoint

511 RW Local Key Enable

512 RW Setpoint

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP Op Station

0.00 to 100.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

0.00 to 100.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

5.00%

TRUE

0.00%

TRUE

516 RW Forward

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

Op Station

520 RW Jog Setpoint

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

Op Station

0.00 to 100.00 %

5.00%

MN792

Parameter Table B-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

517 RW Local

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

Op Station

0 : False 1 : True

TRUE

518 RW Program

519 RW Setpoint

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

Op Station

0 : False 1 : True

0.00 to 100.00 %

FALSE

0.00%

SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START

UP VALUES

416 RO PID Clamped

415 RO PID Error

417 RO PID Output

401 RW DERIVATIVE TC

418 RW Divider 1

414 RW Divider 2

408 RW Enable

DIAGNOSTICS

PID

0 : False 1 : True

xxx.xx %

False

Output

0.00%

xxx.xx %

0.00%

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

0.000 to 10.000 Secs

-3.0000 to 3.0000

0.000Secs

1.0000

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

403 RW FILTER T.C.

410 RW Input 1

0.000 to 10.000 Secs

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0 : Off 1 : On

0.100 Secs

0.00%

Off

411 RW Input 2

409 RW INT. DEFEAT

402 RW INT.TIME.CONST

0.01 to 100.00 Secs

0.00 to 100.00 %

0 to 4

5.00 Secs

20.00%

474 RW MIN PROFILE GAIN SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

473 RW Mode

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

406 RW Negative Limit

-105.00 to 0.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

0.00 to 105.00 %

xxxx.x

-100.00%

0.2000

100.00%

0.0

407 RW O/P SCALER(TRIM) SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

405 RW Positive Limit

475 RO Profiled Gain

404 RW PROP. GAIN

412 RW Ratio 1

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID PID

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM PID Output

n7 Output

0.0 to 100.0

1.0

-3.0000 to 3.0000

0 to 549

1.0000

413 RW Ratio 2

400 RW PID O/P DEST

264 RO Raise/Lower O/P

257 RW Decrease Rate

307 RW External Reset

256 RW Increase Rate

262 RW Lower Input

259 RW Max Value

258 RW Min Value

2, 3

DIAGNOSTICS

Raise/Lower

xxx.xx %

0.00%

10.0 Secs

FALSE

10.0 Secs

FALSE

100.00%

-100.00%

FALSE

0.00%

hc Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0 : False 1 : True

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0 : False 1 : True

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0 to 549

261 RW Raise Input

255 RW Reset Value

260 RW Raise/Lower Dest

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM Raise/Lower

Output

293 RW RAMP O/P DEST

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM Ramp Output

0 to 549

291

2, 3

RO Ramp Output

DIAGNOSTICS

Ramps

xxx.xx %

0.00%

False

2.50%

cd Output

113 RO Ramping

266 RW % S-RAMP

287 RW Auto Reset

DIAGNOSTICS

0 : False 1 : True

0.00 to 100.00 %

d5 Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Enabled

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

RW Constant Accel

288 RW External Reset

620 RW Invert

0 : False 1 : True

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0 : Off 1 : On

False

126 RW MIN SPEED

0.00%

10.0 Secs

Off

RW Ramp Accel Time

RW Ramp Decel Time

118 RW Ramp Hold

RW Ramp Input

-105.00 to 105.00 %

0.00 to 100.00 %

-300.00 to 300.00 %

0 to 549

0.00%

0.50%

0.00%

286 RW RAMPING THRESH. SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

422 RW Reset Value

SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS

135 RW Destination Tag

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE 5703 Scaled 5703

Input

2, 3

RO SPT SUM OUTPUT

DIAGNOSTICS

Setpoint Sum 1

xxx.xx %

0.00%

0.0%

ce Output

131 RW Deadband Width

420 RW Divider 0

419 RW Divider 1

309 RW Input 0

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

0.00 to 100.00 % (h)

-3.0000 to 3.0000

-200.00 to 200.00 %

1.0000

0.00%

B-34 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block Continued

Tag R/W Name

100 RW Input 1

423 RW Input 2

375 RW Limit

208 RW Ratio 0

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

0.00%

MN Notes

SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1

Setpoint Sum 1

-200.00 to 200.00 %

0.00 to 200.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

0.00%

105.00%

1.0000

RW Ratio 1

292 RW SIGN 0

RW Sign 1

294 RW SPT SUM 1 DEST

1.0000

0 : Negative 1 : Positive Positive

SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM Setpoint Sum 1

Output

0 to 549

289

2, 3

RW ENCODER SIGN

RW SPD.INT.TIME

RW SPD.PROP.GAIN

CONFIGURE DRIVE

Speed Loop

0 : Negative 1 : Positive Positive

0.001 to 30.000 Secs

0.00 to 200.00

0.500 Secs

RW SPEED FBK SELECT CONFIGURE DRIVE

0 : Arm Volts Fbk

1 : Analog Tach

2 : Encoder

Arm Volts Fbk

3 : Encoder/Analog

549 RO Speed LOOP O/P

DIAGNOSTICS

Speed Loop

-200 to 200 %

xxx.xx %

0.00%

0.03%

Off

p9 Output, 2

br Output

RO Speed Setpoint

RO UNFIL.SPD.ERROR

RO UNFIL.SPD.FBK

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx %

bs Output

DIAGNOSTICS

xxx.xx %

bq Output

202 RW INT. DEFEAT

357 RW Max Demand

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP

0 : Off 1 : On

0.00 to 105.00 %

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

105.00%

358 RW Min Demand

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

Speed Loop

-105.00 to 105.00 %

-3.0000 to 3.0000

-105.00 to 105.00 %

xxx.xx %

-105.00%

.0000

RW Ratio 2 (A3)

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

289 RW Setpoint 1

290 RO Setpoint 2 (A3)

291 RW Setpoint 3

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

0.00%

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

Output

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

-105.00 to 105.00 %

RW Setpoint 4

RW Sign 2 (A3)

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ

POINTS

0 : Negative 1 : Positive Positive

RO At Standstill

DIAGNOSTICS

Standstill

0 : False 1 : True

0 to 549

True

c7 Output

c6 Output

c5 Output

RO At Zero Setpoint

RO At Zero Speed

DIAGNOSTICS

Standstill

DIAGNOSTICS

Standstill

306 RW Source Tag

SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL

DIAGNOSTICS

Standstill

2, 3, 4

RW Standstill Logic

RW Zero Threshold

Standstill

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

Standstill

0.00 to 100.00 %

0 : False 1 : True

xxx.xx %

2.00%

525 RO Coast Stop

Stop Rates

FALSE

False

Output

RO Program Stop

RO Speed Demand

DIAGNOSTICS

c8 Output

ch Output

DIAGNOSTICS

0.00%

302 RW Contactor Delay

594 RW CURR Decay Rate

SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0 to 200.00

1.0 Secs

0.00

216 RW PROG STOP LIMIT

26 RW PROG Stop Time

217 RW Stop Limit

RW PROG STOP I LIM

0.00 to 200.00 %

0.0 to 600.0 Secs

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0.0 to 600.0 Secs

0.1 to 600.0 Secs

0.00 to 100.00 %

100.00%

60.0 Secs

0.1 Secs

60.0 Secs

10.0 Secs

2.00%

RW Stop Time

RW Stop Zero Speed

130 RW Mode

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

System Port P3 0 : Disabled

1 : 5703 Master

2 : 5703 Slave

3 : CELite (EIASCII)

MN792

Parameter Table B-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block Continued

Tag R/W Name

Keypad Menu

WB Block

Range

Factory Setting

MN Notes

332 RW Error Report

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT

System Port P3 0x0000 to 0xFFFF

System Port P3 0x0000 to 0x0007

System Port P3 0x0000 to 0x000F

0x00C0

329 RW GROUP ID (GID)

330 RW UNIT ID (UID)

506 RO TEC Option Fault

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT

0x0000

None

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ

UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT

SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION

Tec Option

0 : None

o2 Output

1 : Parameter

2 : Type Mismatch

3 : Self Test

4 : Hardware

5 : Missing

501 RW TEC Option IN 1

502 RW TEC Option IN 2

503 RW TEC Option IN 3

504 RW TEC Option IN 4

505 RW TEC Option IN 5

508 RO TEC Option OUT 1

509 RO TEC Option OUT 2

500 RW TEC Option Type

SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION

Tec Option

-32768 to 32767

xxxxx

o4 Output, 1

o5 Output, 1

xxxxx

0 : None

1 : Rs485

None

2 : Profibus Dp

3 : Link

4 : Device Net

5 : Can Open

6 : Lonworks

7 : Type 7

507 RO TEC Option VER

472 RO SPEED FBK STATE

337 RO Thermistor State

SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION

ALARM STATUS

Tec Option

Unallocated

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

0 : False 1 : True

0x0000

False

o3 Output, 1

n4 Output

ALARM STATUS

False

Output

605 RO ARM Volts FBK

83 RO Contactor Closed

RW Configure Enable

CONFIGURE DRIVE

DIAGNOSTICS

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Disabled

0 Volts

Output

DIAGNOSTICS

0 : Off 1 : On

Off

cb Output

kg Output

ke Output

376 RO Drive Running

374 RO System Reset

354 RW Parameter Save

155 RO Version Number

DIAGNOSTICS

0 : False 1 : True

Up To Action Requested

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

False

True

DIAGNOSTICS

PARAMETER SAVE

SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)

eb Output

B-36 Parameter Table

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C

Block Diagram

0-20mA Input

Analog Input 1

Unfiltered Speed Feedback

Analog Output 1

For 4-20mA,

Ramps

Setpoint Sum 1

Speed Loop

Set Min Value =25%

Max Value = 125%

Analog Input 2 = -25%

289

Destination Tag [246]

[230] Calibration

[231] MAX Value

[232] MIN Value

100

Ramp O/P DEST [293]

Ramp Output [85]

Ramping [113]

[251] Input

ANOUT 1 (A7) [55]

[6] Ratio 1

[208] Ratio 0

[8] Sign 1

[292] Sign 0

[419] Divider 1

[420] Divider 0

[131] Deadband

[375] Limit

SPT Sum 1 DEST [294]

SPT Sum [86]

[14] SPD Prop Gain

[13] SPD Int Time

[202] Int Defeat

[49] Encoder Sign

[47] Speed Fdbk Sel

[547] SPD FBK Filter

[289] Setpoint 1

[9] Sign 2 (A3)

[7] Ratio 2 (A3)

[291] Setpoint 3

[41] Setpoint 4

SPD Loop Output [549]

Speed Feedback [62]

Speed Setpoint [63]

UNFIL SPD Error [64]

Setpoint 2 (A3) [290]

[245] 10V CAL

[464] Offset

[362] Modulus

[2] Ramp Accel Time

[3] Ramp Decel Time

[4] Constant Accel

[118] Ramp Hold

[5] Ramp Input

[620] Ramp Invert

[266] % S-Ramp

[286] Ramping Thresh

[287] Auto Reset

ANIN 1 (A2) [50]

Unfiltered Speed Command

Analog Output 2

±10VDC Input w/o Ramp

Analog Input 2

[252] Input

ANOUT 2 (A8) [56]

Output [493]

[233] Calibration

[234] MAX Value

[235] MIN Value

[423] Input 2

[100] Input 1

[309] Input 0

[248] 10V CAL

[465] Offset

[363] Modulus

[288] External Reset

[422] Reset Value

[126] MIN Speed

[357] Max Demand

[358] Min Demand

[595] Preset Torque

[604] Preset T Scale

ANIN 2 (A3) [51]

At Zero Speed

Digital Output 1 (B5)

±10VDC Input with Ramp

Analog Input 3

Enable & Jog/Slack Inputs

Aux I/O

Standstill

122

125

Destination Tag [249]

[236] Calibration

[237] MAX Value

[238] MIN Value

309

[97] Input

DIGOUT 1 (B5) [74]

[359] Inverted

[195] Threshold

[43] Modulus

[306] Source Tag

[11] Standstill Logic

[12] Zero Threshold

At Zero Setpoint [78]

At Zero Speed [77]

At Standstill [79]

Start (C3) [68]

Seq Status [537]

5703

Destination Tag [135]

Raw Input [187]

Scaled Input [189]

[161] AUX Start

[227] AUX Jog

ANIN 3 (A4) [52]

[168] AUX Enable

[94] AUX DIGOUT 1

[95] AUX DIGOUT 2

[96] AUX DIGOUT 3

[128] ANOUT1

Drive Ready

Digital Output 2 (B6)

Optional Reverse I Limit

Analog Input 4

Alarms

89 [134] Source Tag

[132] Setpt Ratio

[133] Setpt Sign

Destination Tag [250]

[239] Calibration

[240] MAX Value

[238] MIN Value

[98] Input

DIGOUT 2 (B6) [75]

[19] Field Fail

Healthy [122]

Ready [125]

Health Word [115]

Health Store [116]

Remote Trip [542]

Stall Trip [112]

[360] Inverted

[196] Threshold

[44] Modulus

[111] 5703 RCV Error

[28] Stall Trip

[305] Trip Reset

[81] Speed Fdbk Alarm

[92] Encoder Alarm

[540] REM Trip Inhibit

[541] REM Trip Delay

[129] ANOUT2

[536] REM Sequence

[535] REM SEQ Enable

[496] Jog/Slack

Stop Rates

ANIN 4 (A5) [53]

Speed Demand [89]

Program Stop [80]

Drive Healthy

Digital Output 3 (B7)

External I Limit

Analog Input 5

Last Alarm [528]

[497] Enable

[27] Stop Time

[217] Stop Limit

Destination Tag [247]

[242] Calibration

[243] MAX Value

[244] MIN Value

301

Terminal Strip Jog/Slack Settings

[99] Input

DIGOUT 3 (B7) [76]

Jog/Slack

[361] Inverted

[197] Threshold

[45] Modulus

[302] Contactor Delay

[26] Prog Stop Time

[216] Prog Stop Limit

[91] Prog Stop I LIM

[29] Stop Zero Speed

Use Minimum field current to set

Maximum Speed in Field Weakening

Operating Mode [212]

[218] Jog Speed 1

[219] Jog Speed 2

[253] Take Up 1

[254] Take Up 2

[225] Crawl Speed

[228] Mode

Field Control

ANIN 5 (A6) [54]

[170] Field Enable

[209] FLD CTRL Mode IS

[210] FLD Volts Ratio

[171] Setpoint

[173] Prop Gain

[172] Int Gain

[174] FLD Weak Enable

[175] EMF Lead

[176] EMF Lag

[177] EMF Gain

[179] MIN Field Curent

[178] MAX Volts

[191] BEMF FBK Lead

[192] BEMF FBK Lag

[185] FLD Quench Delay

[186] FLD Quench Mode

[617] FLD I Threshold

Field Enable [169]

Field Demand [183]

Field Firing Angle [184]

Up To Field [618]

Jog/Slack

Digital Input 1

496

Destination Tag [102]

[103] Value True

[104] Value False

[355] Ramp Rate

Configure Drive

DIGIN 1 (C6) [71]

Current Loop

[15] Cur Limit/Scaler At Current Limit [42]

[421] Main Cur Limit

[16] Prop Gain

[17] Int Gain

[136] Feed Forward

[137] Discontinuous

[30] Additional Dem

[90] Bipolar Clamps

[201] Regen Mode

[301] Pos I Clamp

[48] Neg I Clamp

[119] I DMD Isolate

Calibration

[521] NOM Motor Volts

[523] Armature Current

[524] Field Current

[209] Field Control Mode

[210] Field Volts Ratio

[47] Speed Feedback Select

[22] Encoder RPM

[24] Encoder Lines

[20] Armature V Cal

[21] IR Compensation

[22] Encoder RPM

[24] Encoder Lines

[23] Analog Tach Cal

[10] Zero SPD Offset

[25] Armature I (A9)

Terminal Volts [57]

Unfil Tach Input [58]

Encoder [59]

Jog/Slack Mode

Digital Input 2

IA Demand [66]

IA Feedback [65]

IA Feedback [538]

IF Feedback [539]

Autotune [18]

228

Destination Tag [105]

[106] Value True

[107] Value False

Back EMF [60]

Field FBK [181]

DIGIN 2 (C7) [72]

ILoop Suspend [46]

Master Bridge [527]

[49] Encoder Sign

[180] SPD FBK Alarm Level

[263] Stall Threshold

[224] Stall Trip Delay

[188] Overspeed Level

[182] Field I Cal

[267] Position Count

[275] Position Divider

[521] NOM Motor Volts

[523] Armature Current

[524] Field Current

Speed/Torque Select

Digital Input 3

Destination Tag [108]

[109] Value True

[110] Value False

119

Optional Drive Status Outputs (Read Only)

Diagnostics

Speed Feedback [207]

DIGIN 3 (C8) [73]

Speed Error [297]

Current Demand [299]

Current Feedback [298]

POS I Clamp [87]

Enable

497

620

Destination Tag [494]

DIGIN E (C4) [69]

NEG I Clamp [88]

Actual POS I Limit [67]

Actual NEG I Limit [61]

Drive Start [82]

Reverse

Drive Enable [84]

Destination Tag [495]

DIGIN R (C5) [70]

Field I Feedback [300]

TACH Input (B2) [308]

Encoder [206]

Drive Running [376]

Contactor Closed [83]

Baldor Series 29D Digital DC Drive

MN792

Block Diagram C-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OP Station (Keypad)

PID

Raise/Lower

[511] Local Key Enable

[512] Setpoint

[513] Jog Setpoint

[514] Ramp Accel Time

[515] Ramp Decel Time

[516] Inital FWD Direction

[517] Initial Local

[518] Initial Program

[519] Initial Setpoint

[520] Inital Jog Setpoint

[404] PROP Gain

[402] INT Time Const

[401] Derivative TC

[405] Positive Limit

[406] Negative Limit

[407] Output Scaler (Trim)

[410] Input 1

[411] Input 2

[412] Ratio 1

[413] Ratio 2

[418] Divider 1

Error Report [158]

PID O/P DEST [400]

PID Output [417]

PID Clamped [416]

PID Error [415]

Raise/Lower DEST [260]

[255] Reset Value Raise/Lower O/P [264]

[256] Increase Rate

[257] Decrease Rate

[261] Raise Input

Profiled Gain [475]

[262] Lower Input

[258] MIN Value

[259] MAX Value

[307] External Reset

[414] Divider 2

[408] Enable

[409] Int Defeat

[403] Filter TC

[473] Mode

[474] MIN Profile Gain

TEC Option

[500] Type

Fault [506]

Version [507]

Output 1 [508]

Output 2 [509]

[501] Input 1

[502] Input 2

[503] Input 3

[504] Input 4

[505] Input 5

Menus

Advanced

[37] Full Menus

[547] Speed FDBK Filter

[304] Language

[268] Mode

[269] Speed BRK 1 (Low)

[270] Speed BRK 2 (High)

[271] PROP Gain

[272] INT Time Const

[274] I Gain In Ramp

[273] POS Loop P Gain

[284] Zero Speed Level

[285] Zero IAD Level

Current Profile

[32] SPD BRK 1 (Low)

[31] SPD BRK 2 (High)

[93] IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1)

[33] IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2)

miniLINK

PNO 112

PNO 113

PNO 114

PNO 115

PNO 116

PNO 117

PNO 118

PNO 119

[339] Value 1

[340] Value 2

[341] Value 3

[342] Value 4

[343] Value 5

[344] Value 6

[345] Value 7

[379] Value 8

[380] Value 9

[381] Value 10

[382] Value 11

[383] Value 12

[384] Value 13

[385] Value 14

379 PNO 120

PNO 121

381 PNO 122

382 PNO 123

PNO 124

384 PNO 125

385 PNO 126

380

System Port P3

[332] Error Report

[130] Mode

[329] Group ID

[330] Init ID

383

[346] Logic 1

[347] Logic 2

[348] Logic 3

[349] Logic 4

[350] Logic 5

[351] Logic 6

[352] Logic 7

[353] Logic 8

PNO 127

Baldor Series 29D Digital DC Drive

C-2 Block Diagram

MN792

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BALDOR ELECTRIC COMPANY

P.O. Box 2400

Ft. Smith, AR 72902–2400

(479) 646–4711

Fax (479) 648–5792

www.baldor.com

TEL:+41 52 647 4700

FAX:+41 52 659 2394

TEL:+49 89 90 50 80

FAX:+49 89 90 50 8491

TEL:+44 1454 850000

FAX:+44 1454 859001

TEL:+33 145 10 7902

FAX:+33 145 09 0864

TEL:+39 11 562 4440

FAX:+39 11 562 5660

TEL:+61 29674 5455

FAX:+61 29674 2495

TEL:+65 744 2572

FAX:+65 747 1708

TEL:+52 477 761 2030

FAX:+52 477 761 2010

Baldor Electric Company

MN792

Printed in USA

9/03 C&J1000

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Acer Projector P1165E User Manual
Acoustic Research Headphones ARWH2 User Manual
ADTRAN Network Card ESU 120e User Manual
Aero Housewares TV Cables GR900 Series User Manual
Alamo Lawn Mower 02984405 User Manual
Asus Computer Accessories A7V8X LA User Manual
Audiovox Speaker IC Five S User Manual
Badger Basket Personal Computer N64944 001 User Manual
Bahco Impact Driver Ratchet Combination Wrench User Manual
BC Speakers Portable Speaker ME60 User Manual